+ 
+
+
+ Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.check_if_in_list + (gle, gl_map) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.delete_gl_entries + (gl_entries=None, voucher_type=None, voucher_no=None, adv_adj=False, update_outstanding=Yes) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.make_entry + (args, adv_adj, update_outstanding) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.make_gl_entries + (gl_map, cancel=False, adv_adj=False, merge_entries=True, update_outstanding=Yes) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.make_round_off_gle + (gl_map, debit_credit_diff) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.merge_similar_entries + (gl_map) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.process_gl_map + (gl_map, merge_entries=True) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.round_off_debit_credit + (gl_map) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.save_entries + (gl_map, adv_adj, update_outstanding) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.validate_account_for_auto_accounting_for_stock + (gl_map) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party._get_party_details + (party=None, account=None, party_type=Customer, company=None, posting_date=None, price_list=None, currency=None, doctype=None, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_company_currency + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_credit_days + (party_type, party, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_default_price_list + (party) +
+Return default price list for party (Document object)
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.party.get_due_date
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_due_date + (posting_date, party_type, party, company) +
+Set Due Date = Posting Date + Credit Days
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_account
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_account + (party_type, party, company) +
+Returns the account for the given party.
+Will first search in party (Customer / Supplier) record, if not found,
+will search in group (Customer Group / Supplier Type),
+finally will return default.
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_account_currency + (party_type, party, company) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_details
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_details + (party=None, account=None, party_type=Customer, company=None, posting_date=None, price_list=None, currency=None, doctype=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_gle_currency + (party_type, party, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_account_and_due_date + (party, account, party_type, company, posting_date, doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_address_details + (out, party, party_type) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_contact_details + (out, party, party_type) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_other_values + (out, party, party_type) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_price_list + (out, party, party_type, given_price_list) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.party.set_taxes
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_taxes + (party, party_type, posting_date, company, customer_group=None, supplier_type=None, billing_address=None, shipping_address=None, use_for_shopping_cart=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.validate_due_date + (posting_date, due_date, party_type, party, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.validate_party_accounts + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.party.validate_party_gle_currency + (party_type, party, company, party_account_currency=None) +
+Validate party account currency with existing GL Entry's currency
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.add_ac
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.add_ac + (args=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.add_cc
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.add_cc + (args=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.check_if_jv_modified + (args) +
+check if there is already a voucher reference +check if amount is same +check if jv is submitted
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.fix_total_debit_credit + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_actual_expense + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_allocated_budget + (distribution_id, posting_date, fiscal_year, yearly_budget) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.get_balance_on
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_balance_on + (account=None, date=None, party_type=None, party=None, in_account_currency=True) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.get_company_default
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_company_default + (company, fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_currency_precision + (currency=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.get_fiscal_year
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_fiscal_year + (date=None, fiscal_year=None, label=Date, verbose=1, company=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_fiscal_years + (transaction_date=None, fiscal_year=None, label=Date, verbose=1, company=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_outstanding_invoices + (amount_query, account, party_type, party) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_stock_and_account_difference + (account_list=None, posting_date=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_stock_rbnb_difference + (posting_date, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.reconcile_against_document + (args) +
+Cancel JV, Update aginst document, split if required and resubmit jv
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.remove_against_link_from_jv + (ref_type, ref_no) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.update_against_doc + (d, jv_obj) +
+Updates against document, if partial amount splits into rows
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.validate_allocated_amount + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.validate_expense_against_budget + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.validate_fiscal_year + (date, fiscal_year, label=Date, doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.accounts.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.buying.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.crm.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.desktop.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.docs.get_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.hr.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.learn.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.manufacturing.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.projects.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.selling.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.setup.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.stock.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.support.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.config.website.get_data + () +
+No docs
+Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + append_taxes_from_master + (self, tax_master_doctype=None) +
+No docs
++ + + before_recurring + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_taxes_and_totals + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + clear_unallocated_advances + (self, childtype, parentfield) +
+No docs
++ + + get_advances + (self, account_head, party_type, party, child_doctype, parentfield, dr_or_cr, against_order_field) +
+Returns list of advances against Account, Party, Reference
++ + + get_company_default + (self, fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + get_gl_dict + (self, args, account_currency=None) +
+this method populates the common properties of a gl entry record
++ + + get_party + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_stock_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_balance_in_account_currency + (self, gl_dict, account_currency=None) +
+No docs
++ + + set_missing_item_details + (self) +
+set missing item values
++ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + set_other_charges + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_price_list_currency + (self, buying_or_selling) +
+No docs
++ + + set_taxes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_total_advance_paid + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_account_currency + (self, account, account_currency=None) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_advance_jv + (self, reference_type) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_date_with_fiscal_year + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_due_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_enabled_taxes_and_charges + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_multiple_billing + (self, ref_dt, item_ref_dn, based_on, parentfield) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_party + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_default_taxes_and_charges
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_default_taxes_and_charges + (master_doctype) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_tax_rate
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_tax_rate + (account_head) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_taxes_and_charges
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_taxes_and_charges + (master_doctype, master_name) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.validate_conversion_rate + (currency, conversion_rate, conversion_rate_label, company) +
+common validation for currency and price list currency
++ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.validate_inclusive_tax + (tax, doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.validate_taxes_and_charges + (tax) +
+No docs
+Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+ + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + cleanup_raw_materials_supplied + (self, parent_items, raw_material_table) +
+Remove all those child items which are no longer present in main item table
++ + + create_raw_materials_supplied + (self, raw_material_table) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_items_from_bom + (self, item_code, bom) +
+No docs
++ + + is_item_table_empty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + set_qty_as_per_stock_uom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_supplier_from_item_default + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_total_in_words + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_raw_materials_supplied + (self, item, raw_material_table) +
+No docs
++ + + update_valuation_rate + (self, parentfield) +
+itemtaxamount is the total tax amount applied on that item +stored for valuation
+ +TODO: rename itemtaxamount to valuationtaxamount
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_for_subcontracting + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_stock_or_nonstock_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.copy_attributes_to_variant + (item, variant) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.item_variant.create_variant
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.create_variant + (item, args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.find_variant + (item, args) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.item_variant.get_variant
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.get_variant + (item, args) +
+Validates Attributes and their Values, then looks for an exactly matching Item Variant
+ +Parameters:
+ +item - Template Itemargs - A dictionary with "Attribute" as key and "Attribute Value" as value+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.make_variant_item_code + (template, variant) +
+Uses template's item code and abbreviations to make variant's item code
++ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.validate_item_variant_attributes + (item, args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.print_settings.print_settings_for_item_table + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.bom + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.customer_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.employee_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_account_list + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_batch_no + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_delivery_notes_to_be_billed + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_filters_cond + (doctype, filters, conditions) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.queries.get_income_account
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_income_account + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_project_name + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.item_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.lead_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.supplier_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.tax_account_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.assign_task_to_owner + (doc, doctype, msg, users) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.convert_to_recurring + (doc, posting_date) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.create_recurring_documents + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.get_next_date + (dt, mcount, day=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.make_new_document + (ref_wrapper, date_field, posting_date) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.manage_recurring_documents + (doctype, next_date=None, commit=True) +
+Create recurring documents on specific date by copying the original one +and notify the concerned people
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.notify_errors + (doc, doctype, party, owner) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.send_notification + (new_rv) +
+Notify concerned persons about recurring document generation
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.set_next_date + (doc, posting_date) +
+Set next date on which recurring document will be created
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.validate_notification_email_id + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.validate_recurring_document + (doc) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.get_already_returned_items + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.make_return_doc + (doctype, source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.validate_return + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.validate_return_against + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.validate_returned_items + (doc) +
+No docs
+Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+ + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + apply_shipping_rule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_commission + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_contribution + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_stop_or_close_sales_order + (self, ref_fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + get_already_delivered_qty + (self, current_docname, so, so_detail) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_item_list + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_so_qty_and_warehouse + (self, so_detail) +
+No docs
++ + + has_product_bundle + (self, item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + remove_shipping_charge + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_missing_lead_customer_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + set_price_list_and_item_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_total_in_words + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_max_discount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_order_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.check_active_sales_items + (obj) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Updates the status of the calling records +Delivery Note: Update Delivered Qty, Update Percent and Validate over delivery +Sales Invoice: Update Billed Amt, Update Percent and Validate over billing +Installation Note: Update Installed Qty, Update Percent Qty and Validate over installation
++ + + _update_children + (self, args) +
+Update quantities or amount in child table
++ + + _update_percent_field + (self, args) +
+Update percent field in parent transaction
++ + + check_overflow_with_tolerance + (self, item, args) +
+Checks if there is overflow condering a relaxation tolerance
++ + + set_status + (self, update=False, status=None) +
+No docs
++ + + update_billing_status + (self, zero_amount_refdoc, ref_dt, ref_fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + update_billing_status_for_zero_amount_refdoc + (self, ref_dt) +
+No docs
++ + + update_prevdoc_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_qty + (self, change_modified=True) +
+Updates qty or amount at row level
+ +Parameters:
+ +change_modified - If true, updates modified and modified_by for target parent doc+ + + validate_qty + (self) +
+Validates qty at row level
++ + + erpnext.controllers.status_updater.get_tolerance_for + (item_code, item_tolerance={}, global_tolerance=None) +
+Returns the tolerance for the item, if not set, returns global tolerance
++ + + erpnext.controllers.status_updater.validate_status + (status, options) +
+No docs
+Inherits from erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.AccountsController + +
+ + + check_expense_account + (self, item) +
+No docs
++ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account=None, default_expense_account=None, default_cost_center=None) +
+No docs
++ + + get_incoming_rate_for_sales_return + (self, item_code, warehouse, against_document) +
+No docs
++ + + get_items_and_warehouses + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_serialized_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_sl_entries + (self, d, args) +
+No docs
++ + + get_stock_ledger_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_voucher_details + (self, default_expense_account, default_cost_center, sle_map) +
+No docs
++ + + make_adjustment_entry + (self, expected_gle, voucher_obj) +
+No docs
++ + + make_gl_entries + (self, repost_future_gle=True) +
+No docs
++ + + make_gl_entries_on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + make_sl_entries + (self, sl_entries, is_amended=None, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + update_reserved_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_stock_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.compare_existing_and_expected_gle + (existing_gle, expected_gle) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.get_future_stock_vouchers + (posting_date, posting_time, for_warehouses=None, for_items=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.get_voucherwise_gl_entries + (future_stock_vouchers, posting_date) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.get_warehouse_account + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.update_gl_entries_after + (posting_date, posting_time, for_warehouses=None, for_items=None, warehouse_account=None) +
+No docs
+Inherits from __builtin__.object + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, doc) +
+No docs
++ + + _calculate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + _cleanup + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + _get_tax_rate + (self, tax, item_tax_map) +
+No docs
++ + + _load_item_tax_rate + (self, item_tax_rate) +
+No docs
++ + + _set_in_company_currency + (self, doc, fields) +
+set values in base currency
++ + + adjust_discount_amount_loss + (self, tax) +
+No docs
++ + + apply_discount_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_item_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_net_total + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_outstanding_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_taxes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_total_advance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_totals + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + determine_exclusive_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_current_tax_amount + (self, item, tax, item_tax_map) +
+No docs
++ + + get_current_tax_fraction + (self, tax, item_tax_map) +
+Get tax fraction for calculating tax exclusive amount +from tax inclusive amount
++ + + get_total_for_discount_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + initialize_taxes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + manipulate_grand_total_for_inclusive_tax + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + round_off_totals + (self, tax) +
+No docs
++ + + set_item_wise_tax + (self, item, tax, tax_rate, current_tax_amount) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_conversion_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.based_wise_columns_query + (based_on, trans) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_columns + (filters, trans) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_data + (filters, conditions) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_mon + (dt) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_date_ranges
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_date_ranges + (period, fiscal_year=None, year_start_date=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_month_ranges + (period, fiscal_year) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_wise_columns + (bet_dates, period, pwc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_wise_query + (bet_dates, trans_date, query_details) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.group_wise_column + (group_by) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.period_wise_columns_query + (filters, trans) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.validate_filters + (filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.get_customers_suppliers + (doctype, user) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.get_transaction_list + (doctype, txt=None, filters=None, limit_start=0, limit_page_length=20) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.has_website_permission + (doc, ptype, user, verbose=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.post_process + (doctype, data) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.utils.set_employee_name + (doc) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hub_node.get_items
+
+ + + erpnext.hub_node.get_items + (text, start, limit) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.utils.get_time_log_list
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.utils.get_time_log_list + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.utils.query_task
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.utils.query_task + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.install.add_web_forms + () +
+Import web forms for Issues and Addresses
++ + + erpnext.setup.install.after_install + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.install.feature_setup + () +
+save global defaults and features setup
++ + + erpnext.setup.install.set_single_defaults + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.utils.before_tests + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.utils.get_ancestors_of + (doctype, name) +
+Get ancestor elements of a DocType with a tree structure
++ + + erpnext.setup.utils.get_company_currency + (company) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.utils.get_exchange_rate
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.utils.get_exchange_rate + (from_currency, to_currency) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.utils.get_root_of + (doctype) +
+Get root element of a DocType with a tree structure
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart._apply_shipping_rule + (party=None, quotation=None, cart_settings=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart._get_cart_quotation + (party=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart._set_price_list + (quotation, cart_settings) +
+Set price list based on customer or shopping cart default
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.apply_cart_settings + (party=None, quotation=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.apply_shipping_rule
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.apply_shipping_rule + (shipping_rule) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.decorate_quotation_doc + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_address_docs + (doctype=None, txt=None, filters=None, limit_start=0, limit_page_length=20, party=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_address_territory + (address_name) +
+Tries to match city, state and country of address to existing territory
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_applicable_shipping_rules + (party=None, quotation=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_cart_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_cart_quotation + (doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_customer + (user=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_shipping_rules + (quotation=None, cart_settings=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.guess_territory + () +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.place_order
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.place_order + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.set_cart_count + (quotation=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.set_price_list_and_rate + (quotation, cart_settings) +
+set price list based on billing territory
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.set_taxes + (quotation, cart_settings) +
+set taxes based on billing territory
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_cart
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_cart + (item_code, qty, with_items=False) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_cart_address
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_cart_address + (address_fieldname, address_name) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_party + (fullname, company_name=None, mobile_no=None, phone=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.product.get_price + (item_code, template_item_code, price_list) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.product.get_product_info
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.product.get_product_info + (item_code) +
+get product price / stock info
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.product.get_qty_in_stock + (item_code, template_item_code) +
+No docs
+Inherits from unittest.case.TestCase + +
Note: +Shopping Cart == Quotation
++ + + create_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + disable_shopping_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + enable_shopping_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + login_as_customer + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + login_as_new_user + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + remove_all_items_from_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + remove_test_quotation + (self, quotation) +
+No docs
++ + + setUp + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + tearDown + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + test_add_to_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + test_get_cart_customer + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + test_get_cart_new_user + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + test_remove_from_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + test_tax_rule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + test_update_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.clear_cart_count + (login_manager) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.set_cart_count + (login_manager) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.show_cart_count + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.update_my_account_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.update_website_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.startup.boot.boot_session + (bootinfo) +
+boot session - send website info if guest
++ + + erpnext.startup.boot.get_letter_heads + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.startup.boot.load_country_and_currency + (bootinfo) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.startup.boot.update_page_info + (bootinfo) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.startup.notifications.get_notification_config + () +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.apply_price_list
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.apply_price_list + (args) +
+args = { + "itemlist": [{"doctype": "", "name": "", "itemcode": "", "brand": "", "itemgroup": ""}, ...], + "conversionrate": 1.0, + "sellingpricelist": None, + "pricelistcurrency": None, + "plcconversionrate": 1.0, + "parenttype": "", + "parent": "", + "supplier": None, + "transactiondate": None, + "conversionrate": 1.0, + "buyingpricelist": None, + "transactiontype": "selling", + "ignorepricing_rule": 0/1 +}
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.apply_price_list_on_item + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_actual_batch_qty + (batch_no, warehouse, item_code) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_available_qty
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_available_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_basic_details + (args, item) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_batch_qty
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_batch_qty + (batch_no, warehouse, item_code) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_conversion_factor
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_conversion_factor + (item_code, uom) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_bom
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_bom + (item_code=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_cost_center + (args, item) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_expense_account + (args, item) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_income_account + (args, item) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_item_code
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_item_code + (barcode=None, serial_no=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_item_details
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_item_details + (args) +
+args = { + "itemcode": "", + "warehouse": None, + "customer": "", + "conversionrate": 1.0, + "sellingpricelist": None, + "pricelistcurrency": None, + "plcconversionrate": 1.0, + "parenttype": "", + "parent": "", + "supplier": None, + "transactiondate": None, + "conversionrate": 1.0, + "buyingpricelist": None, + "issubcontracted": "Yes" / "No", + "transactiontype": "selling", + "ignorepricingrule": 0/1 + "project_name": "" +}
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_party_item_code + (args, item_doc, out) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_pos_profile
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_pos_profile + (company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_pos_profile_item_details + (company, args, pos_profile=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_price_list_currency + (price_list) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_price_list_currency_and_exchange_rate + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_price_list_rate + (args, item_doc, out) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_price_list_rate_for + (args, item_code) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_projected_qty
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_projected_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_serial_nos_by_fifo + (args, item_doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.insert_item_price + (args) +
+Insert Item Price if Price List and Price List Rate are specified and currency is the same
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.process_args + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.validate_conversion_rate + (args, meta) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.validate_item_details + (args, item) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.validate_price_list + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item._reorder_item + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.create_material_request + (material_requests) +
+Create indent on reaching reorder level
++ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.get_item_warehouse_projected_qty + (items_to_consider) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.notify_errors + (exceptions_list) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.reorder_item + () +
+Reorder item if stock reaches reorder level
++ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.send_email_notification + (mr_list) +
+Notify user about auto creation of indent
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_balance_qty_from_sle + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_indented_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_ordered_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_planned_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_reserved_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.repost + (only_actual=False, allow_negative_stock=False, allow_zero_rate=False, only_bin=False) +
+Repost everything!
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.repost_actual_qty + (item_code, warehouse, allow_zero_rate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.repost_all_stock_vouchers + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.repost_stock + (item_code, warehouse, allow_zero_rate=False, only_actual=False, only_bin=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.reset_serial_no_status_and_warehouse + (serial_nos=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.set_stock_balance_as_per_serial_no + (item_code=None, posting_date=None, posting_time=None, fiscal_year=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.update_bin_qty + (item_code, warehouse, qty_dict=None) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.delete_cancelled_entry + (voucher_type, voucher_no) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.get_previous_sle + (args, for_update=False) +
+get the last sle on or before the current time-bucket, +to get actual qty before transaction, this function +is called from various transaction like stock entry, reco etc
+ +args = { + "itemcode": "ABC", + "warehouse": "XYZ", + "postingdate": "2012-12-12", + "posting_time": "12:00", + "sle": "name of reference Stock Ledger Entry" +}
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.get_stock_ledger_entries + (previous_sle, operator=None, order=desc, limit=None, for_update=False, debug=False) +
+get stock ledger entries filtered by specific posting datetime conditions
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.get_valuation_rate + (item_code, warehouse, allow_zero_rate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.make_entry + (args, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.make_sl_entries + (sl_entries, is_amended=None, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.set_as_cancel + (voucher_type, voucher_no) +
+No docs
+Inherits from __builtin__.object + +
update valution rate and qty after transaction +from the current time-bucket onwards
+ +Parameters:
+ +args - args as dict
args = { + "itemcode": "ABC", + "warehouse": "XYZ", + "postingdate": "2012-12-12", + "posting_time": "12:00" +}
+ + + __init__ + (self, args, allow_zero_rate=False, allow_negative_stock=None, via_landed_cost_voucher=False, verbose=1) +
+No docs
++ + + build + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_fifo_values + (self, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + get_moving_average_values + (self, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + get_serialized_values + (self, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + get_sle_after_datetime + (self) +
+get Stock Ledger Entries after a particular datetime, for reposting
++ + + get_sle_before_datetime + (self) +
+get previous stock ledger entry before current time-bucket
++ + + process_sle + (self, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + raise_exceptions + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_bin + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_negative_stock + (self, sle) +
+validate negative stock for entries current datetime onwards +will not consider cancelled entries
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_avg_purchase_rate + (serial_nos) +
+get average value of serial numbers
++ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_bin + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_fifo_rate + (previous_stock_queue, qty) +
+get FIFO (average) Rate from Queue
++ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_incoming_rate + (args) +
+Get Incoming Rate based on valuation method
++ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_latest_stock_balance + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_stock_balance + (item_code, warehouse, posting_date=None, posting_time=None, with_valuation_rate=False) +
+Returns stock balance quantity at given warehouse on given posting date or current date.
+ +If with_valuation_rate is True, will return tuple (qty, rate)
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_stock_value_on + (warehouse=None, posting_date=None, item_code=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_valid_serial_nos + (sr_nos, qty=0, item_code=) +
+split serial nos, validate and return list of valid serial nos
++ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_valuation_method + (item_code) +
+get valuation method from item or default
++ + + erpnext.stock.utils.update_bin + (args, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.utils.validate_warehouse_company + (warehouse, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.utilities.address_and_contact.get_permission_query_conditions + (doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.utilities.address_and_contact.get_permission_query_conditions_for_address + (user) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.utilities.address_and_contact.get_permission_query_conditions_for_contact + (user) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.utilities.address_and_contact.get_permitted_and_not_permitted_links + (doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.utilities.address_and_contact.has_permission + (doc, ptype, user) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.utilities.address_and_contact.load_address_and_contact + (doc, key) +
+Loads address list and contact list in __onload
+ + + erpnext.utilities.update_doctypes + () +
+No docs
+Inherits from erpnext.controllers.status_updater.StatusUpdater + +
+ + + _add_calendar_event + (self, opts) +
+No docs
++ + + add_calendar_event + (self, opts, force=False) +
+No docs
++ + + compare_values + (self, ref_doc, fields, doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + delete_events + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + load_notification_message + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_posting_time + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_rate_with_reference_doc + (self, ref_details) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_uom_is_integer + (self, uom_field, qty_fields) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self, ref) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.delete_events + (ref_type, ref_name) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.validate_uom_is_integer + (doc, uom_field, qty_fields, child_dt=None) +
+No docs
+| + App Name + | +
+ erpnext
+ |
+
| + Publisher + | +
+ Frappe Technologies Pvt. Ltd.
+ |
+
| + Version + | +
+ 6.7.7
+ |
+
Table Name: tabAccount
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +properties |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +account_name |
+ + Data | ++ Account Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +is_group |
+ + Check | ++ Is Group + + | ++ |
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +root_type |
+ + Select | ++ Root Type + + | +
+ +Asset +Liability +Income +Expense +Equity+ |
+
| 7 | +report_type |
+ + Select | ++ Report Type + + | +
+ +Balance Sheet +Profit and Loss+ |
+
| 8 | +account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 9 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +parent_account |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 11 | +account_type |
+ + Select | +
+ Account Type
+ + Setting Account Type helps in selecting this Account in transactions. + |
+
+ +Bank +Cash +Tax +Chargeable +Warehouse +Receivable +Payable +Equity +Fixed Asset +Cost of Goods Sold +Expense Account +Round Off +Income Account +Stock Received But Not Billed +Expenses Included In Valuation +Stock Adjustment +Stock +Temporary+ |
+
| 12 | +tax_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Rate
+ + Rate at which this tax is applied + |
+ + |
| 13 | +freeze_account |
+ + Select | +
+ Frozen
+ + If the account is frozen, entries are allowed to restricted users. + |
+
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 14 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 15 | +balance_must_be |
+ + Select | ++ Balance must be + + | +
+ +Debit +Credit+ |
+
| 16 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ Lft + + | ++ |
| 17 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ Rgt + + | ++ |
| 18 | +old_parent |
+ + Data | ++ Old Parent + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + after_rename + (self, old, new, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + before_rename + (self, old, new, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + check_gle_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_if_child_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + convert_group_to_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + convert_ledger_to_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_root_and_report_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_nsm_model + (self) +
+update lft, rgt indices for nested set model
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_account_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_balance_must_be_debit_or_credit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_frozen_accounts_modifier + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_parent + (self) +
+Fetch Parent Details and validate parent account
++ + + validate_root_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_trash + (self) +
+checks gl entries and if child exists
++ + + validate_warehouse + (self, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_warehouse_account + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.account.account.get_account_currency + (account) +
+Helper function to get account currency
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.account.account.get_parent_account + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +auto_accounting_for_stock |
+ + Check | +
+ Make Accounting Entry For Every Stock Movement
+ + If enabled, the system will post accounting entries for inventory automatically. + |
+ + |
| 2 | +acc_frozen_upto |
+ + Date | +
+ Accounts Frozen Upto
+ + Accounting entry frozen up to this date, nobody can do / modify entry except role specified below. + |
+ + |
| 3 | +frozen_accounts_modifier |
+ + Link | +
+ Role Allowed to Set Frozen Accounts & Edit Frozen Entries
+ + Users with this role are allowed to set frozen accounts and create / modify accounting entries against frozen accounts + |
+ + + + + +Role + + + + | +
| 4 | +credit_controller |
+ + Link | +
+ Credit Controller
+ + Role that is allowed to submit transactions that exceed credit limits set. + |
+ + + + + +Role + + + + | +
| 5 | +check_supplier_invoice_uniqueness |
+ + Check | ++ Check Supplier Invoice Number Uniqueness + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +bank_account |
+ + Link | +
+ Bank Account
+ + Select account head of the bank where cheque was deposited. + |
+ + + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +include_reconciled_entries |
+ + Check | ++ Include Reconciled Entries + + | ++ |
| 6 | +get_relevant_entries |
+ + Button | ++ Get Relevant Entries + + | ++ |
| 7 | +journal_entries |
+ + Table | ++ Journal Entries + + | ++ + + + +Bank Reconciliation Detail + + + + | +
| 8 | +update_clearance_date |
+ + Button | ++ Update Clearance Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_details + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabBank Reconciliation Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +voucher_id |
+ + Link | ++ Voucher ID + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
| 2 | +clearance_date |
+ + Date | ++ Clearance Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +against_account |
+ + Data | ++ Against Account + + | ++ |
| 4 | +cheque_number |
+ + Data | ++ Cheque Number + + | ++ |
| 5 | +debit |
+ + Currency | ++ Debit + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +credit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 7 | +reference_type |
+ + Link | ++ Reference Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 8 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Reference Name + + | +
+ reference_type+ |
+
| 9 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +cheque_date |
+ + Date | ++ Cheque Date + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabBudget Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 2 | +budget_allocated |
+ + Currency | ++ Budget Allocated + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 3 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
Table Name: tabC-Form
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ C-FORM-+ |
+
| 3 | +c_form_no |
+ + Data | ++ C-Form No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +received_date |
+ + Date | ++ Received Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 8 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 9 | +quarter |
+ + Select | ++ Quarter + + | +
+ +I +II +III +IV+ |
+
| 10 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 11 | +state |
+ + Data | ++ State + + | ++ |
| 12 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +invoices |
+ + Table | ++ Invoices + + | ++ + + + +C-Form Invoice Detail + + + + | +
| 14 | +total_invoiced_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Invoiced Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 15 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +C-Form + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + before_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_invoice_details + (self, invoice_no) +
+Pull details from invoices for referrence
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+Update C-Form No on invoices
++ + + set_cform_in_sales_invoices + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_total_invoiced_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+Validate invoice that c-form is applicable +and no other c-form is received for that
+Table Name: tabC-Form Invoice Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +invoice_no |
+ + Link | ++ Invoice No + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 2 | +invoice_date |
+ + Date | ++ Invoice Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 4 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 5 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabCost Center
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +sb0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +cost_center_name |
+ + Data | ++ Cost Center Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +parent_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 4 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 5 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +is_group |
+ + Check | ++ Is Group + + | ++ |
| 7 | +sb1 |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Budget
+ + Define Budget for this Cost Center. To set budget action, see "Company List" + |
+ + |
| 8 | +distribution_id |
+ + Link | +
+ Distribution Id
+ + Select Monthly Distribution, if you want to track based on seasonality. + |
+ + + + + +Monthly Distribution + + + + | +
| 9 | +budgets |
+ + Table | +
+ Budgets
+ + Add rows to set annual budgets on Accounts. + |
+ + + + + +Budget Detail + + + + | +
| 10 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 11 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 12 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ old_parent + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet + +
+ + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + before_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + check_gle_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_if_child_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + convert_group_to_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + convert_ledger_to_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabFiscal Year
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +year |
+ + Data | +
+ Year Name
+ + For e.g. 2012, 2012-13 + |
+ + |
| 2 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 3 | +year_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Year Start Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +year_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Year End Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +companies |
+ + Table | ++ Companies + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year Company + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_as_default + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.fiscal_year.fiscal_year.auto_create_fiscal_year
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.fiscal_year.fiscal_year.auto_create_fiscal_year + () +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.fiscal_year.fiscal_year.check_duplicate_fiscal_year
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.fiscal_year.fiscal_year.check_duplicate_fiscal_year + (doc) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabFiscal Year Company
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
Table Name: tabGL Entry
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Transaction Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 4 | +party_type |
+ + Link | ++ Party Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 5 | +party |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Party + + | +
+ party_type+ |
+
| 6 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 7 | +debit |
+ + Currency | ++ Debit Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 8 | +credit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 9 | +account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 10 | +debit_in_account_currency |
+ + Currency | ++ Debit Amount in Account Currency + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 11 | +credit_in_account_currency |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Amount in Account Currency + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 12 | +against |
+ + Text | ++ Against + + | ++ |
| 13 | +against_voucher_type |
+ + Link | ++ Against Voucher Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 14 | +against_voucher |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Against Voucher + + | +
+ against_voucher_type+ |
+
| 15 | +voucher_type |
+ + Link | ++ Voucher Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 16 | +voucher_no |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Voucher No + + | +
+ voucher_type+ |
+
| 17 | +remarks |
+ + Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 18 | +is_opening |
+ + Select | ++ Is Opening + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 19 | +is_advance |
+ + Select | ++ Is Advance + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 20 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 21 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_pl_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update_with_args + (self, adv_adj, update_outstanding=Yes) +
+No docs
++ + + pl_must_have_cost_center + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_account_details + (self, adv_adj) +
+Account must be ledger, active and not freezed
++ + + validate_cost_center + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_party + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_posting_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.check_freezing_date + (posting_date, adv_adj=False) +
+Nobody can do GL Entries where posting date is before freezing date +except authorized person
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.update_against_account + (voucher_type, voucher_no) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.update_outstanding_amt + (account, party_type, party, against_voucher_type, against_voucher, on_cancel=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.validate_balance_type + (account, adv_adj=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.validate_frozen_account + (account, adv_adj=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabJournal Entry
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +entry_type_and_date |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-flag+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +voucher_type |
+ + Select | ++ Entry Type + + | +
+ Journal Entry +Bank Entry +Cash Entry +Credit Card Entry +Debit Note +Credit Note +Contra Entry +Excise Entry +Write Off Entry +Opening Entry+ |
+
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ JV-+ |
+
| 5 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +2_add_edit_gl_entries |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-table+ |
+
| 8 | +accounts |
+ + Table | ++ Accounting Entries + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry Account + + + + | +
| 9 | +section_break99 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +cheque_no |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Number + + | ++ |
| 11 | +cheque_date |
+ + Date | ++ Reference Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +user_remark |
+ + Small Text | ++ User Remark + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break99 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +total_debit |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Debit + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 15 | +total_credit |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Credit + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +difference |
+ + Currency | ++ Difference (Dr - Cr) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +get_balance |
+ + Button | ++ Make Difference Entry + + | ++ |
| 18 | +multi_currency |
+ + Check | ++ Multi Currency + + | ++ |
| 19 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +total_amount_in_words |
+ + Data | ++ Total Amount in Words + + | ++ |
| 21 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | +
+ icon-pushpin+ |
+
| 22 | +clearance_date |
+ + Date | ++ Clearance Date + + | ++ |
| 23 | +remark |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remark + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break98 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +bill_no |
+ + Data | ++ Bill No + + | ++ |
| 26 | +bill_date |
+ + Date | ++ Bill Date + + | ++ |
| 27 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Due Date + + | ++ |
| 28 | +write_off |
+ + Section Break | ++ Write Off + + | ++ |
| 29 | +write_off_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Write Off Based On + + | +
+ Accounts Receivable +Accounts Payable+ |
+
| 30 | +get_outstanding_invoices |
+ + Button | ++ Get Outstanding Invoices + + | +
+ get_outstanding_invoices+ |
+
| 31 | +column_break_30 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 33 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 34 | +pay_to_recd_from |
+ + Data | ++ Pay To / Recd From + + | ++ |
| 35 | +column_break_35 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 37 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 38 | +addtional_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 39 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 40 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 41 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 42 | +is_opening |
+ + Select | ++ Is Opening + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 43 | +stock_entry |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Entry + + | ++ + + + +Stock Entry + + + + | +
| 44 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.AccountsController + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + check_credit_limit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + create_remarks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_balance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_outstanding_invoices + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_title + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + make_gl_entries + (self, cancel=0, adv_adj=0) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_account_and_party_balance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_against_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_amounts_in_company_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_exchange_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_print_format_fields + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_total_amount + (self, amt) +
+No docs
++ + + update_advance_paid + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_expense_claim + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_against_jv + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_cheque_info + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_credit_debit_note + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_debit_and_credit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_empty_accounts_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_entries_for_advance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_expense_claim + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_invoices + (self) +
+Validate totals and docstatus for invoices
++ + + validate_multi_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_orders + (self) +
+Validate totals, stopped and docstatus for orders
++ + + validate_party + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_reference_doc + (self) +
+Validates reference document
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_account_balance_and_party_type
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_account_balance_and_party_type + (account, date, company, debit=None, credit=None, exchange_rate=None) +
+Returns dict of account balance and party type to be set in Journal Entry on selection of account.
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_against_jv + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_average_exchange_rate + (account) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_default_bank_cash_account
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_default_bank_cash_account + (company, voucher_type, mode_of_payment=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_exchange_rate
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_exchange_rate + (account, account_currency=None, company=None, reference_type=None, reference_name=None, debit=None, credit=None, exchange_rate=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_opening_accounts
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_opening_accounts + (company) +
+get all balance sheet accounts for opening entry
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_outstanding
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_outstanding + (args) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_party_account_and_balance
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_party_account_and_balance + (company, party_type, party) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry + (ref_doc, args) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry_against_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry_against_invoice + (dt, dn) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry_against_order
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry_against_order + (dt, dn) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabJournal Entry Account
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 2 | +account_type |
+ + Data | ++ Account Type + + | ++ |
| 3 | +balance |
+ + Currency | ++ Account Balance + + | +
+ account_currency+ |
+
| 4 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | +
+ Cost Center
+ + If Income or Expense + |
+ + + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 5 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +party_type |
+ + Link | ++ Party Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 7 | +party |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Party + + | +
+ party_type+ |
+
| 8 | +party_balance |
+ + Currency | ++ Party Balance + + | +
+ account_currency+ |
+
| 9 | +currency_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency + + | ++ |
| 10 | +account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 11 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +exchange_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 13 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 14 | +debit_in_account_currency |
+ + Currency | ++ Debit in Account Currency + + | +
+ account_currency+ |
+
| 15 | +debit |
+ + Currency | ++ Debit in Company Currency + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +credit_in_account_currency |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit in Account Currency + + | +
+ account_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +credit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit in Company Currency + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 20 | +reference_type |
+ + Select | ++ Reference Type + + | +
+ +Sales Invoice +Purchase Invoice +Journal Entry +Sales Order +Purchase Order +Expense Claim+ |
+
| 21 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Reference Name + + | +
+ reference_type+ |
+
| 22 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +is_advance |
+ + Select | ++ Is Advance + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 24 | +against_account |
+ + Text | ++ Against Account + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabMode of Payment
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Data | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ |
| 2 | +accounts |
+ + Table | ++ Accounts + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment Account + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabMode of Payment Account
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +default_account |
+ + Link | +
+ Default Account
+ + Default Bank / Cash account will be automatically updated in POS Invoice when this mode is selected. + |
+ + + + + +Account + + + + | +
Table Name: tabMonthly Distribution
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +distribution_id |
+ + Data | +
+ Distribution Name
+ + Name of the Monthly Distribution + |
+ + |
| 2 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 3 | +percentages |
+ + Table | ++ Monthly Distribution Percentages + + | ++ + + + +Monthly Distribution Percentage + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_months + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabMonthly Distribution Percentage
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +month |
+ + Data | ++ Month + + | ++ |
| 2 | +percentage_allocation |
+ + Float | ++ Percentage Allocation + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabParty Account
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +party_type |
+ + Link | ++ Party Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 3 | +party |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Party + + | +
+ party_type+ |
+
| 4 | +receivable_payable_account |
+ + Link | ++ Receivable / Payable Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 5 | +bank_cash_account |
+ + Link | ++ Bank / Cash Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 6 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +minimum_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Minimum Amount + + | ++ |
| 10 | +maximum_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Maximum Amount + + | ++ |
| 11 | +get_unreconciled_entries |
+ + Button | ++ Get Unreconciled Entries + + | ++ |
| 12 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Unreconciled Payment Details + + | ++ |
| 13 | +payments |
+ + Table | ++ Payments + + | ++ + + + +Payment Reconciliation Payment + + + + | +
| 14 | +reconcile |
+ + Button | ++ Reconcile + + | ++ |
| 15 | +sec_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Invoice/Journal Entry Details + + | ++ |
| 16 | +invoices |
+ + Table | ++ Invoices + + | ++ + + + +Payment Reconciliation Invoice + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + add_invoice_entries + (self, non_reconciled_invoices) +
+No docs
++ + + add_payment_entries + (self, jv_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + check_condition + (self, dr_or_cr) +
+No docs
++ + + check_mandatory_to_fetch + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_invoice_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_jv_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_unreconciled_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + reconcile + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_invoice + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPayment Reconciliation Invoice
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +invoice_type |
+ + Data | ++ Invoice Type + + | +
+ Sales Invoice +Purchase Invoice +Journal Entry+ |
+
| 2 | +invoice_number |
+ + Data | ++ Invoice Number + + | ++ |
| 3 | +invoice_date |
+ + Date | ++ Invoice Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 6 | +outstanding_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Outstanding Amount + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabPayment Reconciliation Payment
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +journal_entry |
+ + Link | ++ Journal Entry + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
| 2 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 4 | +is_advance |
+ + Data | ++ Is Advance + + | ++ |
| 5 | +voucher_detail_number |
+ + Data | ++ Voucher Detail Number + + | ++ |
| 6 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +invoice_number |
+ + Select | ++ Invoice Number + + | ++ |
| 8 | +allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Allocated amount + + | ++ |
| 9 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +remark |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remark + + | ++ |
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Find Invoices to Match + + | ++ |
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +party_type |
+ + Link | ++ Party Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 4 | +received_or_paid |
+ + Select | ++ Received Or Paid + + | +
+ Received +Paid+ |
+
| 5 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +party |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Party + + | +
+ party_type+ |
+
| 7 | +party_account |
+ + Link | ++ Party Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 8 | +party_account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Party Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 9 | +set_payment_amount |
+ + Check | ++ Set Payment Amount = Outstanding Amount + + | ++ |
| 10 | +get_outstanding_vouchers |
+ + Button | ++ Get Outstanding Vouchers + + | ++ |
| 11 | +sec_break3 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Set Matching Amounts + + | ++ |
| 12 | +vouchers |
+ + Table | ++ Against Vouchers + + | ++ + + + +Payment Tool Detail + + + + | +
| 13 | +section_break_19 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Make Payment Entry + + | ++ |
| 14 | +payment_mode |
+ + Link | ++ Payment Mode + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 15 | +payment_account |
+ + Link | ++ Payment Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 16 | +total_payment_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Payment Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +data_22 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +reference_date |
+ + Date | ++ Reference Date + + | ++ |
| 19 | +reference_no |
+ + Data | ++ Reference No + + | ++ |
| 20 | +make_journal_entry |
+ + Button | ++ Make Journal Entry + + | ++ |
| 21 | +section_break_21 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +make_jv_help |
+ + Small Text | ++ + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_tool.payment_tool.get_against_voucher_amount
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_tool.payment_tool.get_against_voucher_amount + (against_voucher_type, against_voucher_no, party_account, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_tool.payment_tool.get_orders_to_be_billed + (party_type, party, party_account_currency, company_currency) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_tool.payment_tool.get_outstanding_vouchers
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_tool.payment_tool.get_outstanding_vouchers + (args) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPayment Tool Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +against_voucher_type |
+ + Link | ++ Against Voucher Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 2 | +against_voucher_no |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Against Voucher No + + | +
+ against_voucher_type+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 5 | +outstanding_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Outstanding Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +payment_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Payment Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabPeriod Closing Voucher
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Transaction Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Closing Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 5 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Period Closing Voucher + + + + | +
| 6 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +closing_account_head |
+ + Link | +
+ Closing Account Head
+ + The account head under Liability, in which Profit/Loss will be booked + |
+ + + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 9 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.AccountsController + +
+ + + get_pl_balances + (self) +
+Get balance for pl accounts
++ + + make_gl_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_account_head + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_posting_date + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPOS Profile
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +user |
+ + Link | ++ Applicable for User + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ [Select]+ |
+
| 3 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 4 | +update_stock |
+ + Check | ++ Update Stock + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 7 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 8 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 9 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Link | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 10 | +section_break_16 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
| 12 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 13 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 14 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 15 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 17 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 18 | +section_break_19 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +write_off_account |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 20 | +write_off_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 21 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 22 | +column_break_23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +cash_bank_account |
+ + Link | ++ Cash/Bank Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 24 | +income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 25 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 26 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_for_duplicate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_defaults + (self, include_current_pos=True) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_all_link_fields + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.pos_profile.pos_profile.get_series
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pos_profile.pos_profile.get_series + () +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPricing Rule
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +applicability_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +apply_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply On + + | +
+ +Item Code +Item Group +Brand+ |
+
| 4 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 6 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 7 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +priority |
+ + Select | +
+ Priority
+ + Higher the number, higher the priority + |
+
+ +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 +14 +15 +16 +17 +18 +19 +20+ |
+
| 9 | +disable |
+ + Check | ++ Disable + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +selling |
+ + Check | ++ Selling + + | ++ |
| 12 | +buying |
+ + Check | ++ Buying + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +applicable_for |
+ + Select | ++ Applicable For + + | +
+ +Customer +Customer Group +Territory +Sales Partner +Campaign +Supplier +Supplier Type+ |
+
| 15 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 16 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 17 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 18 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 19 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 20 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 21 | +supplier_type |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Type + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Type + + + + | +
| 22 | +section_break_19 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +min_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Min Qty + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break_21 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +max_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Max Qty + + | ++ |
| 26 | +section_break_23 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 27 | +valid_from |
+ + Date | ++ Valid From + + | ++ |
| 28 | +valid_upto |
+ + Date | ++ Valid Upto + + | ++ |
| 29 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 31 | +price_discount_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +price_or_discount |
+ + Select | ++ Price or Discount + + | +
+ +Price +Discount Percentage+ |
+
| 33 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +price |
+ + Float | ++ Price + + | ++ |
| 35 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 36 | +for_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ For Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 37 | +help_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 38 | +pricing_rule_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Pricing Rule Help + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + cleanup_fields_value + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_applicable_for_selling_or_buying + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_max_discount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_min_max_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_price_or_discount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.apply_internal_priority + (pricing_rules, field_set, args) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.apply_pricing_rule
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.apply_pricing_rule + (args) +
+args = { + "itemlist": [{"doctype": "", "name": "", "itemcode": "", "brand": "", "itemgroup": ""}, ...], + "customer": "something", + "customergroup": "something", + "territory": "something", + "supplier": "something", + "suppliertype": "something", + "currency": "something", + "conversionrate": "something", + "pricelist": "something", + "plcconversionrate": "something", + "company": "something", + "transactiondate": "something", + "campaign": "something", + "salespartner": "something", + "ignorepricing_rule": "something" +}
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.filter_pricing_rules + (args, pricing_rules) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.get_pricing_rule_for_item + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.get_pricing_rules + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.if_all_rules_same + (pricing_rules, fields) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPurchase Invoice
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PINV- +PINV-RET-+ |
+
| 3 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 4 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 6 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 7 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 8 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 9 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +bill_no |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Invoice No + + | ++ |
| 12 | +bill_date |
+ + Date | ++ Supplier Invoice Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + | +
| 14 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 15 | +is_return |
+ + Check | ++ Is Return + + | ++ |
| 16 | +return_against |
+ + Link | ++ Return Against Purchase Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + | +
| 17 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ icon-tag+ |
+
| 18 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 19 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 20 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 22 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 23 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Price List Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 24 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 25 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 26 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + | +
| 27 | +section_break_26 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 29 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +column_break_28 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 32 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 33 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 34 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 35 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 36 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + HTML | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 37 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 38 | +base_taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 39 | +base_taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 40 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 41 | +column_break_40 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 42 | +taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 43 | +taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 44 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 45 | +section_break_44 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 46 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 47 | +column_break_46 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 48 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 49 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 50 | +section_break_49 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 51 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 52 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words (Company Currency) + + | ++ |
| 53 | +column_break8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 54 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 55 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 56 | +total_advance |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Advance + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 57 | +outstanding_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Outstanding Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 58 | +write_off |
+ + Section Break | ++ Write Off + + | ++ |
| 59 | +write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 60 | +base_write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 61 | +column_break_61 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 62 | +write_off_account |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 63 | +write_off_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 64 | +advances_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Advance Payments + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 65 | +get_advances_paid |
+ + Button | ++ Get Advances Paid + + | +
+ get_advances+ |
+
| 66 | +advances |
+ + Table | ++ Advances + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Invoice Advance + + + + | +
| 67 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ icon-legal+ |
+
| 68 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 69 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions1 + + | ++ |
| 70 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Details + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 71 | +supplier_address |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 72 | +col_break23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 73 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 74 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 75 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 76 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 77 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 78 | +credit_to |
+ + Link | ++ Credit To + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 79 | +party_account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Party Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 80 | +is_opening |
+ + Select | ++ Is Opening + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 81 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Due Date + + | ++ |
| 82 | +against_expense_account |
+ + Small Text | ++ Against Expense Account + + | ++ |
| 83 | +column_break_63 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 84 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Link | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 85 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 86 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 87 | +recurring_invoice |
+ + Section Break | ++ Recurring Invoice + + | +
+ icon-time+ |
+
| 88 | +is_recurring |
+ + Check | ++ Is Recurring + + | ++ |
| 89 | +recurring_type |
+ + Select | +
+ Recurring Type
+ + Select the period when the invoice will be generated automatically + |
+
+ Monthly +Quarterly +Half-yearly +Yearly+ |
+
| 90 | +from_date |
+ + Date | +
+ From Date
+ + Start date of current invoice's period + |
+ + |
| 91 | +to_date |
+ + Date | +
+ To Date
+ + End date of current invoice's period + |
+ + |
| 92 | +repeat_on_day_of_month |
+ + Int | +
+ Repeat on Day of Month
+ + The day of the month on which auto invoice will be generated e.g. 05, 28 etc + |
+ + |
| 93 | +end_date |
+ + Date | +
+ End Date
+ + The date on which recurring invoice will be stop + |
+ + |
| 94 | +column_break_82 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 95 | +next_date |
+ + Date | +
+ Next Date
+ + The date on which next invoice will be generated. It is generated on submit. + |
+ + |
| 96 | +recurring_id |
+ + Data | +
+ Recurring Id
+ + The unique id for tracking all recurring invoices. It is generated on submit. + |
+ + |
| 97 | +notification_email_address |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Notification Email Address
+ + Enter email id separated by commas, invoice will be mailed automatically on particular date + |
+ + |
| 98 | +recurring_print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Recurring Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + check_active_purchase_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_conversion_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_for_stopped_or_closed_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_prev_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + create_remarks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_advances + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + make_gl_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + po_required + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + pr_required + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_against_expense_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + update_against_document_in_jv + (self) +
+Links invoice and advance voucher: + 1. cancel advance voucher + 2. split into multiple rows if partially adjusted, assign against voucher + 3. submit advance voucher
++ + + update_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_credit_to_acc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_supplier_invoice + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_write_off_account + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_invoice.purchase_invoice.get_expense_account
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_invoice.purchase_invoice.get_expense_account + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_invoice.purchase_invoice.make_debit_note
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_invoice.purchase_invoice.make_debit_note + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPurchase Invoice Advance
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +journal_entry |
+ + Link | ++ Journal Entry + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
| 2 | +jv_detail_no |
+ + Data | ++ Journal Entry Detail No + + | ++ |
| 3 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +advance_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Advance Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Allocated Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabPurchase Invoice Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +description_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 7 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 8 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 9 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 10 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 12 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 13 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 15 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 16 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +sec_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 21 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 23 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 24 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 25 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 27 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 28 | +column_break_25 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 31 | +accounting |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting + + | ++ |
| 32 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Head + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 33 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +project_name |
+ + Link | ++ Project Name + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 35 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 36 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 37 | +brand |
+ + Data | ++ Brand + + | ++ |
| 38 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 39 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Item Tax Rate
+ + Tax detail table fetched from item master as a string and stored in this field. +Used for Taxes and Charges + |
+ + |
| 40 | +item_tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Item Tax Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 41 | +purchase_order |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Order + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order + + + + | +
| 42 | +col_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 43 | +po_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Purchase Order Item + + | ++ |
| 44 | +purchase_receipt |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Receipt + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 45 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 46 | +pr_detail |
+ + Data | ++ PR Detail + + | ++ |
| 47 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 48 | +rm_supp_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Raw Materials Supplied Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabPurchase Taxes and Charges
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +category |
+ + Select | ++ Consider Tax or Charge for + + | +
+ Valuation and Total +Valuation +Total+ |
+
| 2 | +add_deduct_tax |
+ + Select | ++ Add or Deduct + + | +
+ Add +Deduct+ |
+
| 3 | +charge_type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ +Actual +On Net Total +On Previous Row Amount +On Previous Row Total+ |
+
| 4 | +row_id |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Row # + + | ++ |
| 5 | +included_in_print_rate |
+ + Check | +
+ Is this Tax included in Basic Rate?
+ + If checked, the tax amount will be considered as already included in the Print Rate / Print Amount + |
+ + |
| 6 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +account_head |
+ + Link | ++ Account Head + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 8 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 9 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +rate |
+ + Float | ++ Rate + + | ++ |
| 12 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 14 | +tax_amount_after_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Tax Amount After Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 15 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 16 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +base_tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +base_tax_amount_after_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Tax Amount After Discount Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +item_wise_tax_detail |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Wise Tax Detail + + | ++ |
| 21 | +parenttype |
+ + Data | ++ Parenttype + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabPurchase Taxes and Charges Template
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +is_default |
+ + Check | ++ Default + + | ++ |
| 3 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabSales Invoice
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ SINV- +SINV-RET-+ |
+
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 7 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 8 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 9 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 10 | +is_pos |
+ + Check | ++ Is POS + + | ++ |
| 11 | +is_return |
+ + Check | ++ Is Return + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 14 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Payment Due Date + + | ++ |
| 15 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 16 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 17 | +return_against |
+ + Link | ++ Return Against Sales Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 18 | +shipping_address_name |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Address Name + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 19 | +shipping_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 20 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | ++ |
| 21 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 22 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Customer Currency is converted to customer's base currency + |
+ + |
| 23 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 25 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 26 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Price List Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Price list currency is converted to customer's base currency + |
+ + |
| 27 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 28 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 29 | +update_stock |
+ + Check | ++ Update Stock + + | ++ |
| 30 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + | +
| 31 | +packing_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Packing List + + | +
+ icon-suitcase+ |
+
| 32 | +packed_items |
+ + Table | ++ Packed Items + + | ++ + + + +Packed Item + + + + | +
| 33 | +product_bundle_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Product Bundle Help + + | ++ |
| 34 | +section_break_30 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 35 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 36 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 37 | +column_break_32 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 39 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 40 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 41 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 42 | +column_break_38 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 43 | +shipping_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Rule + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule + + + + | +
| 44 | +section_break_40 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 45 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 46 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + HTML | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 47 | +section_break_43 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 48 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 49 | +column_break_47 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 50 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 51 | +section_break_49 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 52 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 53 | +column_break_51 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 54 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 55 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 56 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 57 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 58 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 59 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Sales Invoice. + |
+ + |
| 60 | +column_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 61 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 62 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 63 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 64 | +total_advance |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Advance + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 65 | +outstanding_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Outstanding Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 66 | +advances_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Advance Payments + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 67 | +get_advances_received |
+ + Button | ++ Get Advances Received + + | +
+ get_advances+ |
+
| 68 | +advances |
+ + Table | ++ Advances + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice Advance + + + + | +
| 69 | +payments_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Payments + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 70 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Link | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 71 | +cash_bank_account |
+ + Link | ++ Cash/Bank Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 72 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 73 | +paid_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Paid Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 74 | +base_paid_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Paid Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 75 | +column_break4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Write Off + + | ++ |
| 76 | +write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 77 | +base_write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 78 | +write_off_outstanding_amount_automatically |
+ + Check | ++ Write Off Outstanding Amount + + | ++ |
| 79 | +column_break_74 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 80 | +write_off_account |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 81 | +write_off_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 82 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms + + | ++ |
| 83 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 84 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions Details + + | ++ |
| 85 | +edit_printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 86 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 87 | +column_break_84 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 88 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 89 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 90 | +project_name |
+ + Link | ++ Project Name + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 91 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 92 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 93 | +col_break23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 94 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 95 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 96 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 97 | +source |
+ + Select | ++ Source + + | +
+ +Existing Customer +Reference +Advertisement +Cold Calling +Exhibition +Supplier Reference +Mass Mailing +Customer's Vendor +Campaign+ |
+
| 98 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting Details + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 99 | +debit_to |
+ + Link | ++ Debit To + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 100 | +party_account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Party Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 101 | +is_opening |
+ + Select | ++ Is Opening Entry + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 102 | +c_form_applicable |
+ + Select | ++ C-Form Applicable + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 103 | +c_form_no |
+ + Link | ++ C-Form No + + | ++ + + + +C-Form + + + + | +
| 104 | +column_break8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 105 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 106 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 107 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 108 | +sales_team_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Commission + + | +
+ icon-group+ |
+
| 109 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 110 | +column_break10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 111 | +commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 112 | +total_commission |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Commission + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 113 | +section_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Team + + | ++ |
| 114 | +sales_team |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Team1 + + | ++ + + + +Sales Team + + + + | +
| 115 | +recurring_invoice |
+ + Section Break | ++ Recurring + + | +
+ icon-time+ |
+
| 116 | +column_break11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 117 | +is_recurring |
+ + Check | +
+ Is Recurring
+ + Check if recurring invoice, uncheck to stop recurring or put proper End Date + |
+ + |
| 118 | +recurring_type |
+ + Select | +
+ Recurring Type
+ + Select the period when the invoice will be generated automatically + |
+
+ +Monthly +Quarterly +Half-yearly +Yearly+ |
+
| 119 | +from_date |
+ + Date | +
+ From Date
+ + Start date of current invoice's period + |
+ + |
| 120 | +to_date |
+ + Date | +
+ To Date
+ + End date of current invoice's period + |
+ + |
| 121 | +repeat_on_day_of_month |
+ + Int | +
+ Repeat on Day of Month
+ + The day of the month on which auto invoice will be generated e.g. 05, 28 etc + |
+ + |
| 122 | +end_date |
+ + Date | +
+ End Date
+ + The date on which recurring invoice will be stop + |
+ + |
| 123 | +column_break12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 124 | +next_date |
+ + Date | +
+ Next Date
+ + The date on which next invoice will be generated. It is generated on submit. + + |
+ + |
| 125 | +recurring_id |
+ + Data | +
+ Recurring Id
+ + The unique id for tracking all recurring invoices. It is generated on submit. + |
+ + |
| 126 | +notification_email_address |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Notification Email Address
+ + Enter email id separated by commas, invoice will be mailed automatically on particular date + |
+ + |
| 127 | +recurring_print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Recurring Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
| 128 | +against_income_account |
+ + Small Text | ++ Against Income Account + + | ++ |
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + add_remarks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + before_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_credit_limit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_prev_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_advances + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_company_abbr + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + get_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + make_customer_gl_entry + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + make_gl_entries + (self, repost_future_gle=True) +
+No docs
++ + + make_item_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + make_pos_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + make_tax_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + make_write_off_gl_entry + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_against_income_account + (self) +
+Set against account for debit to account
++ + + set_indicator + (self) +
+Set indicator for portal
++ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + set_pos_fields + (self, for_validate=False) +
+Set retail related fields from POS Profiles
++ + + so_dn_required + (self) +
+check in manage account if sales order / delivery note required or not.
++ + + update_against_document_in_jv + (self) +
+Links invoice and advance voucher: + 1. cancel advance voucher + 2. split into multiple rows if partially adjusted, assign against voucher + 3. submit advance voucher
++ + + update_current_stock + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_packing_list + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_status_updater_args + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_time_log_batch + (self, sales_invoice) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_c_form + (self) +
+Blank C-form no if C-form applicable marked as 'No'
++ + + validate_c_form_on_cancel + (self) +
+Display message if C-Form no exists on cancellation of Sales Invoice
++ + + validate_debit_to_acc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_delivery_note + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_fixed_asset_account + (self) +
+Validate Fixed Asset and whether Income Account Entered Exists
++ + + validate_item_code + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_pos + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_proj_cust + (self) +
+check for does customer belong to same project as entered..
++ + + validate_time_logs_are_submitted + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_write_off_account + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.get_bank_cash_account
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.get_bank_cash_account + (mode_of_payment, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.make_delivery_note
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.make_delivery_note + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.make_sales_return
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.make_sales_return + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSales Invoice Advance
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +journal_entry |
+ + Link | ++ Journal Entry + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
| 2 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 3 | +jv_detail_no |
+ + Data | ++ Journal Entry Detail No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +advance_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Advance amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Allocated amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabSales Invoice Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +customer_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Item Code + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Edit Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 10 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 11 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 13 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 14 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 15 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 17 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 21 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 23 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 24 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 25 | +section_break_21 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 27 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 28 | +column_break_24 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 31 | +drop_ship |
+ + Section Break | ++ Drop Ship + + | ++ |
| 32 | +delivered_by_supplier |
+ + Check | ++ Delivered By Supplier + + | ++ |
| 33 | +accounting |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting Details + + | ++ |
| 34 | +income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 35 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 36 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 37 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 38 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Stock Details + + | ++ |
| 39 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 40 | +target_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Target Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 41 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 42 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 43 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 44 | +brand |
+ + Data | ++ Brand Name + + | ++ |
| 45 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Tax Rate + + | ++ |
| 46 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 47 | +actual_batch_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Available Batch Qty at Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 48 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Available Qty at Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 49 | +edit_references |
+ + Section Break | ++ References + + | ++ |
| 50 | +time_log_batch |
+ + Link | ++ Time Log Batch + + | ++ + + + +Time Log Batch + + + + | +
| 51 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 52 | +so_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Sales Order Item + + | ++ |
| 53 | +column_break_50 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 54 | +delivery_note |
+ + Link | ++ Delivery Note + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 55 | +dn_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Delivery Note Item + + | ++ |
| 56 | +delivered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Delivered Qty + + | ++ |
| 57 | +section_break_54 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 58 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabSales Taxes and Charges
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +charge_type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ +Actual +On Net Total +On Previous Row Amount +On Previous Row Total+ |
+
| 2 | +row_id |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Row # + + | ++ |
| 3 | +account_head |
+ + Link | ++ Account Head + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 4 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 5 | +col_break_1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +included_in_print_rate |
+ + Check | +
+ Is this Tax included in Basic Rate?
+ + If checked, the tax amount will be considered as already included in the Print Rate / Print Amount + |
+ + |
| 8 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +rate |
+ + Float | ++ Rate + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 12 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 13 | +tax_amount_after_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Tax Amount After Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 14 | +column_break_13 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +base_tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +base_tax_amount_after_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Tax Amount After Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +item_wise_tax_detail |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Wise Tax Detail + + | ++ |
| 19 | +parenttype |
+ + Data | ++ Parenttype + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabSales Taxes and Charges Template
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +is_default |
+ + Check | ++ Default + + | ++ |
| 3 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +taxes |
+ + Table | +
+ Sales Taxes and Charges
+ + * Will be calculated in the transaction. + |
+ + + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_taxes_and_charges_template.sales_taxes_and_charges_template.valdiate_taxes_and_charges_template + (doc) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabShipping Rule
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +label |
+ + Data | +
+ Shipping Rule Label
+ + example: Next Day Shipping + |
+ + |
| 2 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 3 | +calculate_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Calculate Based On + + | +
+ Net Total +Net Weight+ |
+
| 4 | +rule_conditions_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Shipping Rule Conditions + + | ++ |
| 5 | +conditions |
+ + Table | ++ Shipping Rule Conditions + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule Condition + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Valid for Countries + + | ++ |
| 7 | +worldwide_shipping |
+ + Check | ++ Worldwide Shipping + + | ++ |
| 8 | +countries |
+ + Table | ++ Valid for Countries + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule Country + + + + | +
| 9 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 11 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 13 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + sort_shipping_rule_conditions + (self) +
+Sort Shipping Rule Conditions based on increasing From Value
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_from_to_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_overlapping_shipping_rule_conditions + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabShipping Rule Condition
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +from_value |
+ + Float | ++ From Value + + | ++ |
| 2 | +to_value |
+ + Float | ++ To Value + + | ++ |
| 3 | +shipping_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Shipping Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabShipping Rule Country
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
Table Name: tabTax Rule
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +tax_type |
+ + Select | ++ Tax Type + + | +
+ Sales +Purchase+ |
+
| 2 | +use_for_shopping_cart |
+ + Check | ++ Use for Shopping Cart + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +sales_tax_template |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Tax Template + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 5 | +purchase_tax_template |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Tax Template + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 6 | +filters |
+ + Section Break | ++ Filters + + | ++ |
| 7 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 8 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 9 | +billing_city |
+ + Data | ++ Billing City + + | ++ |
| 10 | +billing_state |
+ + Data | ++ Billing State + + | ++ |
| 11 | +billing_country |
+ + Link | ++ Billing Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 12 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 14 | +supplier_type |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Type + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Type + + + + | +
| 15 | +shipping_city |
+ + Data | ++ Shipping City + + | ++ |
| 16 | +shipping_state |
+ + Data | ++ Shipping State + + | ++ |
| 17 | +shipping_country |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 18 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Validity + + | ++ |
| 19 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 20 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 22 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +priority |
+ + Int | ++ Priority + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_filters + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_tax_template + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.tax_rule.tax_rule.get_party_details
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.tax_rule.tax_rule.get_party_details + (party, party_type, args=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.tax_rule.tax_rule.get_tax_template + (posting_date, args) +
+Get matching tax rule
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supp_master_name |
+ + Select | ++ Supplier Naming By + + | +
+ Supplier Name +Naming Series+ |
+
| 2 | +supplier_type |
+ + Link | ++ Default Supplier Type + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Type + + + + | +
| 3 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Buying Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +po_required |
+ + Select | ++ Purchase Order Required + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 6 | +pr_required |
+ + Select | ++ Purchase Receipt Required + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 7 | +maintain_same_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Maintain same rate throughout purchase cycle + + | ++ |
| 8 | +allow_multiple_items |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Item to be added multiple times in a transaction + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+ + + check_docstatus + (self, check, doctype, docname, detail_doctype=) +
+No docs
++ + + check_for_stopped_or_closed_status + (self, doctype, docname) +
+No docs
++ + + update_last_purchase_rate + (self, obj, is_submit) +
+updates lastpurchaserate in item table for each item
++ + + validate_for_items + (self, obj) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPurchase Order
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PO-+ |
+
| 4 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 5 | +is_subcontracted |
+ + Select | ++ Supply Raw Materials + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 6 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 8 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 9 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 10 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 11 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order + + + + | +
| 14 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 15 | +drop_ship |
+ + Section Break | ++ Drop Ship + + | ++ |
| 16 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 17 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 18 | +delivered_by_supplier |
+ + Check | ++ To be delivered to customer + + | ++ |
| 19 | +column_break_19 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 21 | +customer_contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Contact + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 22 | +customer_address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Address Display + + | ++ |
| 23 | +customer_contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Contact + + | ++ |
| 24 | +customer_contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 25 | +customer_contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 26 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ icon-tag+ |
+
| 27 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 28 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 29 | +cb_price_list |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 31 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 32 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Price List Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 33 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 34 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 35 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + | +
| 36 | +get_last_purchase_rate |
+ + Button | ++ Get Last Purchase Rate + + | ++ |
| 37 | +sb_last_purchase |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 39 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 40 | +column_break_26 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 41 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 42 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 43 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 44 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 45 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 46 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + HTML | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 47 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 48 | +base_taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 49 | +base_taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 50 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 51 | +column_break_39 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 52 | +taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 53 | +taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 54 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 55 | +discount_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 56 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 57 | +column_break_45 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 58 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 59 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 60 | +totals_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 61 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 62 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Purchase Order. + |
+ + |
| 63 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 64 | +advance_paid |
+ + Currency | ++ Advance Paid + + | ++ |
| 65 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 66 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 67 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 68 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ icon-legal+ |
+
| 69 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 70 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 71 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Details + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 72 | +supplier_address |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 73 | +cb_contact |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 74 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 75 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 76 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +To Receive and Bill +To Bill +To Receive +Completed +Stopped +Cancelled +Closed +Delivered+ |
+
| 77 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 78 | +ref_sq |
+ + Data | ++ Ref SQ + + | ++ |
| 79 | +column_break_74 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 80 | +per_received |
+ + Percent | ++ % Received + + | ++ |
| 81 | +per_billed |
+ + Percent | ++ % Billed + + | ++ |
| 82 | +column_break5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 83 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 84 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 85 | +raw_material_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Raw Materials Supplied + + | +
+ icon-truck+ |
+
| 86 | +supplied_items |
+ + Table | ++ Supplied Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order Item Supplied + + + + | +
| 87 | +recurring_order |
+ + Section Break | ++ Recurring + + | +
+ icon-time+ |
+
| 88 | +column_break |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 89 | +is_recurring |
+ + Check | ++ Is Recurring + + | ++ |
| 90 | +recurring_type |
+ + Select | ++ Recurring Type + + | +
+ Monthly +Quarterly +Half-yearly +Yearly+ |
+
| 91 | +from_date |
+ + Date | +
+ From Date
+ + Start date of current order's period + |
+ + |
| 92 | +to_date |
+ + Date | +
+ To Date
+ + End date of current order's period + |
+ + |
| 93 | +repeat_on_day_of_month |
+ + Int | +
+ Repeat on Day of Month
+ + The day of the month on which auto order will be generated e.g. 05, 28 etc + |
+ + |
| 94 | +end_date |
+ + Date | +
+ End Date
+ + The date on which recurring order will be stop + |
+ + |
| 95 | +column_break83 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 96 | +next_date |
+ + Date | +
+ Next Date
+ + The date on which next invoice will be generated. It is generated on submit. + |
+ + |
| 97 | +recurring_id |
+ + Data | ++ Recurring Id + + | ++ |
| 98 | +notification_email_address |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Notification Email Address
+ + Enter email id separated by commas, order will be mailed automatically on particular date + |
+ + |
| 99 | +recurring_print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Recurring Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + before_recurring + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_for_stopped_or_closed_status + (self, pc_obj) +
+No docs
++ + + check_modified_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_last_purchase_rate + (self) +
+get last purchase rates for all items
++ + + get_schedule_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_delivered_qty_in_sales_order + (self) +
+Update delivered qty in Sales Order for drop ship
++ + + update_ordered_qty + (self, po_item_rows=None) +
+update requested qty (before ordered_qty is updated)
++ + + update_requested_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + update_status_updater + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_minimum_order_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_purchase_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_purchase_invoice + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_purchase_receipt
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_purchase_receipt + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_stock_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_stock_entry + (purchase_order, item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.set_missing_values + (source, target) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.stop_or_unstop_purchase_orders
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.stop_or_unstop_purchase_orders + (names, status) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.update_status
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.update_status + (status, name) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPurchase Order Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +supplier_part_no |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Part Number + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Reqd By Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 10 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 11 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 12 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 13 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 14 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 16 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ UOM Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 17 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 19 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 20 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +sec_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 24 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 25 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 27 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 28 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 29 | +section_break_29 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 31 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 32 | +column_break_32 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 33 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 34 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 35 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 36 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 37 | +project_name |
+ + Link | ++ Project Name + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 38 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Link | ++ Reference Document Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 39 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Reference Name + + | +
+ prevdoc_doctype+ |
+
| 40 | +prevdoc_detail_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Material Request Detail No + + | ++ |
| 41 | +supplier_quotation |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Quotation + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + | +
| 42 | +supplier_quotation_item |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Quotation Item + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + | +
| 43 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 44 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 45 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 46 | +bom |
+ + Link | ++ BOM + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 47 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 48 | +received_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Received Qty + + | ++ |
| 49 | +returned_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Returned Qty + + | ++ |
| 50 | +billed_amt |
+ + Currency | ++ Billed Amt + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 51 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Item Tax Rate
+ + Tax detail table fetched from item master as a string and stored in this field. +Used for Taxes and Charges + |
+ + |
| 52 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabPurchase Order Item Supplied
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +main_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Item Code + + | ++ |
| 2 | +rm_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Raw Material Item Code + + | ++ |
| 3 | +required_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Supplied Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 5 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +bom_detail_no |
+ + Data | ++ BOM Detail No + + | ++ |
| 7 | +reference_name |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 9 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Uom + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
Table Name: tabPurchase Receipt Item Supplied
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +main_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Item Code + + | ++ |
| 2 | +rm_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Raw Material Item Code + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 5 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 6 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +required_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Required Qty + + | ++ |
| 8 | +consumed_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Consumed Qty + + | ++ |
| 9 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Uom + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 10 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 11 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 12 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 13 | +current_stock |
+ + Float | ++ Current Stock + + | ++ |
| 14 | +reference_name |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Name + + | ++ |
| 15 | +bom_detail_no |
+ + Data | ++ BOM Detail No + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabQuality Inspection
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ QI-+ |
+
| 2 | +report_date |
+ + Date | ++ Report Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +inspection_type |
+ + Select | ++ Inspection Type + + | +
+ +Incoming +Outgoing +In Process+ |
+
| 5 | +purchase_receipt_no |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Receipt No + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 6 | +delivery_note_no |
+ + Link | ++ Delivery Note No + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 7 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 9 | +item_serial_no |
+ + Link | ++ Item Serial No + + | ++ + + + +Serial No + + + + | +
| 10 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 11 | +sample_size |
+ + Float | ++ Sample Size + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 14 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 15 | +section_break_14 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +inspected_by |
+ + Link | ++ Inspected By + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 17 | +verified_by |
+ + Data | ++ Verified By + + | ++ |
| 18 | +column_break_17 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +remarks |
+ + Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 20 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Quality Inspection + + + + | +
| 21 | +specification_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 22 | +get_specification_details |
+ + Button | ++ Get Specification Details + + | +
+ get_item_specification_details+ |
+
| 23 | +readings |
+ + Table | ++ Readings + + | ++ + + + +Quality Inspection Reading + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_item_specification_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.quality_inspection.quality_inspection.item_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabQuality Inspection Reading
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +specification |
+ + Data | ++ Parameter + + | ++ |
| 2 | +value |
+ + Data | ++ Acceptance Criteria + + | ++ |
| 3 | +reading_1 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 1 + + | ++ |
| 4 | +reading_2 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 2 + + | ++ |
| 5 | +reading_3 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 3 + + | ++ |
| 6 | +reading_4 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 4 + + | ++ |
| 7 | +reading_5 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 5 + + | ++ |
| 8 | +reading_6 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 6 + + | ++ |
| 9 | +reading_7 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 7 + + | ++ |
| 10 | +reading_8 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 8 + + | ++ |
| 11 | +reading_9 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 9 + + | ++ |
| 12 | +reading_10 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 10 + + | ++ |
| 13 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Accepted +Rejected+ |
+
Table Name: tabSupplier
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +basic_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ SUPP-+ |
+
| 3 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +supplier_type |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Type + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Type + + + + | +
| 6 | +is_frozen |
+ + Check | ++ Is Frozen + + | ++ |
| 7 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +default_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Billing Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 9 | +default_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 10 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +default_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 12 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 13 | +address_contacts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contacts + + | +
+ icon-map-marker+ |
+
| 14 | +address_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Address HTML + + | ++ |
| 15 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +contact_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Contact HTML + + | ++ |
| 17 | +default_payable_accounts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Default Payable Accounts + + | ++ |
| 18 | +accounts |
+ + Table | +
+ Accounts
+ + Mention if non-standard receivable account + |
+ + + + + +Party Account + + + + | +
| 19 | +column_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Supplier Details + + | ++ |
| 20 | +website |
+ + Data | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 21 | +supplier_details |
+ + Text | +
+ Supplier Details
+ + Statutory info and other general information about your Supplier + |
+ + |
| 22 | +communications |
+ + Table | ++ Communications + + | ++ + + + +Communication + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + delete_supplier_address + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + delete_supplier_contact + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_contacts + (self, nm) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+Load address and contacts in __onload
+ + + update_address + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_contact + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_supplier_address + (self, newdn, set_field) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier.supplier.get_dashboard_info
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier.supplier.get_dashboard_info + (supplier) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSupplier Quotation
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ SQTN-+ |
+
| 4 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 5 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 7 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 8 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 9 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + | +
| 13 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 14 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ icon-tag+ |
+
| 15 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 16 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 17 | +cb_price_list |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 19 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 20 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Price List Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 21 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 22 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 23 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + | +
| 24 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 26 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 27 | +column_break_24 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 29 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 30 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 31 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 32 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 33 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + HTML | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 34 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 35 | +base_taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 36 | +base_taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 37 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 38 | +column_break_37 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 40 | +taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 41 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 42 | +section_break_41 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 43 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 44 | +column_break_43 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 45 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 46 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 47 | +section_break_46 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 48 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 49 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words (Company Currency) + + | ++ |
| 50 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 51 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 52 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 53 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 54 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ icon-legal+ |
+
| 55 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 56 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 57 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Details + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 58 | +supplier_address |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 59 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 60 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 61 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 62 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 63 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 64 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Stopped +Cancelled+ |
+
| 65 | +is_subcontracted |
+ + Select | ++ Is Subcontracted + + | +
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 66 | +column_break_57 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 67 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_common + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier_quotation.supplier_quotation.make_purchase_order
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier_quotation.supplier_quotation.make_purchase_order + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSupplier Quotation Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +supplier_part_no |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Part Number + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 10 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 11 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 12 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 13 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 14 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 16 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 19 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 23 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 24 | +section_break_24 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | ++ |
| 26 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 27 | +column_break_27 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 29 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 31 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 32 | +project_name |
+ + Link | ++ Project Name + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 33 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Data | ++ Prevdoc DocType + + | ++ |
| 34 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request No + + | ++ + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 35 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +prevdoc_detail_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Material Request Detail No + + | ++ |
| 37 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 38 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 39 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Item Tax Rate
+ + Tax detail table fetched from item master as a string and stored in this field. +Used for Taxes and Charges + |
+ + |
| 40 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabLead
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +lead_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ LEAD-+ |
+
| 3 | +lead_name |
+ + Data | ++ Person Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +company_name |
+ + Data | ++ Organization Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Email Id + + | +
+ |
+
| 6 | +col_break123 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Lead +Open +Replied +Opportunity +Interested +Converted +Do Not Contact+ |
+
| 8 | +source |
+ + Select | ++ Source + + | +
+ +Advertisement +Blog Post +Campaign +Call +Customer +Exhibition +Supplier +Website +Email+ |
+
| 9 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ From Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 10 | +campaign_name |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign Name + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 11 | +section_break_12 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +lead_owner |
+ + Link | ++ Lead Owner + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 13 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +contact_by |
+ + Link | ++ Next Contact By + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 15 | +contact_date |
+ + Datetime | +
+ Next Contact Date
+ + Add to calendar on this date + |
+ + |
| 16 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address & Contact + + | +
+ icon-map-marker+ |
+
| 17 | +address_desc |
+ + HTML | ++ Address Desc + + | ++ |
| 18 | +address_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Address HTML + + | ++ |
| 19 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +phone |
+ + Data | ++ Phone + + | ++ |
| 21 | +mobile_no |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No. + + | ++ |
| 22 | +fax |
+ + Data | ++ Fax + + | ++ |
| 23 | +website |
+ + Data | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 24 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 25 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 26 | +type |
+ + Select | ++ Lead Type + + | +
+ +Client +Channel Partner +Consultant+ |
+
| 27 | +market_segment |
+ + Select | ++ Market Segment + + | +
+ +Lower Income +Middle Income +Upper Income+ |
+
| 28 | +industry |
+ + Link | ++ Industry + + | ++ + + + +Industry Type + + + + | +
| 29 | +request_type |
+ + Select | ++ Request Type + + | +
+ +Product Enquiry +Request for Information +Suggestions +Other+ |
+
| 30 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 31 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 33 | +unsubscribed |
+ + Check | ++ Unsubscribed + + | ++ |
| 34 | +blog_subscriber |
+ + Check | ++ Blog Subscriber + + | ++ |
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+ + + add_calendar_event + (self, opts=None, force=False) +
+No docs
++ + + check_email_id_is_unique + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + has_customer + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + has_opportunity + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead._make_customer + (source_name, target_doc=None, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.get_lead_details
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.get_lead_details + (lead) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_customer
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_customer + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_opportunity
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_opportunity + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_quotation + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabNewsletter
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +newsletter_list |
+ + Link | ++ Newsletter List + + | ++ + + + +Newsletter List + + + + | +
| 2 | +subject |
+ + Small Text | ++ Subject + + | ++ |
| 3 | +send_from |
+ + Data | ++ Sender + + | ++ |
| 4 | +email_sent |
+ + Check | ++ Email Sent? + + | ++ |
| 5 | +newsletter_content |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +message |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Message + + | ++ |
| 7 | +test_the_newsletter |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +test_email_id |
+ + Data | +
+ Test Email Id
+ + A Lead with this email id should exist + |
+ + |
| 9 | +test_send |
+ + Button | ++ Test + + | +
+ test_send+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_recipients + (self) +
+Get recipients from Newsletter List
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + send_bulk + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + send_emails + (self) +
+send emails to leads and customers
++ + + test_send + (self, doctype=Lead) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_send + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.confirm_subscription
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.confirm_subscription + (email) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.create_lead + (email_id) +
+create a lead if it does not exist
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.get_lead_options
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.get_lead_options + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.return_unsubscribed_page + (email) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.subscribe
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.subscribe + (email) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.unsubscribe
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter.newsletter.unsubscribe + (email, name) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabNewsletter List
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +total_subscribers |
+ + Int | ++ Total Subscribers + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_total_subscribers + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + import_from + (self, doctype) +
+Extract email ids from given doctype and add them to the current list
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_total_subscribers + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter_list.newsletter_list.add_subscribers
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter_list.newsletter_list.add_subscribers + (name, email_list) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter_list.newsletter_list.import_from
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter_list.newsletter_list.import_from + (name, doctype) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabNewsletter List Subscriber
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +newsletter_list |
+ + Link | ++ Newsletter List + + | ++ + + + +Newsletter List + + + + | +
| 2 | +email |
+ + Data | ++ Email + + | ++ |
| 3 | +unsubscribed |
+ + Check | ++ Unsubscribed + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.newsletter_list_subscriber.newsletter_list_subscriber.after_doctype_insert + () +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabOpportunity
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +from_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ OPTY-+ |
+
| 3 | +enquiry_from |
+ + Select | ++ Opportunity From + + | +
+ +Lead +Customer+ |
+
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +lead |
+ + Link | ++ Lead + + | ++ + + + +Lead + + + + | +
| 6 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer / Lead Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 9 | +enquiry_type |
+ + Select | ++ Opportunity Type + + | +
+ Sales +Maintenance+ |
+
| 10 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Quotation +Lost +Replied +Closed+ |
+
| 11 | +order_lost_reason |
+ + Small Text | ++ Lost Reason + + | ++ |
| 12 | +with_items |
+ + Check | ++ With Items + + | ++ |
| 13 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 14 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Opportunity Item + + + + | +
| 15 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Info + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 16 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer / Lead Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 17 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 18 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 19 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 20 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 22 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 23 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 24 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 25 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Source + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 26 | +source |
+ + Select | ++ Source + + | +
+ +Existing Customer +Reference +Advertisement +Cold Calling +Exhibition +Supplier Reference +Mass Mailing +Customer's Vendor +Campaign +Walk In+ |
+
| 27 | +campaign |
+ + Link | +
+ Campaign
+ + Enter name of campaign if source of enquiry is campaign + |
+ + + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 28 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 30 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Opportunity Date + + | ++ |
| 31 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 32 | +next_contact |
+ + Section Break | ++ Next Contact + + | ++ |
| 33 | +contact_by |
+ + Link | +
+ Next Contact By
+ + Your sales person who will contact the customer in future + |
+ + + + + +User + + + + | +
| 34 | +contact_date |
+ + Datetime | +
+ Next Contact Date
+ + Your sales person will get a reminder on this date to contact the customer + |
+ + |
| 35 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +to_discuss |
+ + Small Text | ++ To Discuss + + | ++ |
| 37 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Opportunity + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + add_calendar_event + (self, opts=None, force=False) +
+No docs
++ + + after_insert + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + declare_enquiry_lost + (self, arg) +
+No docs
++ + + get_cust_address + (self, name) +
+No docs
++ + + has_ordered_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + has_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + make_new_lead_if_required + (self) +
+Set lead against new opportunity
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_cust_name + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_item_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_lead_cust + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.get_item_details
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.get_item_details + (item_code) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.make_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.make_quotation + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.set_multiple_status
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.set_multiple_status + (names, status) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabOpportunity Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 5 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 8 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 9 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 12 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 13 | +basic_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabAppraisal
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +kra_template |
+ + Link | +
+ Appraisal Template
+ + Select template from which you want to get the Goals + |
+ + + + + +Appraisal Template + + + + | +
| 3 | +employee |
+ + Link | +
+ For Employee
+ + Select the Employee for whom you are creating the Appraisal. + |
+ + + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 4 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ For Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Completed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 7 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Goals + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 10 | +goals |
+ + Table | ++ Goals + + | ++ + + + +Appraisal Goal + + + + | +
| 11 | +calculate_total_score |
+ + Button | ++ Calculate Total Score + + | +
+ calculate_total+ |
+
| 12 | +total_score |
+ + Float | ++ Total Score (Out of 5) + + | ++ |
| 13 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +remarks |
+ + Text | +
+ Remarks
+ + Any other remarks, noteworthy effort that should go in the records. + |
+ + |
| 15 | +other_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 17 | +column_break_17 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 19 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Appraisal + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + calculate_total + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_employee_name + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_existing_appraisal + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.appraisal.appraisal.fetch_appraisal_template
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.appraisal.appraisal.fetch_appraisal_template + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabAppraisal Goal
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +kra |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Goal
+ + Key Responsibility Area + |
+ + |
| 2 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +per_weightage |
+ + Float | ++ Weightage (%) + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +score |
+ + Float | ++ Score (0-5) + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +score_earned |
+ + Float | ++ Score Earned + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabAppraisal Template
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +kra_title |
+ + Data | ++ Appraisal Template Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 3 | +goals |
+ + Table | ++ Goals + + | ++ + + + +Appraisal Template Goal + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_total_points + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabAppraisal Template Goal
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +kra |
+ + Small Text | +
+ KRA
+ + Key Performance Area + |
+ + |
| 2 | +per_weightage |
+ + Float | ++ Weightage (%) + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabAttendance
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +attendance_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ ATT-+ |
+
| 3 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 4 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Present +Absent +Half Day+ |
+
| 6 | +leave_type |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Type + + | ++ + + + +Leave Type + + + + | +
| 7 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +att_date |
+ + Date | ++ Attendance Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 10 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 11 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Attendance + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_leave_record + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_att_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_duplicate_record + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_employee + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabBranch
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +branch |
+ + Data | ++ Branch + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabDeduction Type
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +deduction_name |
+ + Data | ++ Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabDepartment
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +department_name |
+ + Data | ++ Department + + | ++ |
| 2 | +leave_block_list |
+ + Link | +
+ Leave Block List
+ + Days for which Holidays are blocked for this department. + |
+ + + + + +Leave Block List + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabDesignation
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +designation_name |
+ + Data | ++ Designation + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabEarning Type
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +earning_name |
+ + Data | ++ Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabEmployee
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +basic_information |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +employee |
+ + Data | ++ Employee + + | ++ |
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ EMP/+ |
+
| 5 | +salutation |
+ + Select | ++ Salutation + + | +
+ +Mr +Ms+ |
+
| 6 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Full Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 9 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +user_id |
+ + Link | +
+ User ID
+ + System User (login) ID. If set, it will become default for all HR forms. + |
+ + + + + +User + + + + | +
| 11 | +employee_number |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Number + + | ++ |
| 12 | +date_of_joining |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Joining + + | ++ |
| 13 | +date_of_birth |
+ + Date | +
+ Date of Birth
+ + You can enter any date manually + |
+ + |
| 14 | +gender |
+ + Select | ++ Gender + + | +
+ +Male +Female+ |
+
| 15 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 16 | +employment_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Employment Details + + | ++ |
| 17 | +col_break_21 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Active +Left+ |
+
| 19 | +employment_type |
+ + Link | ++ Employment Type + + | ++ + + + +Employment Type + + + + | +
| 20 | +holiday_list |
+ + Link | +
+ Holiday List
+ + Applicable Holiday List + |
+ + + + + +Holiday List + + + + | +
| 21 | +col_break_22 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +scheduled_confirmation_date |
+ + Date | ++ Offer Date + + | ++ |
| 23 | +final_confirmation_date |
+ + Date | ++ Confirmation Date + + | ++ |
| 24 | +contract_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Contract End Date + + | ++ |
| 25 | +date_of_retirement |
+ + Date | ++ Date Of Retirement + + | ++ |
| 26 | +job_profile |
+ + Section Break | ++ Job Profile + + | ++ |
| 27 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 29 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 30 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 31 | +company_email |
+ + Data | +
+ Company Email
+ + Provide email id registered in company + |
+
+ |
+
| 32 | +notice_number_of_days |
+ + Int | ++ Notice (days) + + | ++ |
| 33 | +salary_information |
+ + Column Break | ++ Salary Information + + | ++ |
| 34 | +salary_mode |
+ + Select | ++ Salary Mode + + | +
+ +Bank +Cash +Cheque+ |
+
| 35 | +bank_name |
+ + Data | ++ Bank Name + + | ++ |
| 36 | +bank_ac_no |
+ + Data | ++ Bank A/C No. + + | ++ |
| 37 | +organization_profile |
+ + Section Break | ++ Organization Profile + + | ++ |
| 38 | +reports_to |
+ + Link | ++ Reports to + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 39 | +leave_approvers |
+ + Table | +
+ Leave Approvers
+ + The first Leave Approver in the list will be set as the default Leave Approver + |
+ + + + + +Employee Leave Approver + + + + | +
| 40 | +contact_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Details + + | ++ |
| 41 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 42 | +cell_number |
+ + Data | ++ Cell Number + + | ++ |
| 43 | +personal_email |
+ + Data | ++ Personal Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 44 | +unsubscribed |
+ + Check | ++ Unsubscribed + + | ++ |
| 45 | +emergency_contact_details |
+ + HTML | ++ Emergency Contact Details + + | ++ |
| 46 | +person_to_be_contacted |
+ + Data | ++ Emergency Contact + + | ++ |
| 47 | +relation |
+ + Data | ++ Relation + + | ++ |
| 48 | +emergency_phone_number |
+ + Data | ++ Emergency Phone + + | ++ |
| 49 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 50 | +permanent_accommodation_type |
+ + Select | ++ Permanent Address Is + + | +
+ +Rented +Owned+ |
+
| 51 | +permanent_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Permanent Address + + | ++ |
| 52 | +current_accommodation_type |
+ + Select | ++ Current Address Is + + | +
+ +Rented +Owned+ |
+
| 53 | +current_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Current Address + + | ++ |
| 54 | +sb53 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 55 | +bio |
+ + Text Editor | +
+ Bio
+ + Short biography for website and other publications. + |
+ + |
| 56 | +personal_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Personal Details + + | ++ |
| 57 | +column_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 58 | +passport_number |
+ + Data | ++ Passport Number + + | ++ |
| 59 | +date_of_issue |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Issue + + | ++ |
| 60 | +valid_upto |
+ + Date | ++ Valid Upto + + | ++ |
| 61 | +place_of_issue |
+ + Data | ++ Place of Issue + + | ++ |
| 62 | +column_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 63 | +marital_status |
+ + Select | ++ Marital Status + + | +
+ +Single +Married +Divorced +Widowed+ |
+
| 64 | +blood_group |
+ + Select | ++ Blood Group + + | +
+ +A+ +A- +B+ +B- +AB+ +AB- +O+ +O-+ |
+
| 65 | +family_background |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Family Background
+ + Here you can maintain family details like name and occupation of parent, spouse and children + |
+ + |
| 66 | +health_details |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Health Details
+ + Here you can maintain height, weight, allergies, medical concerns etc + |
+ + |
| 67 | +educational_qualification |
+ + Section Break | ++ Educational Qualification + + | ++ |
| 68 | +education |
+ + Table | ++ Education + + | ++ + + + +Employee Education + + + + | +
| 69 | +previous_work_experience |
+ + Section Break | ++ Previous Work Experience + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 70 | +external_work_history |
+ + Table | ++ External Work History + + | ++ + + + +Employee External Work History + + + + | +
| 71 | +history_in_company |
+ + Section Break | ++ History In Company + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 72 | +internal_work_history |
+ + Table | ++ Internal Work History + + | ++ + + + +Employee Internal Work History + + + + | +
| 73 | +exit |
+ + Section Break | ++ Exit + + | ++ |
| 74 | +column_break7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 75 | +resignation_letter_date |
+ + Date | ++ Resignation Letter Date + + | ++ |
| 76 | +relieving_date |
+ + Date | ++ Relieving Date + + | ++ |
| 77 | +reason_for_leaving |
+ + Data | ++ Reason for Leaving + + | ++ |
| 78 | +leave_encashed |
+ + Select | ++ Leave Encashed? + + | +
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 79 | +encashment_date |
+ + Date | ++ Encashment Date + + | ++ |
| 80 | +exit_interview_details |
+ + Column Break | ++ Exit Interview Details + + | ++ |
| 81 | +held_on |
+ + Date | ++ Held On + + | ++ |
| 82 | +reason_for_resignation |
+ + Select | ++ Reason for Resignation + + | +
+ +Better Prospects +Health Concerns+ |
+
| 83 | +new_workplace |
+ + Data | ++ New Workplace + + | ++ |
| 84 | +feedback |
+ + Small Text | ++ Feedback + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_user + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_user_permissions + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_duplicate_user_id + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_email + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_employee_leave_approver + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_for_enabled_user_id + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_reports_to + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_status + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.get_employees_who_are_born_today + () +
+Get Employee properties whose birthday is today.
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.get_retirement_date
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.get_retirement_date + (date_of_birth=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.make_salary_structure
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.make_salary_structure + (source_name, target=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.send_birthday_reminders + () +
+Send Employee birthday reminders if no 'Stop Birthday Reminders' is not set.
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.update_user_permissions + (doc, method) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.validate_employee_role + (doc, method) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabEmployee Education
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +school_univ |
+ + Small Text | ++ School/University + + | ++ |
| 2 | +qualification |
+ + Data | ++ Qualification + + | ++ |
| 3 | +level |
+ + Select | ++ Level + + | +
+ Graduate +Post Graduate +Under Graduate+ |
+
| 4 | +year_of_passing |
+ + Int | ++ Year of Passing + + | ++ |
| 5 | +class_per |
+ + Data | ++ Class / Percentage + + | ++ |
| 6 | +maj_opt_subj |
+ + Text | ++ Major/Optional Subjects + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabEmployee External Work History
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company_name |
+ + Data | ++ Company + + | ++ |
| 2 | +designation |
+ + Data | ++ Designation + + | ++ |
| 3 | +salary |
+ + Currency | ++ Salary + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 4 | +address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 5 | +contact |
+ + Data | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 6 | +total_experience |
+ + Data | ++ Total Experience + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabEmployee Internal Work History
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 2 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 3 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 4 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabEmployee Leave Approver
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +leave_approver |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Approver + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
Table Name: tabEmployment Type
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee_type_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employment Type + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabExpense Claim
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ EXP+ |
+
| 2 | +approval_status |
+ + Select | ++ Approval Status + + | +
+ Draft +Approved +Rejected+ |
+
| 3 | +exp_approver |
+ + Link | +
+ Approver
+ + A user with "Expense Approver" role + |
+ + + + + +User + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +total_claimed_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Claimed Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +total_sanctioned_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Sanctioned Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 7 | +expense_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +expenses |
+ + Table | ++ Expenses + + | ++ + + + +Expense Claim Detail + + + + | +
| 9 | +sb1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 10 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ From Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 12 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 13 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 14 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 15 | +cb1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +total_amount_reimbursed |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount Reimbursed + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +remark |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remark + + | ++ |
| 18 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 19 | +task |
+ + Link | ++ Task + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
| 20 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 21 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Employees Email Id + + | ++ |
| 22 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Expense Claim + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + calculate_total_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_task + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_task_and_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_expense_approver + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_sanctioned_amount + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim.get_expense_approver
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim.get_expense_approver + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabExpense Claim Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +expense_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expense Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +expense_type |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Claim Type + + | ++ + + + +Expense Claim Type + + + + | +
| 4 | +default_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 5 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +claim_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Claim Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 9 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +sanctioned_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Sanctioned Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabExpense Claim Type
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +expense_type |
+ + Data | ++ Expense Claim Type + + | ++ |
| 2 | +default_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 3 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabHoliday
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 2 | +holiday_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabHoliday List
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +holiday_list_name |
+ + Data | ++ Holiday List Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +is_default |
+ + Check | ++ Default + + | ++ |
| 3 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 4 | +weekly_off |
+ + Select | ++ Weekly Off + + | +
+ +Sunday +Monday +Tuesday +Wednesday +Thursday +Friday +Saturday+ |
+
| 5 | +get_weekly_off_dates |
+ + Button | ++ Get Weekly Off Dates + + | +
+ get_weekly_off_dates+ |
+
| 6 | +holidays |
+ + Table | ++ Holidays + + | ++ + + + +Holiday + + + + | +
| 7 | +clear_table |
+ + Button | ++ Clear Table + + | +
+ clear_table+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + clear_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_weekly_off_date_list + (self, year_start_date, year_end_date) +
+No docs
++ + + get_weekly_off_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_default_holiday_list + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_days + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_values + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.holiday_list.holiday_list.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.holiday_list.holiday_list.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.holiday_list.holiday_list.get_fy_start_end_dates + (fiscal_year) +
+No docs
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Employee Settings + + | ++ |
| 2 | +emp_created_by |
+ + Select | +
+ Employee Records to be created by
+ + Employee record is created using selected field. + |
+
+ Naming Series +Employee Number+ |
+
| 3 | +stop_birthday_reminders |
+ + Check | +
+ Stop Birthday Reminders
+ + Don't send Employee Birthday Reminders + |
+ + |
| 4 | +payroll_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Payroll Settings + + | ++ |
| 5 | +include_holidays_in_total_working_days |
+ + Check | +
+ Include holidays in Total no. of Working Days
+ + If checked, Total no. of Working Days will include holidays, and this will reduce the value of Salary Per Day + |
+ + |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabJob Applicant
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +applicant_name |
+ + Data | ++ Applicant Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Email Id + + | +
+ |
+
| 3 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Replied +Rejected +Hold+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +job_opening |
+ + Link | ++ Job Opening + + | ++ + + + +Job Opening + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +thread_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Thread HTML + + | ++ |
| 8 | +communications |
+ + Table | ++ Communications + + | ++ + + + +Communication + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_email_id_is_unique + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabJob Opening
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +job_title |
+ + Data | ++ Job Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Closed+ |
+
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | +
+ Description
+ + Job profile, qualifications required etc. + |
+ + |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabLeave Allocation
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 3 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +leave_type |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Type + + | ++ + + + +Leave Type + + + + | +
| 8 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +new_leaves_allocated |
+ + Float | ++ New Leaves Allocated + + | ++ |
| 12 | +carry_forward |
+ + Check | ++ Add unused leaves from previous allocations + + | ++ |
| 13 | +carry_forwarded_leaves |
+ + Float | ++ Unused leaves + + | ++ |
| 14 | +total_leaves_allocated |
+ + Float | ++ Total Leaves Allocated + + | ++ |
| 15 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Leave Allocation + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + allow_carry_forward + (self) +
+check whether carry forward is allowed or not for this leave type
++ + + check_existing_leave_allocation + (self) +
+check whether leave for same type is already allocated or not
++ + + get_carry_forwarded_leaves + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_leave_bal + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_leaves_allocated + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_leaves_applied + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_total_allocated_leaves + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_new_leaves_allocated_value + (self) +
+validate that leave allocation is in multiples of 0.5
++ + + validate_period + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_total_leaves_allocated + (self, leave_det) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabLeave Application
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Approved +Rejected+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +leave_type |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Type + + | ++ + + + +Leave Type + + + + | +
| 4 | +leave_balance |
+ + Float | ++ Leave Balance Before Application + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +half_day |
+ + Check | ++ Half Day + + | ++ |
| 9 | +total_leave_days |
+ + Float | ++ Total Leave Days + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Reason + + | ++ |
| 12 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 14 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 15 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +leave_approver |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Approver + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 17 | +leave_approver_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Leave Approver Name + + | ++ |
| 18 | +sb10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 20 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 21 | +follow_via_email |
+ + Check | ++ Follow via Email + + | ++ |
| 22 | +column_break_17 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 24 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 25 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Leave Application + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_holidays + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_total_leave_days + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + notify + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + notify_employee + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + notify_leave_approver + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + show_block_day_warning + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_balance_leaves + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_block_days + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_leave_approver + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_leave_overlap + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_max_days + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_to_date + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.add_block_dates + (events, start, end, employee, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.add_department_leaves + (events, start, end, employee, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.add_holidays + (events, start, end, employee, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.add_leaves + (events, start, end, match_conditions=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_approvers
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_approvers + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_events + (start, end) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_holidays + (leave_app) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_leave_balance
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_leave_balance + (employee, leave_type, from_date, to_date) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_total_leave_days
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_total_leave_days + (leave_app) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.is_lwp + (leave_type) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabLeave Block List
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +leave_block_list_name |
+ + Data | ++ Leave Block List Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +year |
+ + Link | ++ Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 3 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 4 | +applies_to_all_departments |
+ + Check | +
+ Applies to Company
+ + If not checked, the list will have to be added to each Department where it has to be applied. + |
+ + |
| 5 | +block_days |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Block Days
+ + Stop users from making Leave Applications on following days. + |
+ + |
| 6 | +leave_block_list_dates |
+ + Table | ++ Leave Block List Dates + + | ++ + + + +Leave Block List Date + + + + | +
| 7 | +allow_list |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Allow Users
+ + Allow the following users to approve Leave Applications for block days. + |
+ + |
| 8 | +leave_block_list_allowed |
+ + Table | ++ Leave Block List Allowed + + | ++ + + + +Leave Block List Allow + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_block_list.leave_block_list.get_applicable_block_dates
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_block_list.leave_block_list.get_applicable_block_dates + (from_date, to_date, employee=None, company=None, all_lists=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_block_list.leave_block_list.get_applicable_block_lists + (employee=None, company=None, all_lists=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_block_list.leave_block_list.is_user_in_allow_list + (block_list) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabLeave Block List Allow
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +allow_user |
+ + Link | ++ Allow User + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
Table Name: tabLeave Block List Date
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +block_date |
+ + Date | ++ Block Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +reason |
+ + Text | ++ Reason + + | ++ |
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +employee_type |
+ + Link | +
+ Employee Type
+ + Leave blank if considered for all employee types + |
+ + + + + +Employment Type + + + + | +
| 3 | +branch |
+ + Link | +
+ Branch
+ + Leave blank if considered for all branches + |
+ + + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 4 | +department |
+ + Link | +
+ Department
+ + Leave blank if considered for all departments + |
+ + + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 5 | +designation |
+ + Link | +
+ Designation
+ + Leave blank if considered for all designations + |
+ + + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +leave_type |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Type + + | ++ + + + +Leave Type + + + + | +
| 10 | +carry_forward |
+ + Check | +
+ Carry Forward
+ + Please select Carry Forward if you also want to include previous fiscal year's balance leaves to this fiscal year + |
+ + |
| 11 | +no_of_days |
+ + Float | ++ New Leaves Allocated (In Days) + + | ++ |
| 12 | +allocate |
+ + Button | ++ Allocate + + | +
+ allocate_leave+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + allocate_leave + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_employees + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + to_date_validation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_values + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabLeave Type
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +leave_type_name |
+ + Data | ++ Leave Type Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +max_days_allowed |
+ + Data | ++ Max Days Leave Allowed + + | ++ |
| 3 | +is_carry_forward |
+ + Check | ++ Is Carry Forward + + | ++ |
| 4 | +is_encash |
+ + Check | ++ Is Encash + + | ++ |
| 5 | +is_lwp |
+ + Check | ++ Is Leave Without Pay + + | ++ |
| 6 | +allow_negative |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Negative Balance + + | ++ |
| 7 | +include_holiday |
+ + Check | ++ Include holidays within leaves as leaves + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabOffer Letter
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +job_applicant |
+ + Link | ++ Job Applicant + + | ++ + + + +Job Applicant + + + + | +
| 2 | +applicant_name |
+ + Data | ++ Applicant Name + + | +
+ job_applicant.applicant_name+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Awaiting Response +Accepted +Rejected+ |
+
| 5 | +offer_date |
+ + Date | ++ Offer Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 7 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 8 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +offer_terms |
+ + Table | ++ Offer Letter Terms + + | ++ + + + +Offer Letter Term + + + + | +
| 10 | +section_break_14 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +select_terms |
+ + Link | ++ Select Terms and Conditions + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 12 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 13 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Offer Letter + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabOffer Letter Term
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +offer_term |
+ + Link | ++ Offer Term + + | ++ + + + +Offer Term + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +value |
+ + Small Text | ++ Value / Description + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabOffer Term
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +offer_term |
+ + Data | ++ Offer Term + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Select Employees + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 4 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 5 | +send_email |
+ + Check | +
+ Send Email
+ + Check if you want to send salary slip in mail to each employee while submitting salary slip + |
+ + |
| 6 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 8 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 9 | +select_payroll_year_and_month |
+ + Section Break | ++ Select Payroll Year and Month + + | ++ |
| 10 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 11 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +month |
+ + Select | ++ Month + + | +
+ +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +10 +11 +12+ |
+
| 13 | +process_payroll |
+ + Section Break | ++ Process Payroll + + | ++ |
| 14 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +create_salary_slip |
+ + Button | +
+ Create Salary Slip
+ + Creates salary slip for above mentioned criteria. + |
+ + |
| 16 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +submit_salary_slip |
+ + Button | +
+ Submit Salary Slip
+ + Submit all salary slips for the above selected criteria + |
+ + |
| 18 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +make_bank_entry |
+ + Button | +
+ Make Bank Entry
+ + Create Bank Entry for the total salary paid for the above selected criteria + |
+ + |
| 20 | +section_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +activity_log |
+ + HTML | ++ Activity Log + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + create_log + (self, ss_list) +
+No docs
++ + + create_sal_slip + (self) +
+Creates salary slip for selected employees if already not created
++ + + create_submit_log + (self, all_ss, not_submitted_ss) +
+No docs
++ + + format_as_links + (self, ss_list) +
+No docs
++ + + get_emp_list + (self) +
+Returns list of active employees based on selected criteria +and for which salary structure exists
++ + + get_filter_condition + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_joining_releiving_condition + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_month_details + (self, year, month) +
+No docs
++ + + get_sal_slip_list + (self) +
+Returns list of salary slips based on selected criteria +which are not submitted
++ + + get_total_salary + (self) +
+Get total salary amount from submitted salary slip based on selected criteria
++ + + make_journal_entry + (self, salary_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + submit_salary_slip + (self) +
+Submit all salary slips based on selected criteria
+Table Name: tabSalary Slip
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 3 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 5 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 6 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 7 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 8 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 9 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +month |
+ + Select | ++ Month + + | +
+ +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +10 +11 +12+ |
+
| 11 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 12 | +total_days_in_month |
+ + Float | ++ Working Days + + | ++ |
| 13 | +leave_without_pay |
+ + Float | ++ Leave Without Pay + + | ++ |
| 14 | +payment_days |
+ + Float | ++ Payment Days + + | ++ |
| 15 | +bank_name |
+ + Data | ++ Bank Name + + | ++ |
| 16 | +bank_account_no |
+ + Data | ++ Bank Account No. + + | ++ |
| 17 | +email_check |
+ + Check | ++ Email + + | ++ |
| 18 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Salary Slip + + + + | +
| 19 | +earning_deduction |
+ + Section Break | ++ Earning & Deduction + + | ++ |
| 20 | +earning |
+ + Column Break | ++ Earning + + | ++ |
| 21 | +html_21 |
+ + HTML | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +earnings |
+ + Table | ++ Earnings + + | ++ + + + +Salary Slip Earning + + + + | +
| 23 | +deduction |
+ + Column Break | ++ Deduction + + | ++ |
| 24 | +html_24 |
+ + HTML | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +deductions |
+ + Table | ++ Deductions + + | ++ + + + +Salary Slip Deduction + + + + | +
| 26 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 27 | +column_break_25 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +column_break_26 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +arrear_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Arrear Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +leave_encashment_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Leave Encashment Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 31 | +gross_pay |
+ + Currency | ++ Gross Pay + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 32 | +total_deduction |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Deduction + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 33 | +net_pay |
+ + Currency | +
+ Net Pay
+ + Gross Pay + Arrear Amount +Encashment Amount - Total Deduction + |
+
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 34 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 35 | +total_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ Total in words
+ + Net Pay (in words) will be visible once you save the Salary Slip. + |
+ + |
Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_ded_total + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_earning_total + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_lwp + (self, holidays, m) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_net_pay + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_existing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_sal_struct + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_emp_and_leave_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_holidays_for_employee + (self, m) +
+No docs
++ + + get_leave_details + (self, lwp=None) +
+No docs
++ + + get_payment_days + (self, m) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + pull_emp_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + pull_sal_struct + (self, struct) +
+No docs
++ + + send_mail_funct + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSalary Slip Deduction
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +d_type |
+ + Link | ++ Type + + | ++ + + + +Deduction Type + + + + | +
| 2 | +d_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Default Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 3 | +d_depends_on_lwp |
+ + Check | ++ Depends on Leave Without Pay + + | ++ |
| 4 | +d_modified_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabSalary Slip Earning
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +e_type |
+ + Link | ++ Type + + | ++ + + + +Earning Type + + + + | +
| 2 | +e_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Default Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 3 | +e_depends_on_lwp |
+ + Check | ++ Depends on Leave Without Pay + + | ++ |
| 4 | +e_modified_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabSalary Structure
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 3 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 5 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 6 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +is_active |
+ + Select | ++ Is Active + + | +
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 9 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 12 | +earning_deduction |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Monthly Earning & Deduction
+ + Salary breakup based on Earning and Deduction. + |
+ + |
| 13 | +earning |
+ + Column Break | ++ Earning + + | ++ |
| 14 | +earnings |
+ + Table | ++ Earnings + + | ++ + + + +Salary Structure Earning + + + + | +
| 15 | +deduction |
+ + Column Break | ++ Deduction + + | ++ |
| 16 | +deductions |
+ + Table | ++ Deductions + + | ++ + + + +Salary Structure Deduction + + + + | +
| 17 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 18 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +total_earning |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Earning + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +total_deduction |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Deduction + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 21 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +net_pay |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Pay + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + before_test_insert + (self) +
+Make any existing salary structure for employee inactive.
++ + + check_existing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_employee_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_other_active_salary_structure + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_ss_values + (self, employee) +
+No docs
++ + + make_earn_ded_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + make_table + (self, doct_name, tab_fname, tab_name) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_employee + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_joining_date + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_structure.salary_structure.make_salary_slip
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_structure.salary_structure.make_salary_slip + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSalary Structure Deduction
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +d_type |
+ + Link | ++ Type + + | ++ + + + +Deduction Type + + + + | +
| 2 | +d_modified_amt |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 3 | +depend_on_lwp |
+ + Check | ++ Reduce Deduction for Leave Without Pay (LWP) + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabSalary Structure Earning
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +e_type |
+ + Link | ++ Type + + | ++ + + + +Earning Type + + + + | +
| 2 | +modified_value |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 3 | +depend_on_lwp |
+ + Check | ++ Reduce Earning for Leave Without Pay (LWP) + + | ++ |
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +download_template |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Download Template
+ + Download the Template, fill appropriate data and attach the modified file. +All dates and employee combination in the selected period will come in the template, with existing attendance records + |
+ + |
| 2 | +att_fr_date |
+ + Date | ++ Attendance From Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +att_to_date |
+ + Date | ++ Attendance To Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +get_template |
+ + Button | ++ Get Template + + | ++ |
| 5 | +upload_attendance_data |
+ + Section Break | ++ Import Attendance + + | ++ |
| 6 | +upload_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Upload HTML + + | ++ |
| 7 | +import_log |
+ + HTML | ++ Import Log + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.add_data + (w, args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.add_header + (w) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_active_employees + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_dates + (args) +
+get list of dates in between from date and to date
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_existing_attendance_records + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_naming_series + () +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_template
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_template + () +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.upload
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.upload + () +
+No docs
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +publish |
+ + Check | ++ Publish Items to Hub + + | ++ |
| 2 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +publish_pricing |
+ + Check | ++ Publish Pricing + + | ++ |
| 4 | +publish_availability |
+ + Check | ++ Publish Availability + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +sync_now |
+ + Button | ++ Sync Now + + | +
+ sync+ |
+
| 7 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +seller_name |
+ + Data | ++ Seller Name + + | ++ |
| 9 | +seller_country |
+ + Link | ++ Seller Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 10 | +seller_email |
+ + Data | ++ Seller Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 11 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +seller_city |
+ + Data | ++ Seller City + + | ++ |
| 13 | +seller_website |
+ + Data | ++ Seller Website + + | ++ |
| 14 | +section_break_13 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +seller_description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Seller Description + + | ++ |
| 16 | +name_token |
+ + Data | ++ Name Token + + | ++ |
| 17 | +access_token |
+ + Data | ++ Access Token + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_args + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + publish_selling_items + (self) +
+Set publish_in_hub=1 for all Sales Items
+ + + register + (self) +
+Register at hub.erpnext.com, save name_token and access_token
+ + + sync + (self, verbose=True) +
+Sync items with hub.erpnext.com
++ + + unpublish + (self) +
+Unpublish from hub.erpnext.com
++ + + update_seller_details + (self) +
+Update details at hub.erpnext.com
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Browse DocTypes by Module
+ +Table Name: tabBOM
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item |
+ + Link | +
+ Item
+ + Item to be manufactured or repacked + |
+ + + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +rm_cost_as_per |
+ + Select | ++ Rate Of Materials Based On + + | +
+ Valuation Rate +Last Purchase Rate +Price List+ |
+
| 4 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 5 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +is_active |
+ + Check | ++ Is Active + + | ++ |
| 7 | +is_default |
+ + Check | ++ Is Default + + | ++ |
| 8 | +with_operations |
+ + Check | +
+ With Operations
+ + Manage cost of operations + |
+ + |
| 9 | +operations_section |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Operations
+ + Specify the operations, operating cost and give a unique Operation no to your operations. + |
+ + |
| 10 | +operations |
+ + Table | ++ Operations + + | ++ + + + +BOM Operation + + + + | +
| 11 | +materials_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Materials + + | ++ |
| 12 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +BOM Item + + + + | +
| 13 | +quantity |
+ + Float | +
+ Quantity
+ + Quantity of item obtained after manufacturing / repacking from given quantities of raw materials + |
+ + |
| 14 | +costing |
+ + Section Break | ++ Costing + + | ++ |
| 15 | +operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +raw_material_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Raw Material Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +cb1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +total_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +more_info_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +project_name |
+ + Link | ++ Project Name + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 21 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 22 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 23 | +col_break23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ Item UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 25 | +section_break_25 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Desription + + | ++ |
| 27 | +column_break_27 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 29 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 30 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Materials Required (Exploded) + + | ++ |
| 31 | +exploded_items |
+ + Table | ++ Exploded_items + + | ++ + + + +BOM Explosion Item + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + add_exploded_items + (self) +
+Add items to Flat BOM table
++ + + add_to_cur_exploded_items + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_cost + (self) +
+Calculate bom totals
++ + + calculate_op_cost + (self) +
+Update workstation rate and calculates totals
++ + + calculate_rm_cost + (self) +
+Fetch RM rate as per today's valuation rate and calculate totals
++ + + check_recursion + (self) +
+Check whether recursion occurs in any bom
++ + + clear_operations + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_bom_material_detail + (self, args=None) +
+Get raw material details like uom, desc and rate
++ + + get_bom_unitcost + (self, bom_no) +
+No docs
++ + + get_child_exploded_items + (self, bom_no, qty) +
+Add all items from Flat BOM of child BOM
++ + + get_exploded_items + (self) +
+Get all raw materials including items from child bom
++ + + get_item_det + (self, item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + get_rm_rate + (self, arg) +
+Get raw material rate as per selected method, if bom exists takes bom cost
++ + + get_valuation_rate + (self, args) +
+Get weighted average of valuation rate from all warehouses
++ + + manage_default_bom + (self) +
+Uncheck others if current one is selected as default, +update default bom in item master
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_bom_material_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + traverse_tree + (self, bom_list=[]) +
+No docs
++ + + update_cost + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_cost_and_exploded_items + (self, bom_list=[]) +
+No docs
++ + + update_exploded_items + (self) +
+Update Flat BOM, following will be correct data
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_bom_links + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_main_item + (self) +
+Validate main FG item
++ + + validate_materials + (self) +
+Validate raw material entries
++ + + validate_operations + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_rm_item + (self, item) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.get_bom_items
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.get_bom_items + (bom, company, qty=1, fetch_exploded=1) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.get_bom_items_as_dict + (bom, company, qty=1, fetch_exploded=1) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.validate_bom_no + (item, bom_no) +
+Validate BOM No of sub-contracted items
+Table Name: tabBOM Explosion Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +cb |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +section_break_3 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 9 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 11 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 12 | +qty_consumed_per_unit |
+ + Float | ++ Qty Consumed Per Unit + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 15 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabBOM Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | ++ BOM No + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Item Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 10 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 11 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 12 | +rate |
+ + Currency | +
+ Rate
+ + See "Rate Of Materials Based On" in Costing Section + |
+
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 13 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 15 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +scrap |
+ + Float | ++ Scrap % + + | ++ |
| 17 | +qty_consumed_per_unit |
+ + Float | ++ Qty Consumed Per Unit + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabBOM Operation
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +operation |
+ + Link | ++ Operation + + | ++ + + + +Operation + + + + | +
| 2 | +workstation |
+ + Link | ++ Workstation + + | ++ + + + +Workstation + + + + | +
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Operation Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +hour_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Hour Rate + + | ++ |
| 6 | +time_in_mins |
+ + Float | +
+ Operation Time
+ + In minutes + |
+ + |
| 7 | +operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Operating Cost + + | ++ |
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +current_bom |
+ + Link | +
+ Current BOM
+ + The BOM which will be replaced + |
+ + + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 2 | +new_bom |
+ + Link | +
+ New BOM
+ + The new BOM after replacement + |
+ + + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 3 | +replace |
+ + Button | ++ Replace + + | +
+ replace_bom+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_parent_boms + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + replace_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_new_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_bom + (self) +
+No docs
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +capacity_planning |
+ + Section Break | ++ Capacity Planning + + | ++ |
| 2 | +disable_capacity_planning |
+ + Check | +
+ Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking
+ + Disables creation of time logs against Production Orders. +Operations shall not be tracked against Production Order + |
+ + |
| 3 | +allow_overtime |
+ + Check | +
+ Allow Overtime
+ + Plan time logs outside Workstation Working Hours. + |
+ + |
| 4 | +allow_production_on_holidays |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Production on Holidays + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +capacity_planning_for_days |
+ + Int | +
+ Capacity Planning For (Days)
+ + Try planning operations for X days in advance. + |
+ + |
| 7 | +mins_between_operations |
+ + Int | +
+ Time Between Operations (in mins)
+ + Default 10 mins + |
+ + |
| 8 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +over_production_allowance_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Over Production Allowance Percentage + + | ++ |
| 10 | +backflush_raw_materials_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Backflush Raw Materials Based On + + | +
+ BOM +Material Transferred for Manufacture+ |
+
| 11 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +default_wip_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Work In Progress Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 13 | +default_fg_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Finished Goods Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.manufacturing_settings.manufacturing_settings.get_mins_between_operations + () +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabOperation
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +workstation |
+ + Link | ++ Default Workstation + + | ++ + + + +Workstation + + + + | +
| 2 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Operation Description + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabProduction Order
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-gift+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PRO-+ |
+
| 3 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Stopped +In Process +Completed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 4 | +production_item |
+ + Link | ++ Item To Manufacture + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | ++ BOM No + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 6 | +use_multi_level_bom |
+ + Check | +
+ Use Multi-Level BOM
+ + Plan material for sub-assemblies + |
+ + |
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty To Manufacture + + | ++ |
| 9 | +material_transferred_for_manufacturing |
+ + Float | ++ Material Transferred for Manufacturing + + | ++ |
| 10 | +produced_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Manufactured Qty + + | ++ |
| 11 | +warehouses |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouses + + | +
+ icon-building+ |
+
| 12 | +wip_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Work-in-Progress Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 13 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +fg_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Target Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 15 | +time |
+ + Section Break | ++ Time + + | +
+ icon-time+ |
+
| 16 | +expected_delivery_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected Delivery Date + + | ++ |
| 17 | +planned_start_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned Start Date + + | ++ |
| 18 | +planned_end_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned End Date + + | ++ |
| 19 | +column_break_13 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +actual_start_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Actual Start Date + + | ++ |
| 21 | +actual_end_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Actual End Date + + | ++ |
| 22 | +operations_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Operations + + | +
+ icon-wrench+ |
+
| 23 | +operations |
+ + Table | ++ Operations + + | ++ + + + +Production Order Operation + + + + | +
| 24 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Operation Cost + + | ++ |
| 25 | +planned_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Planned Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 26 | +actual_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Actual Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 27 | +additional_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 28 | +column_break_24 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +total_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 31 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Description + + | ++ |
| 32 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 33 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +project_name |
+ + Link | ++ Project Name + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 35 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | +
+ Sales Order
+ + Manufacture against Sales Order + |
+ + + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 36 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 37 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Production Order + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + calculate_operating_cost + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_time + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_operation_fits_in_working_hours + (self, d) +
+Raises expection if operation is longer than working hours in the given workstation.
++ + + delete_time_logs + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_holidays + (self, workstation) +
+No docs
++ + + make_time_logs + (self) +
+Capacity Planning. Plan time logs based on earliest availablity of workstation after +Planned Start Date. Time logs will be created and remain in Draft mode and must be submitted +before manufacturing entry can be made.
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_actual_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_operation_start_end_time + (self, i, d) +
+Set start and end time for given operation. If first operation, set start as
+planned_start_date, else add time diff to end time of earlier operation.
+ + + set_production_order_operations + (self) +
+Fetch operations from BOM and set in 'Production Order'
++ + + stop_unstop + (self, status) +
+Called from client side on Stop/Unstop event
++ + + update_operation_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_planned_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_production_order_qty + (self) +
+Update Manufactured Qty and Material Transferred for Qty in Production Order +based on Stock Entry
++ + + update_status + (self, status=None) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_delivery_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_operation_time + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_production_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_production_order_against_so + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_sales_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_default_warehouse
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_default_warehouse + () +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Gantt / Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +start - Start date-time.end - End date-time.filters - Filters (JSON).Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_item_details
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_item_details + (item) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_stock_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_stock_entry + (production_order_id, purpose, qty=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_time_log
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_time_log + (name, operation, from_time=None, to_time=None, qty=None, project=None, workstation=None, operation_id=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabProduction Order Operation
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +operation |
+ + Link | ++ Operation + + | ++ + + + +Operation + + + + | +
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Operation Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +completed_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ Completed Qty
+ + Operation completed for how many finished goods? + |
+ + |
| 6 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Pending +Work in Progress +Completed+ |
+
| 7 | +workstation |
+ + Link | ++ Workstation + + | ++ + + + +Workstation + + + + | +
| 8 | +show_time_logs |
+ + Button | ++ Show Time Logs + + | ++ |
| 9 | +estimated_time_and_cost |
+ + Section Break | ++ Estimated Time and Cost + + | ++ |
| 10 | +planned_start_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned Start Time + + | ++ |
| 11 | +planned_end_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned End Time + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +time_in_mins |
+ + Float | +
+ Operation Time
+ + in Minutes + |
+ + |
| 14 | +hour_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Hour Rate + + | ++ |
| 15 | +planned_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Planned Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Actual Time and Cost + + | ++ |
| 17 | +actual_start_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ Actual Start Time + + | ++ |
| 18 | +actual_end_time |
+ + Datetime | +
+ Actual End Time
+ + Updated via 'Time Log' + |
+ + |
| 19 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +actual_operation_time |
+ + Float | +
+ Actual Operation Time
+ + in Minutes +Updated via 'Time Log' + |
+ + |
| 21 | +actual_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | +
+ Actual Operating Cost
+ + (Hour Rate / 60) * Actual Operation Time + |
+
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +make_time_log |
+ + Button | ++ Make Time Log + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabProduction Plan Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | ++ BOM No + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 3 | +planned_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Planned Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +planned_start_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned Start Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 6 | +so_pending_qty |
+ + Float | ++ SO Pending Qty + + | ++ |
| 7 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ Warehouse
+ + Reserved Warehouse in Sales Order / Finished Goods Warehouse + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 8 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 9 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabProduction Plan Sales Order
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 2 | +sales_order_date |
+ + Date | ++ SO Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +select_sales_orders |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Select Sales Orders
+ + Select Sales Orders from which you want to create Production Orders. + |
+ + |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +fg_item |
+ + Link | ++ Filter based on item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Filter based on customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 10 | +get_sales_orders |
+ + Button | +
+ Get Sales Orders
+ + Pull sales orders (pending to deliver) based on the above criteria + |
+
+ get_open_sales_orders+ |
+
| 11 | +sales_orders |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Orders + + | ++ + + + +Production Plan Sales Order + + + + | +
| 12 | +items_for_production |
+ + Section Break | ++ Select Items + + | ++ |
| 13 | +get_items_from_so |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items From Sales Orders + + | +
+ get_items_from_so+ |
+
| 14 | +use_multi_level_bom |
+ + Check | +
+ Use Multi-Level BOM
+ + If checked, BOM for sub-assembly items will be considered for getting raw materials. Otherwise, all sub-assembly items will be treated as a raw material. + |
+ + |
| 15 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Production Plan Item + + + + | +
| 16 | +create_production_orders |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Production Orders
+ + Enter items and planned qty for which you want to raise production orders or download raw materials for analysis. + |
+ + |
| 17 | +raise_production_order |
+ + Button | +
+ Create Production Orders
+ + Separate production order will be created for each finished good item. + |
+
+ raise_production_order+ |
+
| 18 | +sb5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Material Requirement + + | ++ |
| 19 | +purchase_request_for_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request For Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 20 | +raise_purchase_request |
+ + Button | +
+ Create Material Requests
+ + Items to be requested which are "Out of Stock" considering all warehouses based on projected qty and minimum order qty + |
+ + |
| 21 | +download_materials_required |
+ + Button | +
+ Download Materials Required
+ + Download a report containing all raw materials with their latest inventory status + |
+ + |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + add_items + (self, items) +
+No docs
++ + + add_so_in_table + (self, open_so) +
+Add sales orders in the table
++ + + clear_item_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + clear_so_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + create_production_order + (self, items) +
+Create production order. Called from Production Planning Tool
++ + + download_raw_materials + (self) +
+Create csv data for required raw material to produce finished goods
++ + + get_csv + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_distinct_items_and_boms + (self) +
+Club similar BOM and item for processing +bomdict { + bomno: ['sales_order', 'qty'] +}
++ + + get_item_details + (self, item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + get_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_items_from_so + (self) +
+Pull items from Sales Order, only proction item +and subcontracted item will be pulled from Packing item +and add items in the table
++ + + get_open_sales_orders + (self) +
+Pull sales orders which are pending to deliver based on criteria selected
++ + + get_projected_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_raw_materials + (self, bom_dict) +
+Get raw materials considering sub-assembly items +{ + "itemcode": [qtyrequired, description, stockuom, minorder_qty] +}
++ + + get_requested_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_so_details + (self, so) +
+Pull other details from so
++ + + insert_purchase_request + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + make_items_dict + (self, item_list) +
+No docs
++ + + raise_production_order + (self) +
+It will raise production order (Draft) for all distinct FG items
++ + + raise_purchase_request + (self) +
+Raise Material Request if projected qty is less than qty required +Requested qty should be shortage qty considering minimum order qty
++ + + validate_company + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_data + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabWorkstation
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +description_and_warehouse |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +workstation_name |
+ + Data | ++ Workstation Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +holiday_list |
+ + Link | ++ Holiday List + + | ++ + + + +Holiday List + + + + | +
| 6 | +over_heads |
+ + Section Break | ++ Operating Costs + + | ++ |
| 7 | +hour_rate_electricity |
+ + Currency | +
+ Electricity Cost
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 8 | +hour_rate_consumable |
+ + Currency | +
+ Consumable Cost
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 9 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +hour_rate_rent |
+ + Currency | +
+ Rent Cost
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 11 | +hour_rate_labour |
+ + Currency | +
+ Wages
+ + Wages per hour + |
+ + |
| 12 | +hour_rate |
+ + Currency | +
+ Net Hour Rate
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 13 | +working_hours_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Working Hours + + | ++ |
| 14 | +working_hours |
+ + Table | ++ Working Hours + + | ++ + + + +Workstation Working Hour + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_bom_operation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_overlap_for_operation_timings + (self) +
+Check if there is no overlap in setting Workstation Operating Hours
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.check_if_within_operating_hours + (workstation, operation, from_datetime, to_datetime) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.check_workstation_for_holiday + (workstation, from_datetime, to_datetime) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.get_default_holiday_list
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.get_default_holiday_list + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.is_within_operating_hours + (workstation, operation, from_datetime, to_datetime) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabWorkstation Working Hour
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +start_time |
+ + Time | ++ Start Time + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +end_time |
+ + Time | ++ End Time + + | ++ |
| 4 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enabled + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabActivity Cost
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +activity_type |
+ + Link | ++ Activity Type + + | ++ + + + +Activity Type + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 4 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +billing_rate |
+ + Currency | +
+ Billing Rate
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 7 | +column_break_6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +costing_rate |
+ + Currency | +
+ Costing Rate
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 9 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ title + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_unique + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_title + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Table Name: tabActivity Type
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +activity_type |
+ + Data | ++ Activity Type + + | ++ |
| 2 | +costing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Default Costing Rate + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +billing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Default Billing Rate + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabDependent Task
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +task |
+ + Link | ++ Task + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
Table Name: tabProject
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +project_name |
+ + Data | ++ Project Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Completed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 3 | +project_type |
+ + Select | ++ Project Type + + | +
+ Internal +External +Other+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +is_active |
+ + Select | ++ Is Active + + | +
+ Yes +No+ |
+
| 6 | +priority |
+ + Select | ++ Priority + + | +
+ Medium +Low +High+ |
+
| 7 | +section_break_12 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +expected_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected Start Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +expected_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected End Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +customer_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 12 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 13 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 15 | +sb_milestones |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tasks + + | +
+ icon-flag+ |
+
| 16 | +tasks |
+ + Table | ++ Tasks + + | ++ + + + +Project Task + + + + | +
| 17 | +percent_complete |
+ + Percent | ++ % Tasks Completed + + | ++ |
| 18 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-list+ |
+
| 19 | +notes |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Notes + + | ++ |
| 20 | +section_break_18 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +actual_start_date |
+ + Data | ++ Actual Start Date + + | ++ |
| 22 | +actual_time |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Time (in Hours) + + | ++ |
| 23 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +actual_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Actual End Date + + | ++ |
| 25 | +section_break_26 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +estimated_costing |
+ + Currency | ++ Estimated Costing + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 27 | +column_break_22 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 29 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Default Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 30 | +project_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 31 | +total_costing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Costing Amount (via Time Logs) + + | ++ |
| 32 | +total_expense_claim |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Expense Claim (via Expense Claims) + + | ++ |
| 33 | +column_break_28 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +total_billing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Billing Amount (via Time Logs) + + | ++ |
| 35 | +total_purchase_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Purchase Cost (via Purchase Invoice) + + | ++ |
| 36 | +margin |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 37 | +gross_margin |
+ + Currency | ++ Gross Margin + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 38 | +column_break_37 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +per_gross_margin |
+ + Percent | ++ Gross Margin % + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_tasks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+Load project tasks for quick view
++ + + sync_tasks + (self) +
+sync tasks and remove table
++ + + update_costing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_percent_complete + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_purchase_costing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.project.project.get_cost_center_name
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.project.project.get_cost_center_name + (project_name) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabProject Task
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Working +Pending Review +Closed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 3 | +edit_task |
+ + Button | ++ View Task + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 9 | +task_id |
+ + Link | ++ Task ID + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
Table Name: tabTask
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +subject |
+ + Data | ++ Subject + + | ++ |
| 2 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Working +Pending Review +Closed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 5 | +priority |
+ + Select | ++ Priority + + | +
+ Low +Medium +High +Urgent+ |
+
| 6 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Details + + | ++ |
| 8 | +section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Depends On + + | ++ |
| 9 | +depends_on |
+ + Table | ++ depends_on + + | ++ + + + +Task Depends On + + + + | +
| 10 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +exp_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected Start Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +expected_time |
+ + Float | ++ Expected Time (in hours) + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +exp_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected End Date + + | ++ |
| 15 | +actual |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +act_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Actual Start Date (via Time Logs) + + | ++ |
| 17 | +actual_time |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Time (in hours) + + | ++ |
| 18 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +act_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Actual End Date (via Time Logs) + + | ++ |
| 20 | +section_break_17 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +total_costing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Costing Amount (via Time Logs) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +total_expense_claim |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Expense Claim (via Expense Claim) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 23 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +total_billing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Billing Amount (via Time Logs) + + | ++ |
| 25 | +more_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +review_date |
+ + Date | ++ Review Date + + | ++ |
| 27 | +closing_date |
+ + Date | ++ Closing Date + + | ++ |
| 28 | +column_break_22 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_recursion + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_customer_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_project_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + reschedule_dependent_tasks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_time_and_costing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_total_expense_claim + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_status + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Gantt / Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +start - Start date-time.end - End date-time.filters - Filters (JSON).+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.get_project + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.set_multiple_status
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.set_multiple_status + (names, status) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabTask Depends On
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +task |
+ + Link | ++ Task + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +subject |
+ + Text | ++ Subject + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabTime Log
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ TL-+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Submitted +Batched for Billing +Billed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 4 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +from_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ From Time + + | ++ |
| 6 | +hours |
+ + Float | ++ Hours + + | ++ |
| 7 | +to_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ To Time + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +activity_type |
+ + Link | ++ Activity Type + + | ++ + + + +Activity Type + + + + | +
| 10 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 11 | +task |
+ + Link | ++ Task + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
| 12 | +section_break_12 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +user |
+ + Link | ++ User + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 14 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 15 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +for_manufacturing |
+ + Check | ++ For Manufacturing + + | ++ |
| 17 | +billable |
+ + Check | ++ Billable + + | ++ |
| 18 | +section_break_11 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +production_order |
+ + Link | ++ Production Order + + | ++ + + + +Production Order + + + + | +
| 20 | +operation |
+ + Link | ++ Operation + + | ++ + + + +Operation + + + + | +
| 21 | +operation_id |
+ + Data | ++ Operation ID + + | ++ |
| 22 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +workstation |
+ + Link | ++ Workstation + + | ++ + + + +Workstation + + + + | +
| 24 | +completed_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ Completed Qty
+ + Operation completed for how many finished goods? + |
+ + |
| 25 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +note |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Note + + | ++ |
| 27 | +section_break_24 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +costing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Costing Rate based on Activity Type (per hour) + + | ++ |
| 29 | +costing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Costing Amount + + | ++ |
| 30 | +column_break_25 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +billing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Billing Rate based on Activity Type (per hour) + + | ++ |
| 32 | +billing_amount |
+ + Currency | +
+ Billing Amount
+ + Will be updated only if Time Log is 'Billable' + |
+ + |
| 33 | +section_break_29 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +time_log_batch |
+ + Link | +
+ Time Log Batch
+ + Will be updated when batched. + |
+ + + + + +Time Log Batch + + + + | +
| 35 | +sales_invoice |
+ + Link | +
+ Sales Invoice
+ + Will be updated when billed. + |
+ + + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 36 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Time Log + + + + | +
| 37 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + before_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + before_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_total_hours + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_workstation_timings + (self) +
+Checks if Time Log is between operating hours of the Workstation.
++ + + get_operation_start_end_time + (self) +
+Returns Min From and Max To Dates of Time Logs against a specific Operation.
++ + + get_overlap_for + (self, fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + get_time_log_summary + (self) +
+Returns 'Actual Operating Time'.
++ + + move_to_next_day + (self) +
+Move start and end time one day forward
++ + + move_to_next_non_overlapping_slot + (self) +
+If in overlap, set start as the end point of the overlapping time log
++ + + move_to_next_working_slot + (self) +
+Move to next working slot from workstation
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_project_if_missing + (self) +
+Set project if task is set
++ + + set_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_title + (self) +
+Set default title for the Time Log
++ + + update_cost + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_production_order + (self) +
+Updates start_date, end_date, status for operation in Production Order.
+ + + update_task_and_project + (self) +
+Update costing rate in Task or Project if either is set
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_manufacturing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_overlap + (self) +
+Checks if 'Time Log' entries overlap for a user, workstation.
++ + + validate_overlap_for + (self, fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_production_order + (self) +
+Throws 'NotSubmittedError' if production order is not submitted.
++ + + validate_time_log_for + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_timings + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.time_log.time_log.get_activity_cost
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.time_log.time_log.get_activity_cost + (employee=None, activity_type=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.time_log.time_log.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.time_log.time_log.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Gantt / Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +start - Start date-time.end - End date-time.filters - Filters like workstation, project etc.Table Name: tabTime Log Batch
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ TLB-+ |
+
| 2 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Submitted +Billed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +sales_invoice |
+ + Link | +
+ Sales Invoice
+ + Will be updated after Sales Invoice is Submitted. + |
+ + + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +time_logs |
+ + Table | ++ Time Logs + + | ++ + + + +Time Log Batch Detail + + + + | +
| 7 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +total_hours |
+ + Float | +
+ Total Hours
+ + updated via Time Logs + |
+ + |
| 9 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +total_billing_amount |
+ + Float | +
+ Total Billing Amount
+ + updated via Time Logs + |
+ + |
| 11 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Time Log Batch + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + before_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + before_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_status + (self, time_log_batch) +
+No docs
++ + + update_time_log_values + (self, d, tl) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_time_log_is_submitted + (self, tl) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.time_log_batch.time_log_batch.make_sales_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.time_log_batch.time_log_batch.make_sales_invoice + (source_name, target=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabTime Log Batch Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +time_log |
+ + Link | ++ Time Log + + | ++ + + + +Time Log + + + + | +
| 2 | +hours |
+ + Float | ++ Hours + + | ++ |
| 3 | +section_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +activity_type |
+ + Data | ++ Activity Type + + | ++ |
| 5 | +billing_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Billing Amount + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabCampaign
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +campaign |
+ + Section Break | ++ Campaign + + | ++ |
| 2 | +campaign_name |
+ + Data | ++ Campaign Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Naming Series + + | +
+ Campaign-.####+ |
+
| 4 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabCustomer
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +basic_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ CUST-+ |
+
| 3 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Full Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +customer_type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ +Company +Individual+ |
+
| 5 | +lead_name |
+ + Link | ++ From Lead + + | ++ + + + +Lead + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 8 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 9 | +tax_id |
+ + Data | ++ Tax ID + + | ++ |
| 10 | +is_frozen |
+ + Check | ++ Is Frozen + + | ++ |
| 11 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +default_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Billing Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 13 | +default_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 14 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +default_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Default Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 16 | +address_contacts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | +
+ icon-map-marker+ |
+
| 17 | +address_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Address HTML + + | ++ |
| 18 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +contact_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Contact HTML + + | ++ |
| 20 | +default_receivable_accounts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Default Receivable Accounts + + | ++ |
| 21 | +accounts |
+ + Table | +
+ Accounts
+ + Mention if non-standard receivable account + |
+ + + + + +Party Account + + + + | +
| 22 | +column_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Credit Limit + + | ++ |
| 23 | +credit_days_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Credit Days Based On + + | +
+ +Fixed Days +Last Day of the Next Month+ |
+
| 24 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 25 | +credit_limit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Limit + + | ++ |
| 26 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Customer Details + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 27 | +customer_details |
+ + Text | +
+ Customer Details
+ + Additional information regarding the customer. + |
+ + |
| 28 | +website |
+ + Data | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 29 | +sales_team_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Partner and Commission + + | +
+ icon-group+ |
+
| 30 | +default_sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 31 | +default_commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate + + | ++ |
| 32 | +sales_team_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Team + + | ++ |
| 33 | +sales_team |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Team Details + + | ++ + + + +Sales Team + + + + | +
| 34 | +communications |
+ + Table | ++ Communications + + | ++ + + + +Communication + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + create_lead_address_contact + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + delete_customer_address + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + delete_customer_contact + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_customer_name + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+Load address and contacts in __onload
+ + + update_address + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_contact + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_customer_address + (self, newdn, set_field) +
+No docs
++ + + update_lead_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_name_with_customer_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.check_credit_limit + (customer, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.get_credit_limit + (customer, company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.get_customer_list + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.get_customer_outstanding + (customer, company) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.get_dashboard_info
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.get_dashboard_info + (customer) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabIndustry Type
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +industry |
+ + Data | ++ Industry + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabInstallation Note
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +installation_note |
+ + Section Break | ++ Installation Note + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ IN-+ |
+
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 6 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 7 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 9 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 10 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 11 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 12 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 13 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 14 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +inst_date |
+ + Date | ++ Installation Date + + | ++ |
| 16 | +inst_time |
+ + Time | ++ Installation Time + + | ++ |
| 17 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Submitted +Cancelled+ |
+
| 18 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 19 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 20 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Installation Note + + + + | +
| 21 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 22 | +item_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 23 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Installation Note Item + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + check_item_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_prevdoc_serial_no + (self, prevdoc_detail_docname) +
+No docs
++ + + is_serial_no_added + (self, item_code, serial_no) +
+No docs
++ + + is_serial_no_exist + (self, item_code, serial_no) +
+No docs
++ + + is_serial_no_match + (self, cur_s_no, prevdoc_s_no, prevdoc_docname) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_installation_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_serial_no + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabInstallation Note Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +description |
+ + Data | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 3 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +prevdoc_detail_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Against Document Detail No + + | ++ |
| 5 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Against Document No + + | ++ |
| 6 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Data | ++ Document Type + + | ++ |
| 7 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Installed Qty + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabProduct Bundle
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +basic_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +new_item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +item_section |
+ + Section Break | +
+
+ + List items that form the package. + |
+ + |
| 4 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Product Bundle Item + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_main_item + (self) +
+Validates, main Item is not a stock item
++ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.product_bundle.product_bundle.get_new_item_code + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabProduct Bundle Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +rate |
+ + Float | ++ Rate + + | ++ |
| 5 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
Table Name: tabQuotation
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ QTN-+ |
+
| 5 | +quotation_to |
+ + Select | ++ Quotation To + + | +
+ +Lead +Customer+ |
+
| 6 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 7 | +lead |
+ + Link | ++ Lead + + | ++ + + + +Lead + + + + | +
| 8 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer / Lead Name + + | ++ |
| 9 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 10 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 11 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 12 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Quotation + + + + | +
| 15 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 16 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 17 | +order_type |
+ + Select | ++ Order Type + + | +
+ +Sales +Maintenance +Shopping Cart+ |
+
| 18 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ icon-tag+ |
+
| 19 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 20 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which customer's currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 21 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 23 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 24 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Price List Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Price list currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 25 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 26 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 27 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Quotation Item + + + + | +
| 28 | +sec_break23 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 31 | +column_break_28 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 33 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 34 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 35 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 36 | +column_break_34 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 37 | +shipping_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Rule + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule + + + + | +
| 38 | +section_break_36 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 40 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + HTML | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 41 | +section_break_39 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 42 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 43 | +column_break_42 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 44 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 45 | +section_break_44 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 46 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 47 | +column_break_46 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 48 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 49 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 50 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 51 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 52 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 53 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Quotation. + |
+ + |
| 54 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 55 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 56 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 57 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 58 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ icon-legal+ |
+
| 59 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 60 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Term Details + + | ++ |
| 61 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Details + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 62 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 63 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 64 | +shipping_address_name |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 65 | +shipping_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 66 | +col_break98 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 67 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 68 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 69 | +print_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Print Settings + + | ++ |
| 70 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 71 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 72 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 73 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 74 | +source |
+ + Select | ++ Source + + | +
+ +Existing Customer +Reference +Advertisement +Cold Calling +Exhibition +Supplier Reference +Mass Mailing +Customer's Vendor +Campaign+ |
+
| 75 | +order_lost_reason |
+ + Small Text | ++ Quotation Lost Reason + + | ++ |
| 76 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 77 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Submitted +Ordered +Lost +Cancelled +Open +Replied+ |
+
| 78 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 79 | +enq_det |
+ + Text | ++ Opportunity Item + + | ++ |
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+ + + check_item_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + declare_order_lost + (self, arg) +
+No docs
++ + + has_sales_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + print_other_charges + (self, docname) +
+No docs
++ + + update_opportunity + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_order_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_quotation_to + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation._make_customer + (source_name, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation._make_sales_order + (source_name, target_doc=None, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation.make_sales_order
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation.make_sales_order + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabQuotation Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +customer_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Item Code + + | ++ |
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 10 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 11 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 12 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 13 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 14 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 16 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 19 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | ++ |
| 20 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 21 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 22 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 24 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | ++ |
| 25 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 26 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 27 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 28 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 29 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Link | ++ Against Doctype + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 30 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Against Docname + + | +
+ prevdoc_doctype+ |
+
| 31 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Tax Rate + + | ++ |
| 32 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 33 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 34 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 35 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
Table Name: tabSales Order
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ SO-+ |
+
| 5 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 6 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 8 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 9 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 10 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 11 | +order_type |
+ + Select | ++ Order Type + + | +
+ +Sales +Maintenance +Shopping Cart+ |
+
| 12 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 14 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 15 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 16 | +delivery_date |
+ + Date | ++ Delivery Date + + | ++ |
| 17 | +po_no |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Purchase Order + + | ++ |
| 18 | +po_date |
+ + Date | ++ Customer's Purchase Order Date + + | ++ |
| 19 | +shipping_address_name |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Address Name + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 20 | +shipping_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 21 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ icon-tag+ |
+
| 22 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 23 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which customer's currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 24 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 26 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 27 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Price List Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Price list currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 28 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 29 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 30 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order Item + + + + | +
| 31 | +section_break_31 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +column_break_33a |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 33 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 34 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 35 | +column_break_33 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 37 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 38 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 39 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 40 | +column_break_38 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 41 | +shipping_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Rule + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule + + + + | +
| 42 | +section_break_40 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 43 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 44 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + HTML | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 45 | +section_break_43 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 47 | +column_break_46 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 48 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 49 | +section_break_48 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 50 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 51 | +column_break_50 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 52 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 53 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 54 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 55 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 56 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 57 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Sales Order. + |
+ + |
| 58 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 59 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 60 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 61 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 62 | +advance_paid |
+ + Currency | ++ Advance Paid + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 63 | +packing_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Packing List + + | +
+ icon-suitcase+ |
+
| 64 | +packed_items |
+ + Table | ++ Packed Items + + | ++ + + + +Packed Item + + + + | +
| 65 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ icon-legal+ |
+
| 66 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 67 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions Details + + | ++ |
| 68 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Details + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 69 | +col_break45 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 70 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 71 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 72 | +col_break46 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 73 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 74 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 75 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 76 | +project_name |
+ + Link | +
+ Project Name
+ + Track this Sales Order against any Project + |
+ + + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 77 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 78 | +column_break_77 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 79 | +source |
+ + Select | ++ Source + + | +
+ +Existing Customer +Reference +Advertisement +Cold Calling +Exhibition +Supplier Reference +Mass Mailing +Customer's Vendor +Campaign+ |
+
| 80 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 81 | +printing_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Details + + | ++ |
| 82 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 83 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 84 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 85 | +section_break_78 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Billing and Delivery Status + + | ++ |
| 86 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +To Deliver and Bill +To Bill +To Deliver +Completed +Stopped +Cancelled +Closed+ |
+
| 87 | +delivery_status |
+ + Select | ++ Delivery Status + + | +
+ Not Delivered +Fully Delivered +Partly Delivered +Closed +Not Applicable+ |
+
| 88 | +per_delivered |
+ + Percent | +
+ % Delivered
+ + % of materials delivered against this Sales Order + |
+ + |
| 89 | +column_break_81 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 90 | +per_billed |
+ + Percent | +
+ % Amount Billed
+ + % of materials billed against this Sales Order + |
+ + |
| 91 | +billing_status |
+ + Select | ++ Billing Status + + | +
+ Not Billed +Fully Billed +Partly Billed +Closed+ |
+
| 92 | +sales_team_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Commission + + | +
+ icon-group+ |
+
| 93 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 94 | +column_break7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 95 | +commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate + + | ++ |
| 96 | +total_commission |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Commission + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 97 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Team + + | ++ |
| 98 | +sales_team |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Team1 + + | ++ + + + +Sales Team + + + + | +
| 99 | +recurring_order |
+ + Section Break | ++ Recurring Order + + | +
+ icon-time+ |
+
| 100 | +is_recurring |
+ + Check | +
+ Is Recurring
+ + Check if recurring order, uncheck to stop recurring or put proper End Date + |
+ + |
| 101 | +recurring_type |
+ + Select | +
+ Recurring Type
+ + Select the period when the invoice will be generated automatically + |
+
+ +Monthly +Quarterly +Half-yearly +Yearly+ |
+
| 102 | +from_date |
+ + Date | +
+ From Date
+ + Start date of current order's period + |
+ + |
| 103 | +to_date |
+ + Date | +
+ To Date
+ + End date of current order's period + |
+ + |
| 104 | +repeat_on_day_of_month |
+ + Int | +
+ Repeat on Day of Month
+ + The day of the month on which auto order will be generated e.g. 05, 28 etc + |
+ + |
| 105 | +end_date |
+ + Date | +
+ End Date
+ + The date on which recurring order will be stop + |
+ + |
| 106 | +column_break83 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 107 | +next_date |
+ + Date | +
+ Next Date
+ + The date on which next invoice will be generated. It is generated on submit. + |
+ + |
| 108 | +recurring_id |
+ + Data | ++ Recurring Id + + | ++ |
| 109 | +notification_email_address |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Notification Email Address
+ + Enter email id separated by commas, order will be mailed automatically on particular date + |
+ + |
| 110 | +recurring_print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Recurring Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+ + + before_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_credit_limit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_modified_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_nextdoc_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + product_bundle_has_stock_item + (self, product_bundle) +
+Returns true if product bundle has stock item
++ + + update_delivery_status + (self, po_name) +
+Update delivery status from Purchase Order for drop shipping
++ + + update_enquiry_status + (self, prevdoc, flag) +
+No docs
++ + + update_prevdoc_status + (self, flag) +
+No docs
++ + + update_reserved_qty + (self, so_item_rows=None) +
+update requested qty (before ordered_qty is updated)
++ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_delivery_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_drop_ship + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_for_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_order_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_po + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_proj_cust + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_sales_mntc_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_supplier_after_submit + (self) +
+Check that supplier is the same after submit if PO is already made
++ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Gantt / Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +start - Start date-time.end - End date-time.filters - Filters (JSON).+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_supplier
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_supplier + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_delivery_note
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_delivery_note + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_maintenance_schedule
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_maintenance_schedule + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_maintenance_visit
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_maintenance_visit + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_material_request
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_material_request + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_purchase_order_for_drop_shipment
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_purchase_order_for_drop_shipment + (source_name, for_supplier, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_sales_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_sales_invoice + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.stop_or_unstop_sales_orders
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.stop_or_unstop_sales_orders + (names, status) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.update_status
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.update_status + (status, name) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSales Order Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +customer_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Item Code + + | ++ |
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 10 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 11 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 12 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 13 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 14 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 16 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +section_break_simple1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 19 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 23 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 24 | +section_break_24 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 26 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 27 | +column_break_27 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 29 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +drop_ship_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Drop Ship + + | ++ |
| 31 | +delivered_by_supplier |
+ + Check | ++ Supplier delivers to Customer + + | ++ |
| 32 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 33 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 34 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Delivery Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 35 | +target_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Target Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 36 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Link | ++ Quotation + + | ++ + + + +Quotation + + + + | +
| 37 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand Name + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 38 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 39 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 40 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 41 | +projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Projected Qty + + | ++ |
| 42 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty + + | ++ |
| 43 | +ordered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Ordered Qty + + | ++ |
| 44 | +delivered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Delivered Qty + + | ++ |
| 45 | +returned_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Returned Qty + + | ++ |
| 46 | +billed_amt |
+ + Currency | ++ Billed Amt + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 47 | +planned_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ Planned Quantity
+ + For Production + |
+ + |
| 48 | +produced_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ Produced Quantity
+ + For Production + |
+ + |
| 49 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Tax Rate + + | ++ |
| 50 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | +
+ Sales Order Date
+ + Used for Production Plan + |
+ + |
Table Name: tabSales Team
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +sales_person |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Person + + | ++ + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 2 | +contact_no |
+ + Data | ++ Contact No. + + | ++ |
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +allocated_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Contribution (%) + + | ++ |
| 5 | +allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Contribution to Net Total + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +incentives |
+ + Currency | ++ Incentives + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 7 | +parenttype |
+ + Data | ++ Parenttype + + | ++ |
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +cust_master_name |
+ + Select | ++ Customer Naming By + + | +
+ Customer Name +Naming Series+ |
+
| 2 | +campaign_naming_by |
+ + Select | ++ Campaign Naming By + + | +
+ Campaign Name +Naming Series+ |
+
| 3 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Default Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 4 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Default Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 5 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +so_required |
+ + Select | ++ Sales Order Required + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 8 | +dn_required |
+ + Select | ++ Delivery Note Required + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 9 | +maintain_same_sales_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Maintain Same Rate Throughout Sales Cycle + + | ++ |
| 10 | +editable_price_list_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Allow user to edit Price List Rate in transactions + + | ++ |
| 11 | +allow_multiple_items |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Item to be added multiple times in a transaction + + | ++ |
| 12 | +allow_against_multiple_purchase_orders |
+ + Check | ++ Allow multiple Sales Orders against a Customer's Purchase Order + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +send_to |
+ + Select | ++ Send To + + | +
+ +All Contact +All Customer Contact +All Supplier Contact +All Sales Partner Contact +All Lead (Open) +All Employee (Active) +All Sales Person+ |
+
| 3 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 4 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 5 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 6 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 7 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 8 | +create_receiver_list |
+ + Button | ++ Create Receiver List + + | +
+ create_receiver_list+ |
+
| 9 | +receiver_list |
+ + Code | ++ Receiver List + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +message |
+ + Text | +
+ Message
+ + Messages greater than 160 characters will be split into multiple messages + |
+ + |
| 12 | +total_characters |
+ + Int | ++ Total Characters + + | ++ |
| 13 | +total_messages |
+ + Int | ++ Total Message(s) + + | ++ |
| 14 | +send_sms |
+ + Button | ++ Send SMS + + | +
+ send_sms+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + create_receiver_list + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_receiver_nos + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + send_sms + (self) +
+No docs
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|
Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + bifurcate_based_on_type + (self, doctype_name, total, av_dis, based_on, doc_obj, val, company) +
+No docs
++ + + get_appr_user_role + (self, det, doctype_name, total, based_on, condition, item, company) +
+No docs
++ + + get_approver_name + (self, doctype_name, total, doc_obj=) +
+No docs
++ + + get_value_based_rule + (self, doctype_name, employee, total_claimed_amount, company) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_approving_authority + (self, doctype_name, company, total, doc_obj=) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_auth_rule + (self, doctype_name, total, based_on, cond, company, item=) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabAuthorization Rule
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +transaction |
+ + Select | ++ Transaction + + | +
+ +Delivery Note +Purchase Invoice +Purchase Order +Purchase Receipt +Quotation +Sales Invoice +Sales Order +Appraisal+ |
+
| 3 | +based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Based On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Average Discount +Customerwise Discount +Itemwise Discount +Not Applicable+ |
+
| 4 | +master_name |
+ + Link | ++ Customer / Item Name + + | ++ + + + + + + | +
| 5 | +system_role |
+ + Link | ++ Applicable To (Role) + + | ++ + + + +Role + + + + | +
| 6 | +system_user |
+ + Link | ++ Applicable To (User) + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 7 | +to_emp |
+ + Link | +
+ Applicable To (Employee)
+ + This will be used for setting rule in HR module + |
+ + + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 8 | +to_designation |
+ + Link | +
+ Applicable To (Designation)
+ + This will be used for setting rule in HR module + |
+ + + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 9 | +approving_role |
+ + Link | ++ Approving Role + + | ++ + + + +Role + + + + | +
| 10 | +approving_user |
+ + Link | ++ Approving User + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 11 | +value |
+ + Float | ++ Above Value + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_duplicate_entry + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_rule + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabBrand
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +brand |
+ + Data | ++ Brand Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabCompany
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +company_name |
+ + Data | ++ Company + + | ++ |
| 3 | +abbr |
+ + Data | ++ Abbr + + | ++ |
| 4 | +change_abbr |
+ + Button | ++ Change Abbreviation + + | ++ |
| 5 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +domain |
+ + Select | ++ Domain + + | +
+ Distribution +Manufacturing +Retail +Services+ |
+
| 7 | +charts_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Default Values + + | ++ |
| 8 | +default_letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Default Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 9 | +default_holiday_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Holiday List + + | ++ + + + +Holiday List + + + + | +
| 10 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 11 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +default_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Default Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 13 | +chart_of_accounts |
+ + Select | ++ Chart of Accounts + + | ++ |
| 14 | +default_terms |
+ + Link | ++ Default Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 15 | +default_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounts Settings + + | ++ |
| 16 | +default_bank_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Bank Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 17 | +default_cash_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Cash Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 18 | +default_receivable_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Receivable Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 19 | +round_off_account |
+ + Link | ++ Round Off Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 20 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +default_payable_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Payable Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 22 | +default_expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Cost of Goods Sold Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 23 | +default_income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 24 | +round_off_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Round Off Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 25 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 27 | +credit_days_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Credit Days Based On + + | +
+ +Fixed Days +Last Day of the Next Month+ |
+
| 28 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 29 | +credit_limit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Limit + + | +
+ default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +column_break_26 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +yearly_bgt_flag |
+ + Select | ++ If Yearly Budget Exceeded (for expense account) + + | +
+ +Warn +Ignore +Stop+ |
+
| 32 | +monthly_bgt_flag |
+ + Select | ++ If Monthly Budget Exceeded (for expense account) + + | +
+ +Warn +Ignore +Stop+ |
+
| 33 | +auto_accounting_for_stock_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Stock Settings + + | ++ |
| 34 | +stock_received_but_not_billed |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Received But Not Billed + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 35 | +stock_adjustment_account |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Adjustment Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 36 | +column_break_32 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 37 | +expenses_included_in_valuation |
+ + Link | ++ Expenses Included In Valuation + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 38 | +company_info |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Company Info
+ + For reference only. + |
+ + |
| 39 | +address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 40 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 41 | +phone_no |
+ + Data | ++ Phone No + + | +
+ Phone+ |
+
| 42 | +fax |
+ + Data | ++ Fax + + | +
+ Phone+ |
+
| 43 | +email |
+ + Data | ++ Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 44 | +website |
+ + Data | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 45 | +registration_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +registration_details |
+ + Code | +
+ Registration Details
+ + Company registration numbers for your reference. Tax numbers etc. + |
+ + |
| 47 | +delete_company_transactions |
+ + Button | ++ Delete Company Transactions + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + _set_default_account + (self, fieldname, account_type) +
+No docs
++ + + add_acc + (self, lst) +
+No docs
++ + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + before_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + check_if_transactions_exist + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + create_default_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + create_default_cost_center + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + create_default_warehouses + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + install_country_fixtures + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+Trash accounts and cost centers for this company if no gl entry exists
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_default_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_default_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.get_company_currency + (company) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.get_name_with_abbr + (name, company) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.replace_abbr
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.replace_abbr + (company, old, new) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabCurrency Exchange
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +from_currency |
+ + Link | ++ From Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 2 | +to_currency |
+ + Link | ++ To Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 3 | +exchange_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabCustomer Group
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_group_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Group Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +parent_customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 3 | +is_group |
+ + Select | +
+ Has Child Node
+ + Only leaf nodes are allowed in transaction + |
+
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 4 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +default_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 6 | +credit_days_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Credit Days Based On + + | +
+ +Fixed Days +Last Day of the Next Month+ |
+
| 7 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 8 | +credit_limit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Limit + + | ++ |
| 9 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 10 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 11 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ old_parent + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 12 | +default_receivable_account |
+ + Section Break | ++ Default Receivable Account + + | ++ |
| 13 | +accounts |
+ + Table | +
+ Accounts
+ + Mention if non-standard receivable account applicable + |
+ + + + + +Party Account + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_name_with_customer + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabEmail Digest
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Email Digest Settings + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enabled + + | ++ |
| 4 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ For Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 5 | +frequency |
+ + Select | ++ How frequently? + + | +
+ Daily +Weekly +Monthly+ |
+
| 6 | +next_send |
+ + Data | ++ Next email will be sent on: + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +recipient_list |
+ + Text | +
+ Recipients
+ + Note: Email will not be sent to disabled users + |
+ + |
| 9 | +addremove_recipients |
+ + Button | ++ Add/Remove Recipients + + | ++ |
| 10 | +accounts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounts + + | ++ |
| 11 | +accounts_module |
+ + Column Break | ++ Income / Expense + + | ++ |
| 12 | +income |
+ + Check | ++ Income + + | ++ |
| 13 | +expenses_booked |
+ + Check | ++ Expense + + | ++ |
| 14 | +bank_balance |
+ + Check | ++ Bank Balance + + | ++ |
| 15 | +income_year_to_date |
+ + Check | ++ Annual Income + + | ++ |
| 16 | +expense_year_to_date |
+ + Check | ++ Annual Expense + + | ++ |
| 17 | +column_break_16 |
+ + Column Break | ++ Receivables / Payables + + | ++ |
| 18 | +invoiced_amount |
+ + Check | ++ Receivables + + | ++ |
| 19 | +payables |
+ + Check | ++ Payables + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + fmt_money + (self, value) +
+No docs
++ + + get_bank_balance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_calendar_events + (self) +
+Get calendar events for given user
++ + + get_expense_year_to_date + (self) +
+Get income to date
++ + + get_expenses_booked + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_from_to_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_income + (self) +
+Get income for given period
++ + + get_income_year_to_date + (self) +
+Get income to date
++ + + get_invoiced_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_msg_html + (self) +
+Build email digest content
++ + + get_next_sending + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_notifications + (self) +
+Get notifications for user
++ + + get_payables + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_period_amounts + (self, accounts) +
+Get amounts for current and past periods
++ + + get_root_type_accounts + (self, root_type) +
+No docs
++ + + get_todo_list + (self, user_id=None) +
+Get to-do list
++ + + get_type_balance + (self, fieldname, account_type) +
+No docs
++ + + get_users + (self) +
+get list of users
++ + + get_year_to_date_balance + (self, root_type) +
+Get income to date
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + send + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_accounting_cards + (self, context) +
+Create accounting cards if checked
++ + + set_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_style + (self, context) +
+Set standard digest style
++ + + set_title + (self, context) +
+Set digest title
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.email_digest.email_digest.get_digest_msg
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.email_digest.email_digest.get_digest_msg + (name) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.email_digest.email_digest.send + () +
+No docs
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +materials |
+ + Section Break | ++ Materials + + | ++ |
| 2 | +fs_item_serial_nos |
+ + Check | +
+ Item Serial Nos
+ + To track item in sales and purchase documents based on their serial nos. This is can also used to track warranty details of the product. + |
+ + |
| 3 | +fs_item_batch_nos |
+ + Check | +
+ Item Batch Nos
+ + To track items in sales and purchase documents with batch nos. "Preferred Industry: Chemicals" + |
+ + |
| 4 | +fs_brands |
+ + Check | +
+ Brands
+ + To track brand name in the following documents Delivery Note, Opportunity, Material Request, Item, Purchase Order, Purchase Voucher, Purchaser Receipt, Quotation, Sales Invoice, Product Bundle, Sales Order, Serial No + |
+ + |
| 5 | +fs_item_barcode |
+ + Check | +
+ Item Barcode
+ + To track items using barcode. You will be able to enter items in Delivery Note and Sales Invoice by scanning barcode of item. + |
+ + |
| 6 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +fs_item_advanced |
+ + Check | +
+ Item Advanced
+ + 1. To maintain the customer wise item code and to make them searchable based on their code use this option + |
+ + |
| 8 | +fs_item_group_in_details |
+ + Check | +
+ Item Groups in Details
+ + To get Item Group in details table + |
+ + |
| 9 | +sales_and_purchase |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales and Purchase + + | ++ |
| 10 | +fs_exports |
+ + Check | +
+ Exports
+ + All export related fields like currency, conversion rate, export total, export grand total etc are available in Delivery Note, POS, Quotation, Sales Invoice, Sales Order etc. + |
+ + |
| 11 | +fs_imports |
+ + Check | +
+ Imports
+ + All import related fields like currency, conversion rate, import total, import grand total etc are available in Purchase Receipt, Supplier Quotation, Purchase Invoice, Purchase Order etc. + |
+ + |
| 12 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +fs_discounts |
+ + Check | +
+ Sales Discounts
+ + Field available in Delivery Note, Quotation, Sales Invoice, Sales Order + |
+ + |
| 14 | +fs_purchase_discounts |
+ + Check | +
+ Purchase Discounts
+ + Discount Fields will be available in Purchase Order, Purchase Receipt, Purchase Invoice + |
+ + |
| 15 | +fs_after_sales_installations |
+ + Check | +
+ After Sale Installations
+ + To track any installation or commissioning related work after sales + |
+ + |
| 16 | +fs_projects |
+ + Check | +
+ Projects
+ + Available in BOM, Delivery Note, Purchase Invoice, Production Order, Purchase Order, Purchase Receipt, Sales Invoice, Sales Order, Stock Entry, Timesheet + |
+ + |
| 17 | +fs_sales_extras |
+ + Check | +
+ Sales Extras
+ + If you have Sales Team and Sale Partners (Channel Partners) they can be tagged and maintain their contribution in the sales activity + |
+ + |
| 18 | +accounts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounts + + | ++ |
| 19 | +fs_recurring_invoice |
+ + Check | +
+ Recurring Invoice
+ + Check if you need automatic recurring invoices. After submitting any sales invoice, Recurring section will be visible. + |
+ + |
| 20 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +fs_pos |
+ + Check | +
+ Point of Sale
+ + To enable "Point of Sale" features + |
+ + |
| 22 | +fs_pos_view |
+ + Check | +
+ POS View
+ + To enable "Point of Sale" view + |
+ + |
| 23 | +production |
+ + Section Break | ++ Manufacturing + + | ++ |
| 24 | +fs_manufacturing |
+ + Check | +
+ Manufacturing
+ + If you involve in manufacturing activity. Enables Item 'Is Manufactured' + |
+ + |
| 25 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +fs_quality |
+ + Check | +
+ Quality
+ + If you follow Quality Inspection. Enables Item QA Required and QA No in Purchase Receipt + |
+ + |
| 27 | +miscelleneous |
+ + Section Break | ++ Miscelleneous + + | ++ |
| 28 | +fs_page_break |
+ + Check | +
+ Page Break
+ + If you have long print formats, this feature can be used to split the page to be printed on multiple pages with all headers and footers on each page + |
+ + |
| 29 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +fs_more_info |
+ + Check | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +default_company |
+ + Link | ++ Default Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +current_fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Current Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 3 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +default_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Default Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 6 | +hide_currency_symbol |
+ + Select | +
+ Hide Currency Symbol
+ + Do not show any symbol like $ etc next to currencies. + |
+
+ +No +Yes+ |
+
| 7 | +disable_rounded_total |
+ + Check | +
+ Disable Rounded Total
+ + If disable, 'Rounded Total' field will not be visible in any transaction + |
+ + |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_defaults + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+update defaults
++ + + toggle_rounded_total + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabItem Group
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +gs |
+ + Section Break | ++ General Settings + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item_group_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Group Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +parent_item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 4 | +is_group |
+ + Select | +
+ Has Child Node
+ + Only leaf nodes are allowed in transaction + |
+
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 5 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +default_income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 7 | +default_expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 8 | +default_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Default Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 9 | +sb9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website Settings + + | ++ |
| 10 | +show_in_website |
+ + Check | +
+ Show in Website
+ + Check this if you want to show in website + |
+ + |
| 11 | +page_name |
+ + Data | ++ Page Name + + | ++ |
| 12 | +parent_website_route |
+ + Read Only | ++ Parent Website Route + + | ++ |
| 13 | +slideshow |
+ + Link | +
+ Slideshow
+ + Show this slideshow at the top of the page + |
+ + + + + +Website Slideshow + + + + | +
| 14 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | +
+ Description
+ + HTML / Banner that will show on the top of product list. + |
+ + |
| 15 | +website_specifications |
+ + Table | ++ Website Specifications + + | ++ + + + +Item Website Specification + + + + | +
| 16 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 17 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 18 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ old_parent + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet, frappe.website.website_generator.WebsiteGenerator + +
+ + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_parent_website_route + (self) +
+Overwrite parent_website_route from WebsiteGenerator.
+Only set parent_website_route if parent is visble.
e.g. If show_in_website is set for Products then url should be /products
+ + + validate_name_with_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_child_groups + (item_group_name) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_group_item_count + (item_group) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_item_for_list_in_html + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_parent_item_groups + (item_group_name) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_product_list_for_group + (product_group=None, start=0, limit=10) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.invalidate_cache_for + (doc, item_group=None) +
+No docs
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +setup_series |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Setup Series
+ + Set prefix for numbering series on your transactions + |
+ + |
| 2 | +select_doc_for_series |
+ + Select | ++ Select Transaction + + | ++ |
| 3 | +help_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Help HTML + + | ++ |
| 4 | +set_options |
+ + Text | ++ Series List for this Transaction + + | ++ |
| 5 | +user_must_always_select |
+ + Check | +
+ User must always select
+ + Check this if you want to force the user to select a series before saving. There will be no default if you check this. + |
+ + |
| 6 | +update |
+ + Button | ++ Update + + | ++ |
| 7 | +update_series |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Update Series
+ + Change the starting / current sequence number of an existing series. + |
+ + |
| 8 | +prefix |
+ + Select | ++ Prefix + + | ++ |
| 9 | +current_value |
+ + Int | +
+ Current Value
+ + This is the number of the last created transaction with this prefix + |
+ + |
| 10 | +update_series_start |
+ + Button | ++ Update Series Number + + | +
+ update_series_start+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_duplicate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_current + (self, arg=None) +
+get series current
++ + + get_options + (self, arg=None) +
+No docs
++ + + get_transactions + (self, arg=None) +
+No docs
++ + + insert_series + (self, series) +
+insert series if missing
++ + + scrub_options_list + (self, ol) +
+No docs
++ + + set_series_for + (self, doctype, ol) +
+No docs
++ + + update_series + (self, arg=None) +
+update series list
++ + + update_series_start + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_series_name + (self, n) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.naming_series.naming_series.get_default_naming_series + (doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.naming_series.naming_series.set_by_naming_series + (doctype, fieldname, naming_series, hide_name_field=True) +
+No docs
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +send_autonotification_for |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Prompt for Email on Submission of
+ + When any of the checked transactions are "Submitted", an email pop-up automatically opened to send an email to the associated "Contact" in that transaction, with the transaction as an attachment. The user may or may not send the email. + |
+ + |
| 2 | +sales |
+ + Column Break | ++ Sales + + | ++ |
| 3 | +quotation |
+ + Check | ++ Quotation + + | ++ |
| 4 | +sales_order |
+ + Check | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ |
| 5 | +delivery_note |
+ + Check | ++ Delivery Note + + | ++ |
| 6 | +sales_invoice |
+ + Check | ++ Sales Invoice + + | ++ |
| 7 | +purchase |
+ + Column Break | ++ Purchase + + | ++ |
| 8 | +purchase_order |
+ + Check | ++ Purchase Order + + | ++ |
| 9 | +purchase_receipt |
+ + Check | ++ Purchase Receipt + + | ++ |
| 10 | +expense_claim |
+ + Check | ++ Expense Claim + + | ++ |
| 11 | +customize_the_notification |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Customize the Notification
+ + Customize the introductory text that goes as a part of that email. Each transaction has a separate introductory text. + |
+ + |
| 12 | +select_transaction |
+ + Select | ++ Select Transaction + + | +
+ +Quotation +Sales Order +Delivery Note +Sales Invoice +Purchase Order +Purchase Receipt +Expense Claim +Expense Claim Approved +Expense Claim Rejected+ |
+
| 13 | +custom_message |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Custom Message + + | ++ |
| 14 | +set_message |
+ + Button | ++ Update + + | ++ |
| 15 | +quotation_message |
+ + Text | ++ Quotation Message + + | ++ |
| 16 | +sales_order_message |
+ + Text | ++ Sales Order Message + + | ++ |
| 17 | +delivery_note_message |
+ + Text | ++ Delivery Note Message + + | ++ |
| 18 | +sales_invoice_message |
+ + Text | ++ Sales Invoice Message + + | ++ |
| 19 | +purchase_order_message |
+ + Text | ++ Purchase Order Message + + | ++ |
| 20 | +purchase_receipt_message |
+ + Text | ++ Purchase Receipt Message + + | ++ |
| 21 | +expense_claim_approved_message |
+ + Text | ++ Expense Claim Approved Message + + | ++ |
| 22 | +expense_claim_rejected_message |
+ + Text | ++ Expense Claim Rejected Message + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabPrint Heading
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +print_heading |
+ + Data | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabQuotation Lost Reason
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +order_lost_reason |
+ + Data | ++ Quotation Lost Reason + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabSales Partner
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +partner_name |
+ + Data | ++ Sales Partner Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +partner_type |
+ + Select | ++ Partner Type + + | +
+ +Channel Partner +Distributor +Dealer +Agent +Retailer +Implementation Partner +Reseller+ |
+
| 3 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate + + | ++ |
| 6 | +address_contacts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address & Contacts + + | ++ |
| 7 | +address_desc |
+ + HTML | ++ Address Desc + + | ++ |
| 8 | +address_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Address HTML + + | ++ |
| 9 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +contact_desc |
+ + HTML | ++ Contact Desc + + | ++ |
| 11 | +contact_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Contact HTML + + | ++ |
| 12 | +partner_target_details_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Partner Target + + | ++ |
| 13 | +targets |
+ + Table | ++ Targets + + | ++ + + + +Target Detail + + + + | +
| 14 | +distribution_id |
+ + Link | +
+ Target Distribution
+ + Select Monthly Distribution to unevenly distribute targets across months. + |
+ + + + + +Monthly Distribution + + + + | +
| 15 | +website |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 16 | +show_in_website |
+ + Check | ++ Show In Website + + | ++ |
| 17 | +section_break_17 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +logo |
+ + Attach | ++ Logo + + | ++ |
| 19 | +partner_website |
+ + Data | ++ Partner's Website + + | ++ |
| 20 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +page_name |
+ + Data | ++ Page Name + + | ++ |
| 22 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +introduction |
+ + Text | ++ Introduction + + | ++ |
| 24 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 25 | +parent_website_route |
+ + Read Only | ++ Parent Website Route + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.website.website_generator.WebsiteGenerator + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_contacts + (self, nm) +
+No docs
++ + + get_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+Load address and contacts in __onload
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSales Person
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +name_and_employee_id |
+ + Section Break | ++ Name and Employee ID + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +sales_person_name |
+ + Data | ++ Sales Person Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +parent_sales_person |
+ + Link | +
+ Parent Sales Person
+ + Select company name first. + |
+ + + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 4 | +is_group |
+ + Select | ++ Has Child Node + + | +
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 5 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 7 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 8 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 9 | +old_parent |
+ + Data | ++ old_parent + + | ++ |
| 10 | +target_details_section_break |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Sales Person Targets
+ + Set targets Item Group-wise for this Sales Person. + |
+
+ icon-bullseye+ |
+
| 11 | +targets |
+ + Table | ++ Targets + + | ++ + + + +Target Detail + + + + | +
| 12 | +distribution_id |
+ + Link | +
+ Target Distribution
+ + Select Monthly Distribution to unevenly distribute targets across months. + |
+ + + + + +Monthly Distribution + + + + | +
| 13 | +communications |
+ + Table | ++ Communications + + | ++ + + + +Communication + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet + +
+ + + get_email_id + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_employee_id + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSMS Parameter
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +parameter |
+ + Data | ++ Parameter + + | ++ |
| 2 | +value |
+ + Data | ++ Value + + | ++ |
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +sms_gateway_url |
+ + Data | +
+ SMS Gateway URL
+ + Eg. smsgateway.com/api/send_sms.cgi + |
+ + |
| 3 | +message_parameter |
+ + Data | +
+ Message Parameter
+ + Enter url parameter for message + |
+ + |
| 4 | +receiver_parameter |
+ + Data | +
+ Receiver Parameter
+ + Enter url parameter for receiver nos + |
+ + |
| 5 | +sms_sender_name |
+ + Data | ++ SMS Sender Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +static_parameters_section |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +parameters |
+ + Table | +
+ Static Parameters
+ + Enter static url parameters here (Eg. sender=ERPNext, username=ERPNext, password=1234 etc.) + |
+ + + + + +SMS Parameter + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.create_sms_log + (args, sent_to) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.get_contact_number
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.get_contact_number + (contact_name, value, key) +
+returns mobile number of the contact
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.get_sender_name + () +
+returns name as SMS sender
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.scrub_gateway_url + (url) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.send_request + (gateway_url, args) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.send_sms
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.send_sms + (receiver_list, msg, sender_name=) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.send_via_gateway + (arg) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.validate_receiver_nos + (receiver_list) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSupplier Type
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier_type |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Type + + | ++ |
| 2 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 3 | +default_payable_account |
+ + Section Break | ++ Default Payable Account + + | ++ |
| 4 | +accounts |
+ + Table | +
+ Accounts
+ + Mention if non-standard receivable account applicable + |
+ + + + + +Party Account + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabTarget Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 2 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 3 | +target_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Target Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +target_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Target Amount + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabTerms and Conditions
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabTerritory
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +territory_name |
+ + Data | ++ Territory Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +parent_territory |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 3 | +is_group |
+ + Select | +
+ Has Child Node
+ + Only leaf nodes are allowed in transaction + |
+
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 4 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +territory_manager |
+ + Link | +
+ Territory Manager
+ + For reference + |
+ + + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 6 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 7 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 8 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ old_parent + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 9 | +target_details_section_break |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Territory Targets
+ + Set Item Group-wise budgets on this Territory. You can also include seasonality by setting the Distribution. + |
+ + |
| 10 | +targets |
+ + Table | ++ Targets + + | ++ + + + +Target Detail + + + + | +
| 11 | +distribution_id |
+ + Link | +
+ Target Distribution
+ + Select Monthly Distribution to unevenly distribute targets across months. + |
+ + + + + +Monthly Distribution + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabUOM
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +uom_name |
+ + Data | ++ UOM Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +must_be_whole_number |
+ + Check | +
+ Must be Whole Number
+ + Check this to disallow fractions. (for Nos) + |
+ + |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Table Name: tabWebsite Item Group
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enable Shopping Cart + + | ++ |
| 2 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 4 | +price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 5 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +default_customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Default Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 7 | +quotation_series |
+ + Select | ++ Quotation Series + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_shipping_rules + (self, shipping_territory) +
+No docs
++ + + get_tax_master + (self, billing_territory) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_exchange_rates_exist + (self) +
+check if exchange rates exist for all Price List currencies (to company's currency)
++ + + validate_tax_rule + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.check_shopping_cart_enabled + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.get_shopping_cart_settings + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.is_cart_enabled + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.validate_cart_settings + (doc, method) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabBatch
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +batch_id |
+ + Data | ++ Batch ID + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Batch Description + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + item_has_batch_enabled + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabBin
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +reserved_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Reserved Quantity + + | ++ |
| 4 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Quantity + + | ++ |
| 5 | +ordered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Ordered Quantity + + | ++ |
| 6 | +indented_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity Requested for Purchase + + | ++ |
| 7 | +planned_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Planned Qty + + | ++ |
| 8 | +projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Projected Qty + + | ++ |
| 9 | +ma_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Moving Average Rate + + | ++ |
| 10 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 11 | +fcfs_rate |
+ + Float | ++ FCFS Rate + + | ++ |
| 12 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 13 | +stock_value |
+ + Float | ++ Stock Value + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_first_sle + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_qty + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + update_stock + (self, args, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabDelivery Note
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +delivery_to_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Delivery To + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ DN- +DN-RET-+ |
+
| 5 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 6 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Billing Address Name + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 8 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Billing Address + + | ++ |
| 9 | +shipping_address_name |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 10 | +shipping_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 11 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 12 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 13 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 14 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 16 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 17 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 18 | +po_no |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Purchase Order No + + | ++ |
| 19 | +po_date |
+ + Date | ++ Customer's Purchase Order Date + + | ++ |
| 20 | +is_return |
+ + Check | ++ Is Return + + | ++ |
| 21 | +return_against |
+ + Link | ++ Return Against Delivery Note + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 22 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ icon-tag+ |
+
| 23 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 24 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which customer's currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 25 | +col_break23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 27 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 28 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Price List Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Price list currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 29 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 30 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 31 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + | +
| 32 | +packing_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Packing List + + | +
+ icon-suitcase+ |
+
| 33 | +packed_items |
+ + Table | ++ Packed Items + + | ++ + + + +Packed Item + + + + | +
| 34 | +product_bundle_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Product Bundle Help + + | ++ |
| 35 | +section_break_31 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 37 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 38 | +column_break_33 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 40 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 41 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 42 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | +
+ Taxes and Charges
+ + If you have created a standard template in Sales Taxes and Charges Template, select one and click on the button below. + |
+ + + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 43 | +column_break_39 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 44 | +shipping_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Rule + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule + + + + | +
| 45 | +section_break_41 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 47 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + HTML | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 48 | +section_break_44 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 49 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 50 | +column_break_47 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 51 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 52 | +section_break_49 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 53 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 54 | +column_break_51 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 55 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 56 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 57 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 58 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 59 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 60 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Delivery Note. + |
+ + |
| 61 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 62 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 63 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 64 | +in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words
+ + In Words (Export) will be visible once you save the Delivery Note. + |
+ + |
| 65 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ icon-legal+ |
+
| 66 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 67 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions Details + + | ++ |
| 68 | +transporter_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Transporter Info + + | +
+ icon-truck+ |
+
| 69 | +transporter_name |
+ + Data | ++ Transporter Name + + | ++ |
| 70 | +col_break34 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 71 | +lr_no |
+ + Data | ++ Vehicle No + + | ++ |
| 72 | +lr_date |
+ + Date | ++ Vehicle Dispatch Date + + | ++ |
| 73 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Details + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 74 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 75 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 76 | +col_break21 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 77 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 78 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 79 | +project_name |
+ + Link | +
+ Project Name
+ + Track this Delivery Note against any Project + |
+ + + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 80 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 81 | +source |
+ + Select | ++ Source + + | +
+ +Existing Customer +Reference +Advertisement +Cold Calling +Exhibition +Supplier Reference +Mass Mailing +Customer's Vendor +Campaign+ |
+
| 82 | +column_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 83 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | +
+ Posting Time
+ + Time at which items were delivered from warehouse + |
+ + |
| 84 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 85 | +printing_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Details + + | ++ |
| 86 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 87 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 88 | +column_break_88 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 89 | +print_without_amount |
+ + Check | ++ Print Without Amount + + | ++ |
| 90 | +section_break_83 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Status + + | ++ |
| 91 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Cancelled +Closed+ |
+
| 92 | +per_installed |
+ + Percent | +
+ % Installed
+ + % of materials delivered against this Delivery Note + |
+ + |
| 93 | +installation_status |
+ + Select | ++ Installation Status + + | ++ |
| 94 | +column_break_89 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 95 | +to_warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ To Warehouse
+ + Required only for sample item. + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 96 | +excise_page |
+ + Data | ++ Excise Page Number + + | ++ |
| 97 | +instructions |
+ + Text | ++ Instructions + + | ++ |
| 98 | +sales_team_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Commission + + | +
+ icon-group+ |
+
| 99 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 100 | +column_break7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 101 | +commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 102 | +total_commission |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Commission + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 103 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Team + + | ++ |
| 104 | +sales_team |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Team1 + + | ++ + + + +Sales Team + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + before_print + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + cancel_packing_slips + (self) +
+Cancel submitted packing slips related to this delivery note
++ + + check_credit_limit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_next_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_actual_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + so_required + (self) +
+check in manage account if sales order required or not
++ + + update_current_stock + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_for_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_packed_qty + (self) +
+Validate that if packed qty exists, it should be equal to qty
++ + + validate_proj_cust + (self) +
+check for does customer belong to same project as entered..
++ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.get_invoiced_qty_map + (delivery_note) +
+returns a map: {dndetail: invoicedqty}
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_installation_note
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_installation_note + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_packing_slip
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_packing_slip + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_sales_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_sales_invoice + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_sales_return
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_sales_return + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.update_delivery_note_status
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.update_delivery_note_status + (docname, status) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabDelivery Note Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +customer_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Item Code + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 10 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 11 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 12 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 13 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 14 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 15 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 17 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +section_break_1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 21 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 23 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 24 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 25 | +section_break_25 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 27 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 28 | +column_break_28 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 31 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 32 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ From Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 33 | +target_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ To Warehouse (Optional) + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 34 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 35 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 36 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Available Qty at From Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 37 | +actual_batch_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Available Batch Qty at From Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 38 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 39 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand Name + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 40 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Tax Rate + + | ++ |
| 41 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 42 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 43 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 44 | +against_sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Against Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 45 | +against_sales_invoice |
+ + Link | ++ Against Sales Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 46 | +so_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Against Sales Order Item + + | ++ |
| 47 | +si_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Against Sales Invoice Item + + | ++ |
| 48 | +installed_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Installed Qty + + | ++ |
| 49 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabItem
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +name_and_description_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-flag+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ ITEM-+ |
+
| 3 | +item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Item Code + + | ++ |
| 4 | +variant_of |
+ + Link | +
+ Variant Of
+ + If item is a variant of another item then description, image, pricing, taxes etc will be set from the template unless explicitly specified + |
+ + + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 7 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Default Unit of Measure + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 8 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +is_stock_item |
+ + Check | ++ Maintain Stock + + | ++ |
| 10 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 11 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 12 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 13 | +section_break_11 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 14 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 15 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 16 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 17 | +inventory |
+ + Section Break | ++ Inventory + + | +
+ icon-truck+ |
+
| 18 | +default_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 19 | +end_of_life |
+ + Date | ++ End of Life + + | ++ |
| 20 | +has_batch_no |
+ + Check | ++ Has Batch No + + | ++ |
| 21 | +has_serial_no |
+ + Check | +
+ Has Serial No
+ + Selecting "Yes" will give a unique identity to each entity of this item which can be viewed in the Serial No master. + |
+ + |
| 22 | +serial_no_series |
+ + Data | +
+ Serial Number Series
+ + Example: ABCD.##### +If series is set and Serial No is not mentioned in transactions, then automatic serial number will be created based on this series. If you always want to explicitly mention Serial Nos for this item. leave this blank. + |
+ + |
| 23 | +is_asset_item |
+ + Check | ++ Is Fixed Asset Item + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +tolerance |
+ + Float | ++ Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent + + | ++ |
| 26 | +valuation_method |
+ + Select | ++ Valuation Method + + | +
+ +FIFO +Moving Average+ |
+
| 27 | +warranty_period |
+ + Data | ++ Warranty Period (in days) + + | ++ |
| 28 | +net_weight |
+ + Float | ++ Net Weight + + | ++ |
| 29 | +weight_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Weight UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 30 | +reorder_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Auto re-order + + | +
+ icon-rss+ |
+
| 31 | +re_order_level |
+ + Float | +
+ Re-order Level
+ + Automatically create Material Request if quantity falls below this level + |
+ + |
| 32 | +re_order_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Re-order Qty + + | ++ |
| 33 | +apply_warehouse_wise_reorder_level |
+ + Check | ++ Apply Warehouse-wise Reorder Level + + | ++ |
| 34 | +section_break_31 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reorder level based on Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 35 | +reorder_levels |
+ + Table | +
+ Reorder level based on Warehouse
+ + Will also apply for variants unless overrridden + |
+ + + + + +Item Reorder + + + + | +
| 36 | +variants_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Variants + + | ++ |
| 37 | +has_variants |
+ + Check | +
+ Has Variants
+ + If this item has variants, then it cannot be selected in sales orders etc. + |
+ + |
| 38 | +attributes |
+ + Table | ++ Attributes + + | ++ + + + +Item Variant Attribute + + + + | +
| 39 | +purchase_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Purchase Details + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 40 | +is_purchase_item |
+ + Check | ++ Is Purchase Item + + | ++ |
| 41 | +min_order_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Minimum Order Qty + + | ++ |
| 42 | +lead_time_days |
+ + Int | +
+ Lead Time in days
+ + Average time taken by the supplier to deliver + |
+ + |
| 43 | +buying_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Default Buying Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 44 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 45 | +unit_of_measure_conversion |
+ + Column Break | ++ Unit of Measure Conversion + + | ++ |
| 46 | +uoms |
+ + Table | +
+ UOMs
+ + Will also apply for variants + |
+ + + + + +UOM Conversion Detail + + + + | +
| 47 | +last_purchase_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Last Purchase Rate + + | ++ |
| 48 | +supplier_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Supplier Details + + | ++ |
| 49 | +default_supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Default Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 50 | +delivered_by_supplier |
+ + Check | ++ Delivered by Supplier (Drop Ship) + + | ++ |
| 51 | +manufacturer |
+ + Data | ++ Manufacturer + + | ++ |
| 52 | +manufacturer_part_no |
+ + Data | ++ Manufacturer Part Number + + | ++ |
| 53 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ Item Code for Suppliers + + | ++ |
| 54 | +supplier_items |
+ + Table | ++ Supplier Items + + | ++ + + + +Item Supplier + + + + | +
| 55 | +sales_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Details + + | +
+ icon-tag+ |
+
| 56 | +is_sales_item |
+ + Check | ++ Is Sales Item + + | ++ |
| 57 | +is_service_item |
+ + Check | +
+ Is Service Item
+ + Allow in Sales Order of type "Service" + |
+ + |
| 58 | +publish_in_hub |
+ + Check | +
+ Publish in Hub
+ + Publish Item to hub.erpnext.com + |
+ + |
| 59 | +synced_with_hub |
+ + Check | ++ Synced With Hub + + | ++ |
| 60 | +income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 61 | +selling_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Default Selling Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 62 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ Customer Item Codes + + | ++ |
| 63 | +customer_items |
+ + Table | ++ Customer Items + + | ++ + + + +Item Customer Detail + + + + | +
| 64 | +max_discount |
+ + Float | ++ Max Discount (%) + + | ++ |
| 65 | +item_tax_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Item Tax + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 66 | +taxes |
+ + Table | +
+ Taxes
+ + Will also apply for variants + |
+ + + + + +Item Tax + + + + | +
| 67 | +inspection_criteria |
+ + Section Break | ++ Inspection Criteria + + | +
+ icon-search+ |
+
| 68 | +inspection_required |
+ + Check | ++ Inspection Required + + | ++ |
| 69 | +quality_parameters |
+ + Table | +
+ Quality Parameters
+ + Will also apply to variants + |
+ + + + + +Item Quality Inspection Parameter + + + + | +
| 70 | +manufacturing |
+ + Section Break | ++ Manufacturing + + | +
+ icon-cogs+ |
+
| 71 | +is_pro_applicable |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Production Order + + | ++ |
| 72 | +is_sub_contracted_item |
+ + Check | +
+ Supply Raw Materials for Purchase
+ + If subcontracted to a vendor + |
+ + |
| 73 | +column_break_74 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 74 | +default_bom |
+ + Link | ++ Default BOM + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 75 | +customer_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Code + + | ++ |
| 76 | +website_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website + + | +
+ icon-globe+ |
+
| 77 | +show_in_website |
+ + Check | ++ Show in Website + + | ++ |
| 78 | +page_name |
+ + Data | +
+ Page Name
+ + website page link + |
+ + |
| 79 | +weightage |
+ + Int | +
+ Weightage
+ + Items with higher weightage will be shown higher + |
+ + |
| 80 | +slideshow |
+ + Link | +
+ Slideshow
+ + Show a slideshow at the top of the page + |
+ + + + + +Website Slideshow + + + + | +
| 81 | +website_image |
+ + Attach | +
+ Image
+ + Item Image (if not slideshow) + |
+ + |
| 82 | +thumbnail |
+ + Data | ++ Thumbnail + + | ++ |
| 83 | +cb72 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 84 | +website_warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ Website Warehouse
+ + Show "In Stock" or "Not in Stock" based on stock available in this warehouse. + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 85 | +website_item_groups |
+ + Table | +
+ Website Item Groups
+ + List this Item in multiple groups on the website. + |
+ + + + + +Website Item Group + + + + | +
| 86 | +sb72 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website Specifications + + | ++ |
| 87 | +copy_from_item_group |
+ + Button | ++ Copy From Item Group + + | ++ |
| 88 | +website_specifications |
+ + Table | ++ Website Specifications + + | ++ + + + +Item Website Specification + + + + | +
| 89 | +web_long_description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Website Description + + | ++ |
| 90 | +parent_website_route |
+ + Read Only | ++ Parent Website Route + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.website.website_generator.WebsiteGenerator + +
+ + + add_default_uom_in_conversion_factor_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge) +
+No docs
++ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + before_insert + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + before_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + cant_change + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_for_active_boms + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_if_sle_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_item_tax + (self) +
+Check whether Tax Rate is not entered twice for same Tax Type
++ + + check_warehouse_is_set_for_stock_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + copy_specification_from_item_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + fill_customer_code + (self) +
+Append all the customer codes and insert into "customer_code" field of item table
++ + + get_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + make_thumbnail + (self) +
+Make a thumbnail of website_image
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + recalculate_bin_qty + (self, newdn) +
+No docs
++ + + set_attribute_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + set_disabled_attributes + (self, context) +
+Disable selection options of attribute combinations that do not result in a variant
++ + + set_last_purchase_rate + (self, newdn) +
+No docs
++ + + set_variant_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + update_item_desc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_item_price + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_template_item + (self) +
+Set Show in Website for Template Item if True for its Variant
++ + + update_template_tables + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_variants + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_attributes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_barcode + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_conversion_factor + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_has_variants + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_item_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_name_with_item_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_reorder_level + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_uom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_variant_attributes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_warehouse_for_reorder + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item._msgprint + (msg, verbose) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.check_stock_uom_with_bin + (item, stock_uom) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.get_last_purchase_details + (item_code, doc_name=None, conversion_rate=1.0) +
+returns last purchase details in stock uom
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.invalidate_cache_for_item + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.validate_cancelled_item + (item_code, docstatus=None, verbose=1) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.validate_end_of_life + (item_code, end_of_life=None, disabled=None, verbose=1) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.validate_is_stock_item + (item_code, is_stock_item=None, verbose=1) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabItem Attribute
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +attribute_name |
+ + Data | ++ Attribute Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +numeric_values |
+ + Check | ++ Numeric Values + + | ++ |
| 3 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +from_range |
+ + Float | ++ From Range + + | ++ |
| 5 | +increment |
+ + Float | ++ Increment + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +to_range |
+ + Float | ++ To Range + + | ++ |
| 8 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +item_attribute_values |
+ + Table | ++ Item Attribute Values + + | ++ + + + +Item Attribute Value + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_attribute_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_duplication + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_numeric + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Table Name: tabItem Attribute Value
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +attribute_value |
+ + Data | ++ Attribute Value + + | ++ |
| 2 | +abbr |
+ + Data | +
+ Abbreviation
+ + This will be appended to the Item Code of the variant. For example, if your abbreviation is "SM", and the item code is "T-SHIRT", the item code of the variant will be "T-SHIRT-SM" + |
+ + |
Table Name: tabItem Customer Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_name |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 2 | +ref_code |
+ + Data | ++ Ref Code + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabItem Price
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +price_list_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Price List + + | +
+ icon-tags+ |
+
| 2 | +price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 3 | +buying |
+ + Check | ++ Buying + + | ++ |
| 4 | +selling |
+ + Check | ++ Selling + + | ++ |
| 5 | +item_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-tag+ |
+
| 6 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 7 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 8 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 9 | +col_br_1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 11 | +item_description |
+ + Text | ++ Item Description + + | ++ |
| 12 | +section_break_12 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +bulk_import_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Bulk Import Help + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_duplicate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_item_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_price_list_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_price_list + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Table Name: tabItem Quality Inspection Parameter
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +specification |
+ + Data | ++ Parameter + + | ++ |
| 2 | +value |
+ + Data | ++ Acceptance Criteria + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabItem Reorder
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 2 | +warehouse_reorder_level |
+ + Float | ++ Re-order Level + + | ++ |
| 3 | +warehouse_reorder_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Re-order Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +material_request_type |
+ + Select | ++ Material Request Type + + | +
+ Purchase +Transfer+ |
+
Table Name: tabItem Supplier
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 2 | +supplier_part_no |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Part Number + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabItem Tax
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +tax_type |
+ + Link | ++ Tax + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 2 | +tax_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Tax Rate + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabItem Variant
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_attribute |
+ + Link | ++ Item Attribute + + | ++ + + + +Item Attribute + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_attribute_value |
+ + Data | ++ Item Attribute Value + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabItem Variant Attribute
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +attribute |
+ + Link | ++ Attribute + + | ++ + + + +Item Attribute + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +attribute_value |
+ + Data | ++ Attribute Value + + | ++ |
| 4 | +numeric_values |
+ + Check | ++ Numeric Values + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +from_range |
+ + Float | ++ From Range + + | ++ |
| 7 | +increment |
+ + Float | ++ Increment + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +to_range |
+ + Float | ++ To Range + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabItem Website Specification
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +label |
+ + Data | ++ Label + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabLanded Cost Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 3 | +purchase_receipt |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Receipt + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 4 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 6 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 7 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 8 | +applicable_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Applicable Charges + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 9 | +purchase_receipt_item |
+ + Data | ++ Purchase Receipt Item + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabLanded Cost Purchase Receipt
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +purchase_receipt |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Receipt + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 2 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabLanded Cost Taxes and Charges
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 2 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Table Name: tabLanded Cost Voucher
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +purchase_receipts |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Receipts + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 3 | +get_items_from_purchase_receipts |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items From Purchase Receipts + + | ++ |
| 4 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Receipt Items + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 6 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 7 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 8 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Voucher + + + + | +
| 9 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +distribute_charges_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Distribute Charges Based On + + | +
+ +Qty +Amount+ |
+
| 11 | +sec_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +landed_cost_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Landed Cost Help + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + check_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_items_from_purchase_receipts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_applicable_charges_for_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_total_taxes_and_charges + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_landed_cost + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_rate_in_serial_no + (self, purchase_receipt) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_purchase_receipts + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabMaterial Request
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +type_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-pushpin+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +material_request_type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ Purchase +Material Transfer +Material Issue+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ MREQ-+ |
+
| 6 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 7 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 8 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 9 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Material Request Item + + + + | +
| 10 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 11 | +requested_by |
+ + Data | ++ Requested For + + | ++ |
| 12 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Transaction Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Stopped +Cancelled+ |
+
| 15 | +per_ordered |
+ + Percent | ++ % Ordered + + | ++ |
| 16 | +printing_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Details + + | ++ |
| 17 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 18 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 19 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ icon-legal+ |
+
| 20 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 21 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions Content + + | ++ |
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+ + + check_if_already_pulled + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_modified_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_completed_qty + (self, mr_items=None) +
+No docs
++ + + update_requested_qty + (self, mr_item_rows=None) +
+update requested qty (before ordered_qty is updated)
++ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_qty_against_so + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_schedule_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.get_material_requests_based_on_supplier + (supplier) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_purchase_order
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_purchase_order + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_purchase_order_based_on_supplier
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_purchase_order_based_on_supplier + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_stock_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_stock_entry + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_supplier_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_supplier_quotation + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.set_missing_values + (source, target_doc) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.update_completed_and_requested_qty + (stock_entry, method) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.update_item + (obj, target, source_parent) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabMaterial Request Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 9 | +quantity_and_warehouse |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 10 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 11 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 12 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ For Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 13 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Required Date + + | ++ |
| 15 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 16 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 17 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 18 | +lead_time_date |
+ + Date | ++ Lead Time Date + + | ++ |
| 19 | +sales_order_no |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order No + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 20 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +min_order_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Min Order Qty + + | ++ |
| 22 | +projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Projected Qty + + | ++ |
| 23 | +ordered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Completed Qty + + | ++ |
| 24 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabPacked Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +parent_item |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ From Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 8 | +target_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ To Warehouse (Optional) + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 9 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 11 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 15 | +section_break_13 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty + + | ++ |
| 17 | +projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Projected Qty + + | ++ |
| 18 | +column_break_16 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 20 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 21 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Data | ++ Prevdoc DocType + + | ++ |
| 22 | +parent_detail_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Parent Detail docname + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabPacking Slip
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +packing_slip_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +delivery_note |
+ + Link | +
+ Delivery Note
+ + Indicates that the package is a part of this delivery (Only Draft) + |
+ + + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PS-+ |
+
| 6 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +from_case_no |
+ + Data | +
+ From Package No.
+ + Identification of the package for the delivery (for print) + |
+ + |
| 9 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +to_case_no |
+ + Data | +
+ To Package No.
+ + If more than one package of the same type (for print) + |
+ + |
| 11 | +package_item_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +get_items |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items + + | ++ |
| 13 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Packing Slip Item + + + + | +
| 14 | +package_weight_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Package Weight Details + + | ++ |
| 15 | +net_weight_pkg |
+ + Float | +
+ Net Weight
+ + The net weight of this package. (calculated automatically as sum of net weight of items) + |
+ + |
| 16 | +net_weight_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Net Weight UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 17 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +gross_weight_pkg |
+ + Float | +
+ Gross Weight
+ + The gross weight of the package. Usually net weight + packaging material weight. (for print) + |
+ + |
| 19 | +gross_weight_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Gross Weight UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 20 | +letter_head_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ |
| 21 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 22 | +misc_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Packing Slip + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_details_for_packing + (self) +
+Returns +* 'Delivery Note Items' query result as a list of dict +* Item Quantity dict of current packing slip doc +* No. of Cases of this packing slip
++ + + get_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_recommended_case_no + (self) +
+Returns the next case no. for a new packing slip for a delivery +note
++ + + recommend_new_qty + (self, item, ps_item_qty, no_of_cases) +
+Recommend a new quantity and raise a validation exception
++ + + update_item_details + (self) +
+Fill empty columns in Packing Slip Item
++ + + validate + (self) +
+It is necessary to validate case nos before checking quantity
++ + + validate_case_nos + (self) +
+Validate if case nos overlap. If they do, recommend next case no.
++ + + validate_delivery_note + (self) +
+Validates if delivery note has status as draft
++ + + validate_items_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_qty + (self) +
+Check packed qty across packing slips and delivery note
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.packing_slip.packing_slip.item_details + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPacking Slip Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 4 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 6 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 7 | +net_weight |
+ + Float | ++ Net Weight + + | ++ |
| 8 | +weight_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Weight UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 9 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 10 | +dn_detail |
+ + Data | ++ DN Detail + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabPrice List
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enabled + + | ++ |
| 2 | +sb_1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +price_list_name |
+ + Data | ++ Price List Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 5 | +buying |
+ + Check | ++ Buying + + | ++ |
| 6 | +selling |
+ + Check | ++ Selling + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +countries |
+ + Table | ++ Applicable for Countries + + | ++ + + + +Price List Country + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_default_if_missing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_item_price + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPrice List Country
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
Table Name: tabPurchase Receipt
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PREC- +PREC-RET-+ |
+
| 5 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 6 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 8 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 9 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 10 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 11 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | +
+ Posting Time
+ + Time at which materials were received + |
+ + |
| 14 | +is_return |
+ + Check | ++ Is Return + + | ++ |
| 15 | +return_against |
+ + Link | ++ Return Against Purchase Receipt + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 16 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ icon-tag+ |
+
| 17 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 18 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which supplier's currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 19 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 21 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 22 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Price List Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 23 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 24 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 25 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + | +
| 26 | +get_current_stock |
+ + Button | ++ Get Current Stock + + | +
+ get_current_stock+ |
+
| 27 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 29 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +column_break_27 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 32 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 33 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | +
+
+ + Add / Edit Taxes and Charges + |
+
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 34 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 35 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 36 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + HTML | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 37 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-money+ |
+
| 38 | +base_taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 39 | +base_taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 40 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 41 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 42 | +taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 43 | +taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 44 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 45 | +section_break_42 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 46 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 47 | +column_break_44 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 48 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 49 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 50 | +section_break_46 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 51 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 52 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words (Company Currency) + + | ++ |
| 53 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 54 | +column_break_50 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 55 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 56 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 57 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ icon-legal+ |
+
| 58 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 59 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 60 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Details + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 61 | +supplier_address |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 62 | +column_break_57 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 63 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 64 | +raw_material_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Raw Materials Supplied + + | +
+ icon-table+ |
+
| 65 | +is_subcontracted |
+ + Select | ++ Raw Materials Supplied + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 66 | +supplier_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 67 | +supplied_items |
+ + Table | ++ Supplied Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt Item Supplied + + + + | +
| 68 | +bill_no |
+ + Data | ++ Bill No + + | ++ |
| 69 | +bill_date |
+ + Date | ++ Bill Date + + | ++ |
| 70 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 71 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Cancelled +Closed+ |
+
| 72 | +rejected_warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ Rejected Warehouse
+ + Warehouse where you are maintaining stock of rejected items + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 73 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 74 | +range |
+ + Data | ++ Range + + | ++ |
| 75 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 76 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 77 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 78 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 79 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 80 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 81 | +other_details |
+ + HTML | ++ Other Details + + | ++ |
| 82 | +instructions |
+ + Small Text | ++ Instructions + + | ++ |
| 83 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 84 | +transporter_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Transporter Details + + | +
+ icon-truck+ |
+
| 85 | +transporter_name |
+ + Data | ++ Transporter Name + + | ++ |
| 86 | +column_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 87 | +lr_no |
+ + Data | ++ Vehicle Number + + | ++ |
| 88 | +lr_date |
+ + Date | ++ Vehicle Date + + | ++ |
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + bk_flush_supp_wh + (self, sl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + check_for_stopped_or_closed_status + (self, pc_obj) +
+No docs
++ + + check_next_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_already_received_qty + (self, po, po_detail) +
+No docs
++ + + get_current_stock + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + get_po_qty_and_warehouse + (self, po_detail) +
+No docs
++ + + get_rate + (self, arg) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + po_required + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_landed_cost_voucher_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_ordered_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + update_stock_ledger + (self, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_accepted_rejected_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_inspection + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_purchase_return + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_rejected_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.get_invoiced_qty_map + (purchase_receipt) +
+returns a map: {prdetail: invoicedqty}
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.make_purchase_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.make_purchase_invoice + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.make_purchase_return
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.make_purchase_return + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.update_purchase_receipt_status
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.update_purchase_receipt_status + (docname, status) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabPurchase Receipt Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 2 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 10 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 11 | +received_and_accepted |
+ + Section Break | ++ Received and Accepted + + | ++ |
| 12 | +received_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Recd Quantity + + | ++ |
| 13 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Accepted Quantity + + | ++ |
| 14 | +rejected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Rejected Quantity + + | ++ |
| 15 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 17 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 18 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 19 | +rate_and_amount |
+ + Section Break | ++ Rate and Amount + + | ++ |
| 20 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 21 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 22 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 24 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 26 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 27 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 29 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 31 | +section_break_29 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 33 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 34 | +column_break_32 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 35 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 36 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 37 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 38 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Accepted Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 39 | +rejected_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Rejected Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 40 | +project_name |
+ + Link | ++ Project Name + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 41 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 42 | +qa_no |
+ + Link | ++ Quality Inspection + + | ++ + + + +Quality Inspection + + + + | +
| 43 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Required By + + | ++ |
| 44 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 45 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Data | ++ Prevdoc Doctype + + | ++ |
| 46 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Order + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order + + + + | +
| 47 | +prevdoc_detail_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Purchase Order Item No + + | ++ |
| 48 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 49 | +bom |
+ + Link | ++ BOM + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 50 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 51 | +rejected_serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Rejected Serial No + + | ++ |
| 52 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 53 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 54 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 55 | +rm_supp_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Raw Materials Supplied Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 56 | +item_tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Item Tax Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 57 | +landed_cost_voucher_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Landed Cost Voucher Amount + + | ++ |
| 58 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 59 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Item Tax Rate
+ + Tax detail table fetched from item master as a string and stored in this field. +Used for Taxes and Charges + |
+ + |
| 60 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabSerial No
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +serial_no |
+ + Data | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ Warehouse
+ + Warehouse can only be changed via Stock Entry / Delivery Note / Purchase Receipt + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 9 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 10 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 11 | +purchase_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Purchase / Manufacture Details + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +purchase_document_type |
+ + Link | ++ Creation Document Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 14 | +purchase_document_no |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Creation Document No + + | +
+ purchase_document_type+ |
+
| 15 | +purchase_date |
+ + Date | ++ Creation Date + + | ++ |
| 16 | +purchase_time |
+ + Time | ++ Creation Time + + | ++ |
| 17 | +purchase_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Incoming Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 20 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 21 | +delivery_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Delivery Details + + | ++ |
| 22 | +delivery_document_type |
+ + Select | ++ Delivery Document Type + + | +
+ +Delivery Note +Sales Invoice +Stock Entry +Purchase Receipt+ |
+
| 23 | +delivery_document_no |
+ + Data | ++ Delivery Document No + + | ++ |
| 24 | +delivery_date |
+ + Date | ++ Delivery Date + + | ++ |
| 25 | +delivery_time |
+ + Time | ++ Delivery Time + + | ++ |
| 26 | +is_cancelled |
+ + Select | ++ Is Cancelled + + | +
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 27 | +column_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 29 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 30 | +warranty_amc_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warranty / AMC Details + + | ++ |
| 31 | +column_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +maintenance_status |
+ + Select | ++ Maintenance Status + + | +
+ +Under Warranty +Out of Warranty +Under AMC +Out of AMC+ |
+
| 33 | +warranty_period |
+ + Int | ++ Warranty Period (Days) + + | ++ |
| 34 | +column_break7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 35 | +warranty_expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ Warranty Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 36 | +amc_expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ AMC Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 37 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 38 | +serial_no_details |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Serial No Details + + | ++ |
| 39 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + after_rename + (self, old, new, merge=False) +
+rename serial_no text fields
++ + + before_rename + (self, old, new, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + get_last_sle + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_stock_ledger_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_stock_ledger_entry + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_maintenance_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_purchase_details + (self, purchase_sle) +
+No docs
++ + + set_sales_details + (self, delivery_sle) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_item + (self) +
+Validate whether serial no is required for this item
++ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
+Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.allow_serial_nos_with_different_item + (sle_serial_no, sle) +
+Allows same serial nos for raw materials and finished goods +in Manufacture / Repack type Stock Entry
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.get_item_details + (item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.get_serial_nos + (serial_no) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.make_serial_no + (serial_no, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.process_serial_no + (sle) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.update_serial_nos + (sle, item_det) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.update_serial_nos_after_submit + (controller, parentfield) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.validate_serial_no + (sle, item_det) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabStock Entry
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ STE-+ |
+
| 4 | +purpose |
+ + Select | ++ Purpose + + | +
+ Material Issue +Material Receipt +Material Transfer +Material Transfer for Manufacture +Manufacture +Repack +Subcontract+ |
+
| 5 | +production_order |
+ + Link | ++ Production Order + + | ++ + + + +Production Order + + + + | +
| 6 | +purchase_order |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Order + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order + + + + | +
| 7 | +delivery_note_no |
+ + Link | ++ Delivery Note No + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 8 | +sales_invoice_no |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Invoice No + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 9 | +purchase_receipt_no |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Receipt No + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 10 | +from_bom |
+ + Check | ++ From BOM + + | ++ |
| 11 | +col2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 14 | +sb1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | ++ BOM No + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 16 | +fg_completed_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ For Quantity
+ + As per Stock UOM + |
+ + |
| 17 | +cb1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +use_multi_level_bom |
+ + Check | +
+ Use Multi-Level BOM
+ + Including items for sub assemblies + |
+ + |
| 19 | +get_items |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items + + | ++ |
| 20 | +section_break_12 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +from_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Source Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 22 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +to_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Target Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 24 | +sb0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 25 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + | +
| 26 | +get_stock_and_rate |
+ + Button | ++ Update Rate and Availability + + | +
+ get_stock_and_rate+ |
+
| 27 | +section_break_19 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +total_incoming_value |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Incoming Value + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 29 | +column_break_22 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +total_outgoing_value |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Outgoing Value + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 31 | +value_difference |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Value Difference (Out - In) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 32 | +difference_account |
+ + Link | ++ Difference Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 33 | +additional_costs_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Costs + + | ++ |
| 34 | +additional_costs |
+ + Table | ++ Additional Costs + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 35 | +total_additional_costs |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Additional Costs + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 36 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Customer or Supplier Details + + | ++ |
| 37 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 38 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 39 | +supplier_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Supplier Address + + | ++ |
| 40 | +column_break_39 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 41 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 42 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 43 | +customer_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ |
| 44 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 45 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 46 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 47 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 48 | +project_name |
+ + Link | ++ Project Name + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 49 | +remarks |
+ + Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 50 | +col5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 51 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 52 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 53 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 54 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Stock Entry + + + + | +
| 55 | +credit_note |
+ + Link | ++ Credit Note + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+ + + add_to_stock_entry_detail + (self, item_dict, bom_no=None) +
+No docs
++ + + calculate_rate_and_amount + (self, force=False) +
+No docs
++ + + check_duplicate_entry_for_production_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_if_operations_completed + (self) +
+Check if Time Logs are completed against before manufacturing to capture operating costs.
++ + + distribute_additional_costs + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_bom_raw_materials + (self, qty) +
+No docs
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account) +
+No docs
++ + + get_issued_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_item_details + (self, args=None, for_update=False) +
+No docs
++ + + get_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_pending_raw_materials + (self) +
+issue (item quantity) that is pending to issue or desire to transfer, +whichever is less
++ + + get_stock_and_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_transfered_raw_materials + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_uom_details + (self, args) +
+Returns dict {"conversion_factor": [value], "transfer_qty": qty * [value]}
Parameters:
+ +args - dict with item_code, uom and qty+ + + get_warehouse_details + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + load_items_from_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_actual_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_basic_rate + (self, force=False) +
+get stock and incoming rate on posting date
++ + + set_basic_rate_for_finished_goods + (self, raw_material_cost) +
+No docs
++ + + set_total_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_total_incoming_outgoing_value + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_transfer_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_production_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_stock_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_valuation_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_batch + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_finished_goods + (self) +
+validation: finished good quantity should be same as manufacturing quantity
++ + + validate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_production_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_purchase_order + (self) +
+Throw exception if more raw material is transferred against Purchase Order than in +the raw materials supplied table
++ + + validate_purpose + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+perform various (sometimes conditional) validations on warehouse
++ + + validate_with_material_request + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_additional_costs + (production_order=None, bom_no=None, fg_qty=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_operating_cost_per_unit + (production_order=None, bom_no=None) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_production_order_details
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_production_order_details + (production_order) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabStock Entry Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 2 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +s_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Source Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +t_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Target Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 6 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 8 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 11 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 14 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 15 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 16 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 17 | +basic_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Rate (as per Stock UOM) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +basic_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +additional_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 21 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 24 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 25 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 26 | +transfer_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 27 | +serial_no_batch |
+ + Section Break | ++ Serial No / Batch + + | ++ |
| 28 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 29 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 31 | +accounting |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting + + | ++ |
| 32 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Difference Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 33 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 35 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 36 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty (at source/target) + + | ++ |
| 37 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | +
+ BOM No
+ + BOM No. for a Finished Good Item + |
+ + + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 38 | +col_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +material_request |
+ + Link | +
+ Material Request
+ + Material Request used to make this Stock Entry + |
+ + + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 40 | +material_request_item |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request Item + + | ++ + + + +Material Request Item + + + + | +
Table Name: tabStock Ledger Entry
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 3 | +batch_no |
+ + Data | ++ Batch No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 5 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 7 | +voucher_type |
+ + Link | ++ Voucher Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 8 | +voucher_no |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Voucher No + + | +
+ voucher_type+ |
+
| 9 | +voucher_detail_no |
+ + Data | ++ Voucher Detail No + + | ++ |
| 10 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Quantity + + | ++ |
| 11 | +incoming_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Incoming Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 12 | +outgoing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Outgoing Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 13 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 14 | +qty_after_transaction |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty After Transaction + + | ++ |
| 15 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +stock_value |
+ + Currency | ++ Stock Value + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +stock_value_difference |
+ + Currency | ++ Stock Value Difference + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +stock_queue |
+ + Text | ++ Stock Queue (FIFO) + + | ++ |
| 19 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 20 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 21 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Data | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ |
| 22 | +is_cancelled |
+ + Select | ++ Is Cancelled + + | +
+ +No +Yes+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + actual_amt_check + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + check_stock_frozen_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + scrub_posting_time + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_batch + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_ledger_entry.stock_ledger_entry.on_doctype_update + () +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabStock Reconciliation
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 3 | +col1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Stock Reconciliation + + + + | +
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +sb9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Stock Reconciliation Item + + + + | +
| 8 | +get_items |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items + + | ++ |
| 9 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Difference Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 11 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 12 | +reconciliation_json |
+ + Long Text | ++ Reconciliation JSON + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break_13 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +difference_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Difference Amount + + | ++ |
| 15 | +fold_15 |
+ + Fold | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +section_break_16 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+ + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + delete_and_repost_sle + (self) +
+Delete Stock Ledger Entries related to this voucher
+and repost future Stock Ledger Entries
++ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + get_items_for + (self, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + insert_entries + (self, row) +
+Insert Stock Ledger Entries
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + remove_items_with_no_change + (self) +
+Remove items if qty or rate is not changed
++ + + update_stock_ledger + (self) +
+find difference between current and expected entries
+and create stock ledger entries based on the difference
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_data + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_expense_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_item + (self, item_code, row_num) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_reconciliation.stock_reconciliation.get_items
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_reconciliation.stock_reconciliation.get_items + (warehouse, posting_date, posting_time) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabStock Reconciliation Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 3 | +section_break_3 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +qty |
+ + Float | +
+ Quantity
+ + Leave blank if no change + |
+ + |
| 5 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | +
+ Valuation Rate
+ + Leave blank if no change + |
+ + |
| 6 | +column_break_6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +current_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ Current Qty
+ + Before reconciliation + |
+ + |
| 8 | +current_valuation_rate |
+ + Read Only | +
+ Current Valuation Rate
+ + Before reconciliation + |
+ + |
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_naming_by |
+ + Select | ++ Item Naming By + + | +
+ Item Code +Naming Series+ |
+
| 2 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Default Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 3 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Default Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +valuation_method |
+ + Select | ++ Default Valuation Method + + | +
+ FIFO +Moving Average+ |
+
| 6 | +tolerance |
+ + Float | +
+ Allowance Percent
+ + Percentage you are allowed to receive or deliver more against the quantity ordered. For example: If you have ordered 100 units. and your Allowance is 10% then you are allowed to receive 110 units. + |
+ + |
| 7 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +auto_insert_price_list_rate_if_missing |
+ + Check | ++ Auto insert Price List rate if missing + + | ++ |
| 9 | +allow_negative_stock |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Negative Stock + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +automatically_set_serial_nos_based_on_fifo |
+ + Check | ++ Automatically Set Serial Nos based on FIFO + + | ++ |
| 12 | +auto_material_request |
+ + Section Break | ++ Auto Material Request + + | ++ |
| 13 | +auto_indent |
+ + Check | ++ Raise Material Request when stock reaches re-order level + + | ++ |
| 14 | +reorder_email_notify |
+ + Check | ++ Notify by Email on creation of automatic Material Request + + | ++ |
| 15 | +freeze_stock_entries |
+ + Section Break | ++ Freeze Stock Entries + + | ++ |
| 16 | +stock_frozen_upto |
+ + Date | ++ Stock Frozen Upto + + | ++ |
| 17 | +stock_frozen_upto_days |
+ + Int | ++ Freeze Stocks Older Than [Days] + + | ++ |
| 18 | +stock_auth_role |
+ + Link | ++ Role Allowed to edit frozen stock + + | ++ + + + +Role + + + + | +
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +current_stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Current Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 3 | +new_stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ New Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 4 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 5 | +update |
+ + Button | ++ Update + + | +
+ update_stock_uom+ |
+
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + update_stock_uom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_uom_integer_type + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_uom_replace_utility.stock_uom_replace_utility.get_stock_uom
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_uom_replace_utility.stock_uom_replace_utility.get_stock_uom + (item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_uom_replace_utility.stock_uom_replace_utility.update_bin + (item_code, new_stock_uom, conversion_factor) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_uom_replace_utility.stock_uom_replace_utility.update_item_master + (item_code, new_stock_uom, conversion_factor) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_uom_replace_utility.stock_uom_replace_utility.update_stock_ledger_entry + (item_code, new_stock_uom, conversion_factor) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabUOM Conversion Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 2 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabWarehouse
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +warehouse_detail |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse Detail + + | ++ |
| 2 | +warehouse_name |
+ + Data | ++ Warehouse Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 4 | +create_account_under |
+ + Link | +
+ Parent Account
+ + Account for the warehouse (Perpetual Inventory) will be created under this Account. + |
+ + + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 5 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 6 | +warehouse_contact_info |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Warehouse Contact Info
+ + For Reference Only. + |
+ + |
| 7 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Email Id + + | ++ |
| 8 | +phone_no |
+ + Data | ++ Phone No + + | +
+ Phone+ |
+
| 9 | +mobile_no |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No + + | +
+ Phone+ |
+
| 10 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +address_line_1 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 1 + + | ++ |
| 12 | +address_line_2 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 2 + + | ++ |
| 13 | +city |
+ + Data | ++ City + + | ++ |
| 14 | +state |
+ + Data | ++ State + + | ++ |
| 15 | +pin |
+ + Int | ++ PIN + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + add_abbr_if_missing + (self, dn) +
+No docs
++ + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + before_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + create_account_head + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_account + (self, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + recalculate_bin_qty + (self, newdn) +
+No docs
++ + + rename_account_for + (self, olddn, newdn, merge) +
+No docs
++ + + update_parent_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_parent_account + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabIssue
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +subject_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Subject + + | +
+ icon-flag+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ ISS-+ |
+
| 3 | +subject |
+ + Data | ++ Subject + + | ++ |
| 4 | +cb00 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Replied +Hold +Closed+ |
+
| 6 | +raised_by |
+ + Data | ++ Raised By (Email) + + | +
+ |
+
| 7 | +fold |
+ + Fold | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +resolution_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Resolution Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +first_responded_on |
+ + Datetime | ++ First Responded On + + | ++ |
| 13 | +additional_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-pushpin+ |
+
| 14 | +lead |
+ + Link | ++ Lead + + | ++ + + + +Lead + + + + | +
| 15 | +contact |
+ + Link | ++ Contact + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 16 | +column_break_16 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 18 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 19 | +section_break_19 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +resolution_details |
+ + Small Text | ++ Resolution Details + + | ++ |
| 21 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +opening_date |
+ + Date | ++ Opening Date + + | ++ |
| 23 | +opening_time |
+ + Time | ++ Opening Time + + | ++ |
| 24 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 25 | +content_type |
+ + Data | ++ Content Type + + | ++ |
| 26 | +attachment |
+ + Attach | ++ Attachment + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_lead_contact + (self, email_id) +
+No docs
++ + + update_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.auto_close_tickets + () +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.get_issue_list + (doctype, txt, filters, limit_start, limit_page_length=20) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.has_website_permission + (doc, ptype, user, verbose=False) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.set_multiple_status
+
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.set_multiple_status + (names, status) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.set_status
+
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.set_status + (name, status) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabMaintenance Schedule
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Cancelled+ |
+
| 5 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Transaction Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 7 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Schedule Item + + + + | +
| 8 | +schedule |
+ + Section Break | ++ Schedule + + | +
+ icon-time+ |
+
| 9 | +generate_schedule |
+ + Button | ++ Generate Schedule + + | ++ |
| 10 | +schedules |
+ + Table | ++ Schedules + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Schedule Detail + + + + | +
| 11 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Info + + | ++ |
| 12 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 13 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 14 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 15 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 16 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 17 | +column_break_17 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 19 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 20 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 21 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 22 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 23 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Schedule + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + check_serial_no_added + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + create_schedule_list + (self, start_date, end_date, no_of_visit, sales_person) +
+No docs
++ + + generate_schedule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_amc_date + (self, serial_nos, amc_expiry_date=None) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_dates_with_periodicity + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_maintenance_detail + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_sales_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_schedule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_schedule_date_for_holiday_list + (self, schedule_date, sales_person) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_serial_no + (self, serial_nos, amc_start_date) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.support.doctype.maintenance_schedule.maintenance_schedule.make_maintenance_visit
+
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.maintenance_schedule.maintenance_schedule.make_maintenance_visit + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabMaintenance Schedule Detail
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +scheduled_date |
+ + Date | ++ Scheduled Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +actual_date |
+ + Date | ++ Actual Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +sales_person |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Person + + | ++ + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 6 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabMaintenance Schedule Item
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Data | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +schedule_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +periodicity |
+ + Select | ++ Periodicity + + | +
+ +Weekly +Monthly +Quarterly +Half Yearly +Yearly +Random+ |
+
| 8 | +no_of_visits |
+ + Int | ++ No of Visits + + | ++ |
| 9 | +sales_person |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Person + + | ++ + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 10 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 11 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 12 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Against Docname + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabMaintenance Visit
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 4 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 6 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 7 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 8 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 9 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +mntc_date |
+ + Date | ++ Maintenance Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +mntc_time |
+ + Time | ++ Maintenance Time + + | ++ |
| 12 | +maintenance_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-wrench+ |
+
| 13 | +completion_status |
+ + Select | ++ Completion Status + + | +
+ +Partially Completed +Fully Completed+ |
+
| 14 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +maintenance_type |
+ + Select | ++ Maintenance Type + + | +
+ +Scheduled +Unscheduled +Breakdown+ |
+
| 16 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-wrench+ |
+
| 17 | +purposes |
+ + Table | ++ Purposes + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Visit Purpose + + + + | +
| 18 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 19 | +customer_feedback |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Feedback + + | ++ |
| 20 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +status |
+ + Data | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Cancelled +Submitted+ |
+
| 22 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Visit + + + + | +
| 23 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 24 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 25 | +contact_info_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Info + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 26 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 27 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 28 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 30 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + check_if_last_visit + (self) +
+check if last maintenance visit against same sales order/ Warranty Claim
++ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + update_customer_issue + (self, flag) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_serial_no + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabMaintenance Visit Purpose
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +work_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +service_person |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Person + + | ++ + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 7 | +work_done |
+ + Small Text | ++ Work Done + + | ++ |
| 8 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Link | ++ Document Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 9 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Against Document No + + | +
+ prevdoc_doctype+ |
+
| 10 | +prevdoc_detail_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Against Document Detail No + + | ++ |
Table Name: tabWarranty Claim
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ CI-+ |
+
| 3 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Open +Closed +Work In Progress +Cancelled+ |
+
| 4 | +complaint_date |
+ + Date | ++ Issue Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +serial_no |
+ + Link | ++ Serial No + + | ++ + + + +Serial No + + + + | +
| 7 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 8 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 9 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 10 | +issue_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-ticket+ |
+
| 11 | +complaint |
+ + Small Text | ++ Issue + + | ++ |
| 12 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 13 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 15 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 16 | +warranty_amc_status |
+ + Select | ++ Warranty / AMC Status + + | +
+ +Under Warranty +Out of Warranty +Under AMC +Out of AMC+ |
+
| 17 | +warranty_expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ Warranty Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 18 | +amc_expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ AMC Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 19 | +resolution_section |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Resolution
+ + To assign this issue, use the "Assign" button in the sidebar. + |
+
+ icon-thumbs-up+ |
+
| 20 | +resolution_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Resolution Date + + | ++ |
| 21 | +resolved_by |
+ + Link | ++ Resolved By + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 22 | +resolution_details |
+ + Text | ++ Resolution Details + + | ++ |
| 23 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Info + + | +
+ icon-bullhorn+ |
+
| 24 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 26 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 27 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 28 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 29 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 30 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 31 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +service_address |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Service Address
+ + If different than customer address + |
+ + |
| 33 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 34 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 35 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 37 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 38 | +col_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +complaint_raised_by |
+ + Data | ++ Raised By + + | ++ |
| 40 | +from_company |
+ + Data | ++ From Company + + | ++ |
| 41 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Warranty Claim + + + + | +
Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.support.doctype.warranty_claim.warranty_claim.make_maintenance_visit
+
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.warranty_claim.warranty_claim.make_maintenance_visit + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabAddress
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +address_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-map-marker+ |
+
| 2 | +address_title |
+ + Data | +
+ Address Title
+ + Name of person or organization that this address belongs to. + |
+ + |
| 3 | +address_type |
+ + Select | ++ Address Type + + | +
+ Billing +Shipping +Office +Personal +Plant +Postal +Shop +Subsidiary +Warehouse +Other+ |
+
| 4 | +address_line1 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 1 + + | ++ |
| 5 | +address_line2 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 2 + + | ++ |
| 6 | +city |
+ + Data | ++ City/Town + + | ++ |
| 7 | +state |
+ + Data | ++ State + + | ++ |
| 8 | +pincode |
+ + Data | ++ Postal Code + + | ++ |
| 9 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 10 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Email Id + + | ++ |
| 12 | +phone |
+ + Data | ++ Phone + + | ++ |
| 13 | +fax |
+ + Data | ++ Fax + + | ++ |
| 14 | +is_primary_address |
+ + Check | ++ Preferred Billing Address + + | ++ |
| 15 | +is_shipping_address |
+ + Check | ++ Preferred Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 16 | +linked_with |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | +
+ icon-pushpin+ |
+
| 17 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 18 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 19 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 20 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 21 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 22 | +column_break_22 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +lead |
+ + Link | ++ Lead + + | ++ + + + +Lead + + + + | +
| 24 | +lead_name |
+ + Data | ++ Lead Name + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + _unset_other + (self, is_address_type) +
+No docs
++ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + get_display + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + link_address + (self) +
+Link address based on owner
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_primary_address + (self) +
+Validate that there can only be one primary address for particular customer, supplier
++ + + validate_shipping_address + (self) +
+Validate that there can only be one shipping address for particular customer, supplier
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.utilities.doctype.address.address.get_address_display
+
+ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.address.address.get_address_display + (address_dict) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.address.address.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.address.address.get_territory_from_address + (address) +
+Tries to match city, state and country of address to existing territory
++ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.address.address.has_website_permission + (doc, ptype, user, verbose=False) +
+Returns true if customer or lead matches with user
+Table Name: tabAddress Template
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 2 | +is_default |
+ + Check | +
+ Is Default
+ + This format is used if country specific format is not found + |
+ + |
| 3 | +template |
+ + Code | +
+ Template
+ + Default Template+Uses Jinja Templating and all the fields of Address (including Custom Fields if any) will be available + |
+ + |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabContact
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +first_name |
+ + Data | ++ First Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +last_name |
+ + Data | ++ Last Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Email Id + + | +
+ |
+
| 5 | +cb00 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Passive +Open +Replied+ |
+
| 7 | +phone |
+ + Data | ++ Phone + + | ++ |
| 8 | +contact_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | +
+ icon-pushpin+ |
+
| 9 | +user |
+ + Link | ++ User Id + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 10 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 11 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 14 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 15 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 16 | +is_primary_contact |
+ + Check | ++ Is Primary Contact + + | ++ |
| 17 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ icon-file-text+ |
+
| 18 | +mobile_no |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 19 | +department |
+ + Data | +
+ Department
+ + Enter department to which this Contact belongs + |
+ + |
| 20 | +designation |
+ + Data | +
+ Designation
+ + Enter designation of this Contact + |
+ + |
| 21 | +unsubscribed |
+ + Check | ++ Unsubscribed + + | ++ |
Inherits from erpnext.controllers.status_updater.StatusUpdater + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + set_user + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + validate_primary_contact + (self) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.utilities.doctype.contact.contact.get_contact_details
+
+ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.contact.contact.get_contact_details + (contact) +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.utilities.doctype.contact.contact.invite_user
+
+ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.contact.contact.invite_user + (contact) +
+No docs
+| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +select_doctype |
+ + Select | +
+ Select DocType
+ + Type of document to rename. + |
+ + |
| 2 | +file_to_rename |
+ + Attach | +
+ File to Rename
+ + Attach .csv file with two columns, one for the old name and one for the new name + |
+ + |
| 3 | +rename_log |
+ + HTML | ++ Rename Log + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.utilities.doctype.rename_tool.rename_tool.get_doctypes
+
+ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.rename_tool.rename_tool.get_doctypes + () +
+No docs
+Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.utilities.doctype.rename_tool.rename_tool.upload
+
+ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.rename_tool.rename_tool.upload + (select_doctype=None, rows=None) +
+No docs
+Table Name: tabSMS Log
| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +sender_name |
+ + Data | ++ Sender Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +sent_on |
+ + Date | ++ Sent On + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +message |
+ + Small Text | ++ Message + + | ++ |
| 5 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 6 | +no_of_requested_sms |
+ + Int | ++ No of Requested SMS + + | ++ |
| 7 | +requested_numbers |
+ + Small Text | ++ Requested Numbers + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +no_of_sent_sms |
+ + Int | ++ No of Sent SMS + + | ++ |
| 10 | +sent_to |
+ + Small Text | ++ Sent To + + | ++ |
Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Find detailed explanation for all ERPNext features
+
+ ERPNext helps you to manage all your business information in one application and use it to manage operations and take decisions based on data.
+ +Among other things, ERPNext will help you to:
+ +And a lot lot lot more.
+ +To install this app, login to your site and click on "Installer". Search for ERPNext and click on "Install"
+ +Go to your bench folder and setup the new app
+ +$ bench get-app erpnext https://github.com/frappe/erpnext
+$ bench new-site testsite
+$ bench --site testsite install-app erpnextLogin to your site to configure the app.
+ + +Frappe Technologies Pvt. Ltd. (info@erpnext.com)
+(c) 2013 Frappe Technologies Pvt Ltd. Mumbai +ERPNext is a trademark of Frappe Technologies
+ +The ERPNext code is licensed under the GNU General Public License (v3) as mentioned below and the Documentation is licensed under Creative Commons (CC-BY-SA-3.0)
+ +Version 3, 29 June 2007
+ +http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+ +TERMS AND CONDITIONS +0. Definitions.
+ +“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
+ +“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.
+ +“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations.
+ +To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.
+ +A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
+ +To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.
+ +To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
+ +An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. +1. Source Code.
+ +The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work.
+ +A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.
+ +The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
+ +The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work.
+ +The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.
+ +The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. +2. Basic Permissions.
+ +All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
+ +You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
+ +Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. +3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
+ +No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.
+ +When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. +4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
+ +You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
+ +You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. +5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
+ +You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+ +a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
+b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.
+c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
+d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
+A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. +6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
+ +You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
+ +a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
+b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
+c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b.
+d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
+e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d.
+A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work.
+ +A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.
+ +“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
+ +If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).
+ +The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.
+ +Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. +7. Additional Terms.
+ +“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions.
+ +When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
+ +Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
+ +a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
+b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or
+c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
+d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
+e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
+f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.
+All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
+ +If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
+ +Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. +8. Termination.
+ +You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11).
+ +However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
+ +Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
+ +Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. +9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
+ +You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. +10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
+ +Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
+ +An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
+ +You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. +11. Patents.
+ +A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”.
+ +A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License.
+ +Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
+ +In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.
+ +If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid.
+ +If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
+ +A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
+ +Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. +12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
+ +If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. +13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
+ +Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. +14. Revised Versions of this License.
+ +The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+ +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
+ +If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
+ +Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. +15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
+ +THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. +16. Limitation of Liability.
+ +IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. +17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
+ +If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
+ +END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e69de29bb2 diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/contact.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/contact.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bedd33248d --- /dev/null +++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/contact.md @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Contacts and Addresses in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can +attach multiple Contacts or Addresses to Customers and Suppliers. + +To create a new Contact go to , + +> CRM > Contact > New + +
+
+Or you can add a Contact or Address directly from the Customer record, click on “New
+Contact” or “New Address”.
+
+
+
+> Tip: When you select a Customer in any transaction, one Contact and Address
+gets pre-selected. This is the “Default Contact or Address”.
+
+To Import multiple Contacts and Addresses from a spreadsheet, use the Data
+Import Tool.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/customer.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/customer.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..82c6ff9746
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/customer.md
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+A customer, who is sometimes known as a client, buyer, or purchaser is the one
+who receives goods, services, products, or ideas, from a seller for a monetary
+consideration. A customer can also receive goods or services from a vendor or
+a supplier for other valuable considerations.
+
+You can either directly create your Customers via
+
+> Selling > Customer
+
+or upload it via the Data Import Tool.
+
+
+
+> Note: Customers are separate from Contacts and Addresses. A Customer can
+have multiple Contacts and Addresses.
+
+### Contacts and Addresses
+
+Contacts and Addresses in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can
+attach multiple Contacts or Addresses to Customers and Suppliers.
+
+Read [Contact]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/crm/contact.html) to know more.
+
+### Integration with Accounts
+
+In ERPNext, there is a separate Account record for each Customer, for each
+Company.
+
+When you create a new Customer, ERPNext will automatically create an Account
+Ledger for the Customer under “Accounts Receivable” in the Company set in the
+Customer record.
+
+> Advanced Tip: If you want to change the Account Group under which the
+Customer Account is created, you can set it in the Company master.
+
+If you want to create an Account in another Company, just change the Company
+value and “Save” the Customer again.
+
+### Customer Settings
+
+You can link a Price List to a Customer (select “Default Price List”), so that
+when you select that Customer, the Price List will be automatically selected.
+
+You can set “Credit Days”, so that it is automatically set due date in the Sales
+Invoices made against this Customer. Credit Days can be defined as fixed days or last day of the next month based on invoice date.
+
+You can set how much credit you want to allow for a Customer by adding the
+“Credit Limit”. You can also set a global “Credit Limit” in the Company
+master. Classifying Customers
+
+ERPNext allows you to group your Customers using [Customer Group]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/crm/setup/customer-group.html)
+and also divide them into [Territories]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/crm/setup/territory.html)
+Grouping will help you get better analysis of your data and
+identify which Customers are profitable and which are not. Territories will
+help you set sales targets for the respective territories.
+You can also mention [Sales Person]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/crm/setup/sales-person.html) against a customer.
+
+### Sales Partner
+
+A Sales Partner is a third party distributor / dealer / commission agent /
+affiliate / reseller who sells the companies products, for a commission. This
+is useful if you make the end sale to the Customer, involving your Sales
+Partner.
+
+If you sell to your Sales Partner who in-turn sells it to the Customer, then
+you must make a Customer instead.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..20639a953c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+#CRM
+
+ERPNext helps you track business **Opportunities** from **Leads** and
+**Customers**, send them **Quotations** and make confirmed **Sales Orders**.
+
+The CRM Module helps maintain Leads, Oppurtunities and Customers.
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..204123ae69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+lead
+customer
+opportunity
+contact
+newsletter
+setup
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/lead.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/lead.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f754c549a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/lead.md
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+To get the customer through the door, you may be doing all or any of the
+following:
+
+ * Listing your product on directories.
+ * Maintaining an updated and searchable website.
+ * Meeting people at trade events.
+ * Advertising your product or services.
+
+When you send out the word that you are around and have something valuable to
+offer, people will come in to check out your product. These are your Leads.
+
+They are called Leads because they may lead you to a sale. Sales people
+usually work on leads by calling them, building a relationship and sending
+information about their products or services. It is important to track all
+this conversation to enable another person who may have to follow-up on that
+contact. The new person is then able to know the history of that particular
+Lead.
+
+To create a Lead, go to:
+
+> Selling > Lead > New Lead
+
+
+
+ERPNext gives you a lot of options you may want to store about your Leads. For
+example what is the source, how likely are they to give you business etc. If
+you have a healthy number of leads, this information will help you prioritize
+who you want to work with.
+
+> **Tip:** ERPNext makes it easy to follow-up on leads by updating the “Next
+Contact” details. This will add a new event in the Calendar for the User who
+has to contact the lead next.
+
+### Difference between Lead, Contact and Customer
+
+The difference is that a Lead is a potential Customer, someone who can give
+you business. A Customer is an organization or individual who has given you
+business before (and has an Account in your system). A Contact is a person who
+belongs to the Customer.
+
+A Lead can be converted to a Customer by clicking on the “Create Customer”
+button. Once the Customer is created, the Lead becomes “Converted” and any
+further Opportunities from the same source can be created against the
+Customer.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/newsletter.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/newsletter.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..25cd2b0ae2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/newsletter.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+A newsletter is a short written report that tells about the recent activities
+of an organization. It is generally sent to members of the organization,
+potential clients customers or potential leads.
+
+In ERPNext, you can use this UI to send any type of communication to a large
+number of audience. The process of sending bulk email to a target audience is
+very simple and easy.
+
+Select the list that you want to send the email to. Fill in your content in
+the message box, and send your newsletter.If you wish to test your email, to
+see how it looks to the recepient, you can use the test function. Save the
+document before testing. A test email will be sent to your email id. You can
+send the email to all the intended receipients by clicking on the send button.
+
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/opportunity.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/opportunity.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d6850c8d5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/opportunity.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+When you know a Lead is looking for some products or services to buy, you can
+track that as an Opportunity.
+
+You can create an Opportunity from:
+
+> Selling > Opportunity > New Opportunity
+
+or open a “Open” Lead and click on “Create Opportunity” button.
+
+#### Figure 1: Create Opportunity
+
+
+
+You can also open a “Open” Lead and click on “Create Opportunity” button.
+
+#### Figure 2: Create Opportunity from an open Lead
+
+
+
+An Opportunity can also come from an existing Customer. You can create
+multiple Opportunities against the same Lead. In Opportunity, apart from the
+Communication, you can also add the Items for which the Lead or Contact is
+looking for.
+
+> Best Practice: Leads and Opportunities are often referred as your “Sales
+Pipeline” this is what you need to track if you want to be able to predict how
+much business you are going to get in the future. Its always a good idea to be
+able to track what is coming in order to adjust your resources.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/campaign.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/campaign.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..36b55c3e12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/campaign.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+A Campaign is a full-scale implementation of a sales strategy to promote a
+product or a service. This is done in a market segment of a particular
+geographical area, to achieve specified objectives.
+
+
+
+You can track [Lead]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/crm/lead.html), [Opportunity]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/crm/opportunity.html), [Quotation]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/selling/quotation.html) against a campaign.
+
+###Track Leads against Campaign
+
+* To track a 'Lead' against a campaign select 'View Leads'.
+
+
+
+* You shall get a filtered list of all leads made against that campaign.
+* You can also create new leads by clicking 'New'
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/customer-group.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6e6e1b95f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+Customer groups allow you to organize your customers. You can also have discounts based on customer groups.
+You can also get trend analysis for each
+group. Typically Customers are grouped by market segment (that is usually
+based on your domain).
+
+
+
+> Tip: If you think all this is too much effort, you can leave it at “Default
+Customer Group”. But all this effort, will pay off when you start getting
+reports. An example of a sample report is given below:
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..259b5ebc42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3d960aa482
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+campaign
+customer-group
+sales-person
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/sales-person.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4c6c0b6cbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+Sales Persons behave exactly like Territories. You can create an organization
+chart of Sales Persons where each Sales Person’s target can be set
+individually. Again as in Territory, the target has to be set against Item
+Group.
+
+
+
+####Sales Person in Transactions
+
+You can use this Sales Person in Customer and sales transactions like Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice.
+Click [here](https://erpnext.com/kb/selling/managing-sales-persons-in-sales-transactions) to learn more
+about how Sales Persons are used in the transactions of Sales Cycle.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/accounting-entries.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/accounting-entries.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e67d999570
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/accounting-entries.md
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+The concept of accounting is explained with an example given below: We will
+take a "Tea Stall" as a company and see how to book accounting entries for the
+business.
+
+ * Mama (The Tea-stall owner) invests Rs 25000 to start the business.
+
+
+
+__Analysis:__ Mama invested 25000 in company, hoping to get some profit. In other
+words, company is liable to pay 25000 to Mama in the future. So, account
+"Mama" is a liability account and it is credited. Company's cash balance will
+be increased due to the investment, "Cash" is an asset to the company and it
+will debited.
+
+ * The company needs equipments (Stove, teapot, cups etc) and raw materials (tea, sugar, milk etc) immediately. He decides to buy from the nearest general store "Super Bazaar" who is a friend so that he gets some credit. Equipments cost him 2800 and raw materials worth of 2200. He pays 2000 out of total cost 5000.
+
+
+
+__Analysis:__ Equipments are "Fixed Assets" (because they have a long life) of the
+company and raw materials "Current Assets" (since they are used for day-to-day
+business), of the company. So, "Equipments" and "Stock in Hand" accounts have
+been debited to increase the value. He pays 2000, so "Cash" account will be
+reduced by that amount, hence credited and he is liable to pay 3000 to "Super
+Bazaar" later, so Super Bazaar will be credited by 3000.
+
+ * Mama (who takes care of all entries) decides to book sales at the end of the every day, so that he can analyze daily sales. At the end of the very first day, the tea stall sells 325 cups of tea, which gives net sales of Rs. 1575. The owner happily books his first day sales.
+
+
+
+__Analysis:__ Income has been booked in "Sales of Tea" account which has been
+credited to increase the value and the same amount will be debited to "Cash"
+account. Lets say, to make 325 cups of tea, it costs Rs. 800, so "Stock in
+Hand" will be reduced (Cr) by 800 and expense will be booked in "Cost of goods
+sold" account by same amount.
+
+At the end of the month, the company paid the rent amount of stall (5000) and
+salary of one employee (8000), who joined from the very first day.
+
+
+
+### Booking Profit
+
+As month progress, company purchased more raw materials for the business.
+After a month he books profit to balance the "Balance Sheet" and "Profit and
+Loss Statements" statements. Profit belongs to Mama and not the company hence
+its a liability for the company (it has to pay it to Mama). When the Balance
+Sheet is not balanced i.e. Debit is not equal to Credit, the profit has not
+yet been booked. To book profit, the following entry has to be made:
+
+
+
+Explanation: Company's net sales and expenses are 40000 and 20000
+respectively. So, company made a profit of 20000. To make the profit booking
+entry, "Profit or Loss" account has been debited and "Capital Account" has
+been credited. Company's net cash balance is 44000 and there is some raw
+materials available worth 1000 rupees.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/accounting-reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/accounting-reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5026151860
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/accounting-reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+Some of the major accounting reports are:
+
+### General Ledger
+
+General Ledger is based on the table GL Entry and can be filtered by Account
+and between a period. This will help you to get a full update for all entries
+done in that period for that Account.
+
+
+
+### Trial Balance
+
+Trial Balance is the list of Account balances for all your Accounts
+(“Ledger” and “Group”) on a particular date. For each Account it will give you
+the:
+
+ * Opening
+ * Debits
+ * Credits
+ * Closing
+
+
+
+The sum of all closing balances in a Trial Balance must be zero.
+
+### Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable (AP / AR)
+
+These reports help you to track the outstanding invoices sent to Customer and
+Suppliers. In this report, you will get your outstanding amounts period wise.
+i.e. between 0-30 days, 30-60 days and so on.
+
+
+
+### Sales and Purchase Register
+
+In this report, each tax Account is transposed in columns. For each Invoice and
+invoice Item, you will get the amount of individual tax that has been paid,
+based on the Taxes and Charges table.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fa818fbd05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+Payment done by the customer before accepting delivery of the product is an
+Advance Payment. For Orders of high value, the business houses expect to
+receive advance.
+
+
+__For Example:__ Consider a customer- Jane D'souza placing an order for a double
+bed costing $10000 She is asked to give some advance before the furniture
+house begins work on her order. She gives them $5000 in cash.
+
+
+Go to Accounts and open a new Journal Entry to make the advance entry.
+
+> Accounts > Documents > Journal Entry > New Journal Entry
+
+Mention the voucher type as cash voucher. This differs for different
+customers. If somebody pays by cheque the voucher type will be Bank Voucher.
+Then select the customer account and make the respective debit and credit
+entries.
+
+Since the customer has given $5000 as cash advance,it will be recorded as a
+credit entry against the customer. To balance it with the debit entry [Double
+accounting Entry] enter $5000 as debit against the company's cash account. In
+the row "Is Advance" click 'Yes'.
+
+#### Figure 1 : Journal Entry -Advance Entry
+
+
+
+### Double Entry Accounting
+
+Double entry bookkeeping is a system of accounting in which every transaction
+has a corresponding positive and negative entry : debits and credits. Every
+transaction involves a [debit entry
+](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/debit)in one account
+and a [credit
+entry](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/credit) in another
+account. This means that every transaction must be recorded in two accounts;
+one account will be debited because it receives value and the other account
+will be credited because it has given value.
+
+
+#### Figure 2: Transaction and Difference Entry
+
+
+
+Save and submit the JV. If this document is not saved it will not be pulled in
+other accounting documents.
+
+When you make a new Sales Invoice for the same customer, mention the advance
+in the Sales Invoice Form.
+
+To link the Sales Invoice to the Journal Entry which mentions the advance
+payment entry, click on ‘Get Advances Received’. Allocate the amount of
+advance in the advances table. The accounting will be adjusted accordingly.
+
+#### Figure 3: Receive Advance
+
+
+
+Save and submit the Sales Invoice.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/budgeting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/budgeting.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8733aa43e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/budgeting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+ERPNext will help you set and manage budgets on your Cost Centers. This is
+useful when, for example, you are doing online sales. You have a budget for
+search ads, and you want ERPNext to stop or warn you from over spending, based
+on that budget.
+
+Budgets are also great for planning purposes. When you are making plans for
+the next financial year, you would typically target a revenue based on which
+you would set your expenses. Setting a budget will ensure that your expenses
+do not get out of hand, at any point, as per your plans.
+
+You can define it in the Cost Center. If you have seasonal sales you can also
+define a budget distribution that the budget will follow.
+
+In order to allocate budget, go to Accounts > Setup > Chart of Cost Centers and click on Chart of Cost Center.
+Select a Cost Center and click on Open.
+
+#### Step 1: Click on Edit.
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Enter Monthly Distribution.
+
+
+
+
+If you leave the** **distribution ID blank, ERPNext will calculate on a yearly
+basis or in equal proportion for every month.
+
+#### Step 3:Add New Row and select budget account.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+### To Create New Distribution ID
+
+ERPNext allows you to take a few budget actions. It signifies whether to stop
+, warn or Ignore if you exceed budgets.
+
+
+
+
+
+These can be defined from the Company record.
+
+
+
+
+
+Even if you choose to “ignore” budget overruns, you will get a wealth of
+information from the “Budget vs Actual” variance report. This report shows
+month wise actual expenses as compared to the budgeted expenses.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..148ef02740
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+The Chart of Accounts forms the blueprint of your organization. The overall
+structure of your Chart of Accounts is based on a system of double entry
+accounting that has become a standard all over the world to quantify how a
+company is doing financially.
+
+The Chart of Accounts helps you to answer:
+
+ * What is your organisation worth?
+ * How much debt have you taken?
+ * How much profit are you making (and hence paying tax)?
+ * How much are you selling?
+ * What is your expense break-up
+
+You may note that as a business manager, it is very valuable to see how well
+your business is doing.
+
+> Tip: If you can’t read a Balance Sheet (It took me a long time to
+figure this out) it's a good opportunity to start learning about this. It will
+be worth the effort. You can also take the help of your accountant to setup
+your Chart of Accounts.
+
+Financial statement of your company is easily viewable in ERPNext. An Example
+of a financial statement is given below:
+
+
+
+To edit your Chart of Accounts in ERPNext go to:
+
+> Accounts > Setup > Chart of Accounts
+
+Chart of Accounts is a tree view of the names of the Accounts (Ledgers and
+Groups) that a Company requires to manage its books of accounts. ERPNext sets
+up a simple chart of accounts for each Company you create, but you have to
+modify it according to your needs and legal requirements. For each company,
+Chart of Accounts signifies the way to classify the accounting entries, mostly
+based on statutory (tax, compliance to government regulations) requirements.
+
+Let us understand the main groups of the Chart of Accounts.
+
+
+
+### Balance Sheet Accounts
+
+The Balance Sheet has Application of Funds (/assets) and Sources of Funds
+(Liabilities) that signify the net-worth of your company at any given time.
+When you begin or end a financial period, all the Assets are equal to the
+Liabilities.
+
+> Accounting: If you are new to accounting, you might be wondering, how can
+Assets be equal to Liabilities? That would mean the company has nothing of its
+own. Thats right. All the “investment” made in the company to buy assets (like
+land, furniture, machines) is made by the owners and is a liability to the
+company. If the company would want to shut down, it would need to sell all the
+assets and pay back all the liabilities (including profits) to the owners,
+leaving itself with nothing.
+
+All the accounts under this represent an asset owned by the company like "Bank
+Account", "Land and Property", "Furniture" or a liability (funds that the
+company owes to others) like "Owners funds", "Debt" etc.
+
+Two special accounts to note here are Accounts Receivable (money you have to
+collect from your customers) and Accounts Payable (money you have to pay to
+your suppliers) under Assets and Liabilities respectively.
+
+### Profit and Loss Accounts
+
+Profit and Loss is the group of Income and Expense accounts that represent
+your accounting transactions over a period.
+
+Unlike Balance sheet accounts, Profit and Loss accounts (or PL accounts) do
+not represent net worth (/assets), but rather represent the amount of money
+spent and collected in servicing customers during the period. Hence at the
+beginning and end of your Fiscal Year, they become zero.
+
+In ERPNext it is easy to create a Profit and Loss analysis chart. An example
+of a Profit and Loss analysis chart is given below:
+
+
+
+(On the first day of the year you have not made any profit or loss, but you
+still have assets, hence balance sheet accounts never become zero at the
+beginning or end of a period)
+
+### Groups and Ledgers
+
+There are two main kinds of Accounts in ERPNext - Group and Ledger. Groups can
+have sub-groups and ledgers within them, whereas ledgers are the leaf nodes of
+your chart and cannot be further classified.
+
+Accounting Transactions can only be made against Ledger Accounts (not Groups)
+
+> Info: The term "Ledger" means a page in an accounting book where entries are
+made. There is usually one ledger for each account (like a Customer or a
+Supplier).
+
+> Note: An Account “Ledger” is also sometimes called as Account “Head”.
+
+
+
+### Other Account Types
+
+In ERPNext, you can also specify more information when you create a new
+Account, this is there to help you select that particular account in a
+scenario like Bank Account or a Tax Account and has no effect on the Chart
+itself.
+
+### Creating / Editing Accounts
+
+To create new Accounts, explore your Chart of Accounts and click on an Account
+group under which you want to create the new Account. On the right side, you
+will see an option to “Open” or “Add Child” a new Account.
+
+
+
+Option to create will only appear if you click on a Group (folder) type
+Account.
+
+ERPNext creates a standard structure for you when the Company is created but
+it is up to you to modify or add or remove accounts.
+
+Typically, you might want to create Accounts for
+
+ * Types of Expenses (travel, salaries, telephone etc) under Expenses.
+ * Taxes (VAT, Sales Tax etc based on your country) under Current Liabilities.
+ * Types of Sales (for example, Product Sales, Service Sales etc.) under Income.
+ * Types of Assets (building, machinery, furniture etc.) under Fixed Assets.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/credit-limit.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/credit-limit.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..df7f7f6e25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/credit-limit.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+
+A credit limit is the maximum amount of credit that a financial institution or
+other lender will extend to a debtor for a particular line of credit. From an
+organisation's perspective, it is the maximum amount of credit which a
+customer gets on goods purchased.
+
+To set credit limit go to Customer - Master
+
+> Selling > Document > Customer
+
+
+#### Figure 1: Credit Limit
+
+
+
+Go to the 'More Info section' and enter the amount in the field Credit Limit.
+
+In case a need arises to allow more credit to the customer as a good-will, the
+Credit Controller has access to submit order even if credit limit is crossed.
+
+To allow any other role to submit transactions by customers whose credit limit
+has expired, go to accounting settings and make changes.
+
+In the field Credit Controller, select the role who would be authorized to
+accept orders or raise credit limits of customers.
+
+#### Figure 2: Credit Controller
+
+
+
+Save the changes.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ab931261fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+At the end of sales and purchase cycle comes billing and payments. You may have
+an accountant in your team, or you may be doing accounting yourself, or you may
+have outsourced your accounting. In all the cases financial accounting forms the core of any business management system like an ERP.
+
+In ERPNext, your accounting operations consists of 3 main transactions:
+
+ * Sales Invoice: The bills that you raise to your Customers for the products or services you provide.
+ * Purchase Invoice: Bills that your Suppliers give you for their products or services.
+ * Journal Entrys: For accounting entries, like payments, credit and other types.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5a4a391d0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+journal-entry
+sales-invoice
+purchase-invoice
+chart-of-accounts
+making-payments
+advance-payment-entry
+credit-limit
+opening-entry
+accounting-reports
+accounting-entries
+budgeting
+opening-accounts
+item-wise-tax
+point-of-sale-pos-invoice
+multi-currency-accounting
+tools
+setup
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/item-wise-tax.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/item-wise-tax.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fbc5743620
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/item-wise-tax.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+
+Taxes selected in the Tax and Other Charges in transactions are applied on all the items. If you need different taxes applied on items selected in the same transaction, you should setup you item and tax master as explained in the steps below.
+
+####Step 1: Mention Tax Applicable in the Item master
+
+Item master has tax table where you can list taxes which will be applied on it.
+
+
+
+Tax rate mentioned in the item master gets preference over tax rate entered in the transactions.
+
+For example, if you provide tax rate for VAT as 10% for item ABC, where for same VAT ledger 12% rate is entered in the Sales Order/Invoice, for item ABC, tax rate applied would be 10%, as mentioned in the item master.
+
+####Step 2: Setup Taxes and Other Charges
+
+In Taxes and Other Charges master, you should select all the applicable taxes which could be applicable on item.
+
+For example, if few items has VAT 5 applied on them, other has Service Tax applied, and some other has Excise Duty applicable, then you tax master should have all these taxes selected.
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Set Tax Rate as Zero in Taxes and Charges Template
+
+In the Taxes and Other Charges master, tax rate will be updated as ZERO. It means, tax rate applicable on items will be pulled from the respective Item master. While for other items, 0% tax will be applied, means no other taxes will be applied on that item.
+
+Based on the above setting, you will have taxes applied on items as mentioned in the respective item master. Check following for an instance.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/journal-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/journal-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9da656d33c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/journal-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+All types of accounting entries other than **Sales Invoice** and **Purchase
+Invoice** are made using the **Journal Entry**. A **Journal Entry**
+is a standard accounting transaction that affects
+multiple Accounts and the sum of debits is equal to the sum of credits.
+
+To create a Journal Entry go to:
+
+> Accounts > Documents > Journal Entry > New
+
+
+
+In a Journal Entry, you must select.
+
+ * Type of Voucher from the drop down.
+ * Add rows for the individual accounting entries. In each row, you must specify:
+ * The Account that will be affected
+ * The amount to Debit or Credit
+ * The Cost Center (if it is an Income or Expense)
+ * Against Voucher: Link it to a voucher or invoice if it affects the “outstanding” amount of that invoice.
+ * Is Advance: Select “Yes” if you want to make it selectable in an Invoice. Other information in case it is a Bank Payment or a bill.
+
+#### Difference
+
+The “Difference” field is the difference between the Debit and Credit amounts.
+This should be zero if the Journal Entry is to be “Submitted”. If this
+number is not zero, you can click on “Make Difference Entry” to add a new row
+with the amount required to make the total as zero.
+
+* * *
+
+## Common Entries
+
+A look at some of the common accounting entries that can be done via Journal
+Voucher.
+
+#### Expenses (non accruing)
+
+Many times it may not be necessary to accrue an expense, but it can be
+directly booked against an expense Account on payment. For example a travel
+allowance or a telephone bill. You can directly debit Telephone Expense
+(instead of your telephone company) and credit your Bank on payment.
+
+ * Debit: Expense Account (like Telephone expense)
+ * Credit: Bank or Cash Account
+
+#### Bad Debts or Write Offs
+
+If you are writing off an Invoice as a bad debt, you can create a Journal
+Voucher similar to a Payment, except instead of debiting your Bank, you can
+debit an Expense Account called Bad Debts.
+
+ * Debit: Bad Debts Written Off
+ * Credit: Customer
+
+> Note: There may be regulations in your country before you can write off bad
+debts.
+
+#### Depreciation
+
+Depreciation is when you write off certain value of your assets as an expense.
+For example if you have a computer that you will use for say 5 years, you can
+distribute its expense over the period and pass a Journal Entry at the end
+of each year reducing its value by a certain percentage.
+
+ * Debit: Depreciation (Expense)
+ * Credit: Asset (the Account under which you had booked the asset to be depreciated)
+
+> Note: There may be regulations in your country that define by how much
+amount you can depreciate a class of Assets.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/making-payments.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/making-payments.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3b6209c712
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/making-payments.md
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+Payments made against Sales Invoices or Purchase Invoices can be made by
+clicking on “Make Payment Entry” button on “Submitted” invoices.
+
+ 1. Update the “Bank Account” (you can also set the default account in the Company master).
+ 2. Update posting date.
+ 3. Enter the cheque number, cheque date.
+ 4. Save and Submit.
+
+
+
+Payments can also be made independent of invoices by creating a new Journal
+Voucher and selecting the type of payment.
+
+#### Incoming Payment
+
+For payments from Customers,
+
+ * Debit: Bank or Cash Account
+ * Credit: Customer
+
+> Note: Remember to add “Against Sales Invoice” or “Is Advance” as applicable.
+
+#### Outgoing Payment
+
+For payments to Suppliers,
+
+ * Debit: Supplier
+ * Credit: Bank or Cash Account
+
+### Example Payment Journal Entry
+
+
+
+* * *
+
+### Reconciling Cheque Payments
+
+If you are receiving payments or making payments via cheques, the bank
+statements will not accurately match the dates of your entry, this is because
+the bank usually takes time to “clear” these payments. Also you may have
+mailed a cheque to your Supplier and it may be a few days before it is
+received and deposited by the Supplier. In ERPNext you can synchronize your
+bank statements and your Journal Entrys using the “Bank Reconciliation”
+tool.
+
+To use this, go to:
+
+> Accounts > Tools > Bank Reconciliation
+
+Select your “Bank” Account and enter the dates of your statement. Here you
+will get all the “Bank Voucher” type entries. In each of the entry on the
+right most column, update the “Clearance Date” and click on “Update”.
+
+By doing this you will be able to sync your bank statements and entries into
+the system.
+
+* * *
+
+## Managing Outstanding Payments
+
+In most cases, apart from retail sales, billing and payments are separate
+activities. There are several combinations in which these payments are done.
+These cases apply to both sales and purchases.
+
+ * They can be upfront (100% in advance).
+ * Post shipment. Either on delivery or within a few days of delivery.
+ * Part in advance and part on or post delivery.
+ * Payments can be made together for a bunch of invoices.
+ * Advances can be given together for a bunch of invoices (and can be split across invoices).
+
+ERPNext allows you to manage all these scenarios. All accounting entries (GL
+Entry) can be made against a Sales Invoice, Purchase Invoice or Journal
+Vouchers (in special cases, an invoice can be made via a Sales Invoice too).
+
+The total outstanding amount against an invoice is the sum of all the
+accounting entries that are made “against” (or are linked to) that invoice.
+This way you can combine or split payments in Journal Entrys to manage the
+scenarios.
+
+### Matching Payments to Invoices
+
+In complex scenarios, especially in the capital goods industry, sometimes
+there is no direct link between payments and invoices. You send invoices to
+your Customers and your Customer sends you block payments or payments based on
+some schedule that is not linked to your invoices.
+
+In such cases, you can use the Payment to Invoice Matching Tool.
+
+> Accounts > Tools > Payment Reconciliation
+
+In this tool, you can select an account (your Customer’s account) and click on
+“Pull Payment Entries” and it will select all un-linked Journal Entrys and
+Sales Invoices from that Customer.
+
+To cancel off some payments and invoices, select the Invoices and Journal
+Vouchers and click on “Reconcile”.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0b01110e26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+In ERPNext, you can make accounting entries in multiple currency. For example, if you have a bank account in foreign currency, you can make transactions in that currency and system will show bank balance in that specific currency only.
+
+## Setup
+
+To get started with multi-currency accounting, you need to assign accounting currency in Account record. You can define Currency from Chart of Accounts while creating Account.
+
+
+
+You can also assign / modify the currency by opening specific Account record for existing Accounts.
+
+
+
+For Customer / Supplier (Party), you can also define it's accounting currency in the Party record. If the Party's accounting currency is different from Company Currency, you have to mention Default Receivable / Payable Account in that currency.
+
+
+
+
+Once you defined Accounting Currency in Party / Account record, you are ready to make transactions against them. If Party's accounting currency is different from Company Currency, system will restrict to make transaction for that party with that currency only. If accounting currency is same as Company Currency, you can make transactions for that Party in any currency. But accounting entries (GL Entries) will always be in Party's Accounting Currency. In any case, currency of Receivable Account will always be same as accounting currency of the Party.
+
+You can change accounting currency in Party / Account record, until making any transactions against them. After making accounting entries, system will not allow to change the accounting currency for both Party / Account record.
+
+In case of multi-company setup, accounting currency of Party must be same for all the companies.
+
+## Transactions
+
+### Sales Invoice
+
+In Sales Invoice, transaction currency must be same as accounting currency of Customer if Customer's accounting currency is other than Company Currency. Otherwise, you can select any currency in Invoice. On selection of Customer, system will fetch Receivable account from Customer / Company. The currency of receivable account must be same as Customer's accounting currency.
+
+Now, in POS, Paid Amount will be enetered in transaction currency, instead of earlier Company Currency. Write Off Amount will also be entered in transaction currency.
+
+Outstanding Amount and Advance Amount will always be calculated and shown in Customer's Account Currency.
+
+
+
+### Purchase Invoice
+
+Similarly, in Purchase Invoice, accounting entries will be made based on Supplier's accounting currency. Outstanding Amount and Advance Amount will also be shown in the supplier's accounting currency. Write Off Amount will now be entered in transaction currency.
+
+### Journal Entry
+
+In Journal Entry, you can make transactions in different currencies. There is a checkbox "Multi Currency", to enable multi-currency entries. If "Multi Currency" option selected, you will be able to select accounts with different currencies.
+
+
+
+
+In Accounts table, on selection of foreign currency account, system will show Currency section and fetch Account Currency and Exchange Rate automatically. You can change / modify the Exchange Rate later manually.
+
+In a single Journal Entry, you can select accounts with only one alternate currency, apart from accounts in Company Currency. Debit / Credit amount should be entered in Account Currency, system will calculate and show the Debit / Credit amount in Company Currency automatically.
+
+
+
+#### Example 1: Payment Entry Against Customer With Alternate Currency
+
+Suppose, default currency of the company is INR and customer's accounting currency is USD. Customer made full payment against an outstanding invoice of USD 100. Exchange Rate (USD -> INR) in Sales Invoice was 60.
+
+Exchange Rate in the payment entry should always be same as invoice (60), even if exchange rate on the payment date is 62. The bank account will be credited by the amount considering exchange rate as 62. Hence, Exchnage Gain / Loss will be booked based on exchange rate difference.
+
+
+
+#### Example 2: Inter-bank Transfer (USD -> INR)
+
+Suppose, default currency of the company is INR. You have an Paypal account for which Currency is USD. You receive payments in the paypal account and lets say, paypal transfers amount once in a week to your other bank account which is managed in INR.
+
+Paypal account gets debited on different date with different exchange rate, but on transfer date the exchange rate can be different. Hence, there is generally Exchange Loss / Gain on the transfer entry.
+In the bank transfer entry, system sets exchange rate based on the average incoming exchange rate Paypal account. You need to calculate and enter Exchange Loss / Gain based on the average exchange rate and the exchange rate on the transfer date.
+
+Lets say, Paypal account debited by following amounts over the week, which has not been transferred to your other bank account.
+
+| Date | +Account | +Debit (USD) | +Exchange Rate | +
| 2015-09-02 | +Paypal | +100 | +60 | +
| 2015-09-02 | +Paypal | +100 | +61 | +
| 2015-09-02 | +Paypal | +100 | +64 | +
+
+
+## Reports
+
+### General Ledger
+
+In General Ledger, system shows debit / credit amount in both currency if filtered by an Account and Account Currency is different from Company Currency.
+
+
+
+### Accounts Receivable / Payable
+
+In Accounts Receivable / Payable report, system shows all the amounts in Party / Account Currency.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/opening-accounts.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/opening-accounts.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1a39ed6ac4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/opening-accounts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+Now that you have completed most of the setup, its time to start moving in!
+
+There are two important sets of data you need to enter before you start your
+operations.
+
+ * Opening Account balances.
+ * Opening Stock balances.
+
+To setup your accounts and stock correctly you will need accurate data to work
+with. Make sure you have the data setup for this.
+
+### Opening Accounts
+
+We usually recommend that you start using accounting in a new financial year,
+but you could start midway too. To setup your accounts, you will need the
+following for the “day” you start using accounting in ERPNext:
+
+Opening capital accounts - like your shareholder’s (or owner’) capital, loans,
+bank balances on that day. List of outstanding sales and purchase invoices
+(Payables and Receivables).
+
+Based on Voucher Type
+
+You can select accounts based on the voucher type. In such a scenario, your balance sheet should be balanced.
+
+
+
+ Also, note that if there are more than 300 ledgers, the system will crash. Thus to avoid such a situation, you can open accounts by using temporary accounts.
+
+#### Temporary Accounts
+
+A nice way to simplify opening is to use a temporary account
+just for opening. These accounts will become zero once all your old
+invoices and opening balances of bank, debt stock etc are entered.
+In the standard chart of accounts, a **Temperory Opening** account is created under
+assets
+
+#### The Opening Entry
+
+In ERPNext Opening Accounts are setup by submitting a special Journal Entries
+(Journal Entry).
+
+Note: Make sure to set “Is Opening” as “Yes” in the More Info section.
+
+> Setup > Opening Accounts and Stock > Opening Accounting Entries.
+
+Complete Journal Entries on the Debit and Credit side.
+
+
+
+ To update opening balance is to make Journal Entry for an individual/group of accounts.
+
+For example, if you want to update balance in three bank accounts, then make Journal Entrys in this manner.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Temporary Asset and Liability account is used for balancing purpose. When you update opening balance in Liability Account, you can use Temporary Asset Account for balancing.
+
+This way, you can update opening balance in Asset and Liability accounts.
+
+You can make two Opening Journal Entrys:
+
+ * For all assets (excluding Accounts Receivables): This entry will contain all your assets except the amounts you are expecting from your Customers against outstanding Sales Invoices. You will have to update your receivables by making an individual entry for each Invoice (this is because, the system will help you track the invoices which are yet to be paid). You can credit the sum of all these debits against the **Temperory Opening** account.
+ * For all liabilities: Similarly you need to pass a Journal Entry for your Opening Liabilities (except for the bills you have to pay) against **Temperory Opening** account.
+ * In this method you can update opening balance of specific balancesheet accounts and not for all.
+ * Opening entry is only for balance sheet accounts and not for expense or Income accounts.
+
+After completing the accounting entries, the trial balance report will look
+like the one given below:
+
+
+
+
+#### Outstanding Invoices
+
+After your Opening Journal Entrys are made, you will need to enter each
+Sales Invoice and Purchase Invoice that is yet to be paid.
+
+Since you have already booked the income or expense on these invoices in the
+previous period, select the temp opening account **Temporary Opening** in the “Income” and
+“Expense” accounts.
+
+> Note: Make sure to set each invoice as “Is Opening”!
+
+If you don’t care what items are in that invoice, just make a dummy item entry
+in the Invoice. Item code in the Invoice is not necessary, so it should not be
+such a problem.
+
+Once all your invoices are entered, your **Temperory Opening** account will have a balance of zero!
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/opening-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/opening-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2f341a1a08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/opening-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+If you are a new company you can start using ERPNext accounting module by
+going to chart of accounts.
+
+However, if you are migrating from a legacy accounting system like Tally or a
+Fox Pro based software, please visit [Opening Entry.]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/accounts/opening-accounts.html)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dbcfc00027
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+# Point of Sale Invoice
+
+Point of Sale (POS) is the place where a retail transaction is completed. It
+is the point at which a customer makes a payment to the merchant in exchange
+for goods or services. For retail operations, the delivery of goods, accrual
+of sale and payment all happens in one event, that is usually called the
+“Point of Sale”.
+
+You can make a Sales Invoice of type POS by checking on “Is POS”. When you
+check this, you will notice that some fields get hidden and some new ones
+emerge.
+
+> Tip: In retail, you may not create a separate Customer record for each
+customer. You can create a general Customer called “Walk-in Customer” and make
+all your transactions against this Customer record.
+
+#### Setting Up POS
+
+In ERPNext all Sales and Purchase transactions, like Sales Invoice, Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Order etc. can be edited via the POS. There two steps to Setup POS:
+
+1. Enable POS View via (Setup > Customize > Feature Setup)
+2. Create a [POS Setting]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/pos-setting.html) record
+
+#### Switch to POS View
+
+Open any sales / purchase transaction. Click on the Computer Icon.
+
+#### Different sections of the POS
+
+ * Update Stock: If this is checked, Stock Ledger Entries will be made when you “Submit” this Sales Invoice thereby eliminating the need for a separate Delivery Note.
+ * In your Items table, update inventory information like Warehouse (saved as default), Serial Number, or Batch Number if applicable.
+ * Update Payment Details like your Bank / Cash Account, Paid amount etc.
+ * If you are writing off certain amount. For example when you receive extra cash as a result of not having exact denomination of change, check on ‘Write off Outstanding Amount’ and set the Account.
+
+### Adding an Item
+
+At the billing counter, the retailer needs to select Items which the consumer
+buys. In the POS interface you can select an Item by two methods. One, is by
+clicking on the Item image and the other, is through the Barcode / Serial No.
+
+**Select Item** \- To select a product click on the Item image and add it into the cart. A cart is an area that prepares a customer for checkout by allowing to edit product information, adjust taxes and add discounts.
+
+**Barcode / Serial No** \- A Barcode / Serial No is an optical machine-readable representation of data relating to the object to which it is attached. Enter Barcode / Serial No in the box as shown in the image below and pause for a second, the item will be automatically added to the cart.
+
+
+
+> Tip: To change the quantity of an Item, enter your desired quantity in the
+quantity box. These are mostly used if the same Item is purchased in bulk.
+
+If your product list is very long use the Search field, type the product name
+in Search box.
+
+### Removing an Item
+
+There are two ways to remove an Item.
+
+ * Select an Item by clicking on the row of that Item from Item cart. Then click on “Del” button. OR
+
+ * Enter 0(zero) quantity of any item to delete that item.
+
+To remove multiple Items together, select multiple rows & click on “Del”
+button.
+
+> Delete button appears only when Items are selected.
+
+
+
+### Make Payment
+
+After all the Items and their quantities are added into the cart, you are
+ready to make the Payment. Payment process is divided into 3 steps -
+
+ 1. Click on “Make Payment” to get the Payment window.
+ 2. Select your “Mode of Payment”.
+ 3. Click on “Pay” button to Save the document.
+
+
+
+Submit the document to finalise the record. After the document is submitted,
+you can either print or email it directly to the customer.
+
+#### Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a Point of Sale:
+
+Debits:
+
+ * Customer (grand total)
+ * Bank / Cash (payment)
+
+Credits:
+
+ * Income (net total, minus taxes for each Item)
+ * Taxes (liabilities to be paid to the government)
+ * Customer (payment)
+ * Write Off (optional)
+
+To see entries after “Submit”, click on “View Ledger”.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/purchase-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ce1aae882f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+Purchase Invoice is the exact opposite of your Sales Invoice. It is the bill
+that your Supplier sends you for products or services delivered. Here you
+accrue expenses to your Supplier. Making a Purchase Invoice is very similar to
+making a Purchase Order.
+
+To make a new Purchase Invoice, go to:
+
+> Accounts > Documents > Purchase Invoice > New Purchase Invoice
+
+or click on “Make Purchase Invoice” in Purchase Order or Purchase Receipt.
+
+
+
+The concept of “Posting Date” is again same as Sales Invoice. “Bill No” and
+“Bill Date” helps to track the bill number as set by your Supplier for
+reference.
+
+#### Accounting Impact
+
+Like in Sales Invoice, you have to enter an Expense or an Asset account for
+each row in your Items table. This helps to indicate if the Item is an Asset
+or an Expense. You must also enter a Cost Center. These can also be set in the
+Item master.
+
+The Purchase Invoice will affect your accounts as follows:
+
+Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a typical double entry “purchase”:
+
+Debits:
+
+ * Expense or Asset (net totals, excluding taxes)
+ * Taxes (/assets if VAT-type or expense again).
+
+Credits:
+
+ * Supplier
+
+To see entries in your Purchase Invoice after you “Submit”, click on “View
+Ledger”.
+
+* * *
+
+#### Is purchase an “Expense” or an “Asset”?
+
+If the Item is consumed immediately on purchase, or if it is a service, then
+the purchase becomes an “Expense”. For example, a telephone bill or travel
+bill is an “Expense” - it is already consumed.
+
+For inventory Items, that have a value, these purchases are not yet “Expense”,
+because they still have a value while they remain in your stock. They are
+“Assets”. If they are raw-materials (used in a process), they will become
+“Expense” the moment they are consumed in the process. If they are to be sold
+to a Customer, they become “Expense” when you ship them to the Customer.
+
+* * *
+
+#### Deducting Taxes at Source
+
+In many countries, the law may require you to deduct taxes, while paying your
+suppliers. These taxes could be based on a standard rate. Under these type of
+schemes, typically if a Supplier crosses a certain threshold of payment, and
+if the type of product is taxable, you may have to deduct some tax (which you
+pay back to your government, on your Supplier’s behalf).
+
+To do this, you will have to make a new Tax Account under “Tax Liabilities” or
+similar and credit this Account by the percent you are bound to deduct for
+every transaction.
+
+For more help, please contact your Accountant!
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/sales-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/sales-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5c95b319aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/sales-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+A Sales Invoice is a bill that you send to your customers, against which the customer processes the payment. Sales Invoice is an accounting transaction. On submission of Sales Invoice, the system updates the receivable and books income against a Customer Account.
+
+You can create a Sales Invoice directly from
+
+> Accounting > Documents > Sales Invoice > New Sales Invoice
+
+or Click on Make Invoice at the right hand corner of the Delivery Note.
+
+
+
+#### Accounting Impact
+
+All Sales must be booked against an “Income Account”. This refers to an
+Account in the “Income” section of your Chart of Accounts. It is a good
+practice to classify your income by type (like product income, service income
+etc). The Income Account must be set for each row of the Items table.
+
+> Tip: To set default Income Accounts for Items, you can set it in the Item or
+Item Group.
+
+The other account that is affected is the Account of the Customer. That is
+automatically set from “Debit To” in the heading section.
+
+You must also mention the Cost Centers in which your Income must be booked.
+Remember that your Cost Centers tell you the profitability of the different
+lines of business or product. You can also set a default Cost Center in the
+Item master.
+
+#### Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a typical double entry “Sale”:
+
+When booking a sale (accrual):
+
+**Debit:** Customer (grand total) **Credit:** Income (net total, minus taxes for each Item) **Credit:** Taxes (liabilities to be paid to the government)
+
+> To see entries in your Sales Invoice after you “Submit”, click on “View
+Ledger”.
+
+#### Dates
+
+Posting Date: The date on which the Sales Invoice will affect your books of
+accounts i.e. your General Ledger. This will affect all your balances in that
+accounting period.
+
+Due Date: The date on which the payment is due (if you have sold on credit).
+This can be automatically set from the Customer master.
+
+#### Recurring Invoices
+
+If you have a contract with a Customer where you bill the Customer on a
+monthly, quarterly, half-yearly or annual basis, you can check the “Recurring
+Invoice” box. Here you can fill in the details of how frequently you want to
+bill this Invoice and the period for which the contract is valid.
+
+ERPNext will automatically create new Invoices and mail it to the email ids
+you set.
+
+* * *
+
+#### "Pro Forma" Invoice
+
+If you want to give an Invoice to a Customer to make a payment before you
+deliver, i.e. you operate on a payment first basis, you should create a
+Quotation and title it as a “Pro-forma Invoice” (or something similar) using
+the Print Heading feature.
+
+“Pro Forma” means for formality. Why do this? Because if you book a Sales
+Invoice it will show up in your “Accounts Receivable” and “Income”. This is
+not ideal as your Customer may or may not decide to pay up. But since your
+Customer wants an “Invoice”, you could give the Customer a Quotation (in
+ERPNext) titled as “Pro Forma Invoice”. This way everyone is happy.
+
+This is a fairly common practice. We follow this at Frappe too.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8465679f7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+
+
+* Accounts Frozen Upto: Freeze accounting transactions upto specified date, nobody can make / modify entry except specified role.
+
+* Role Allowed to Set Frozen Accounts & Edit Frozen Entries: Users with this role are allowed to set frozen accounts and create / modify accounting entries against frozen accounts.
+
+* Credit Controller: Role that is allowed to submit transactions that exceed credit limits set.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/cost-center.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..79f1a3c3a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+Your Chart of Accounts is mainly designed to provide reports to the government
+and tax authorities. Most businesses have multiple activities like different
+product lines, market segments, areas of business, etc that share some common
+overheads. They should ideally have their own structure to report, whether they
+are profitable or not. For this purpose, there is an alternate structure,
+called the Chart of Cost Centers.
+
+### Cost Center
+
+You can create a tree of Cost Centers to represent your business better. Each
+Income / Expense entry is also tagged against a Cost Center.
+
+For example, if you have two types of sales:
+
+ * Walk-in Sales
+ * Online Sales
+
+You may not have shipping expenses for your walk-in customers, and no shop-
+rent for your online customers. If you want to get the profitability of each
+of these separately, you should create the two as Cost Centers and mark all
+sales as either "Walk-in" or "Online". Mark your all your purchases in the
+same way.
+
+Thus when you do your analysis you get a better understanding as to which side
+of your business is doing better. Since ERPNext has an option to add multiple
+Companies, you can create Cost Centers for each Company and manage it
+separately.
+
+Chart of Cost Centers
+
+To setup your Chart of Cost Centers go to:
+
+> Accounts > Setup > Chart of Cost Centers
+
+
+
+Cost centers help you in one more activity, budgeting.
+
+### Budgeting
+
+ERPNext will help you set and manage budgets on your Cost Centers. This is
+useful when, for example, you are doing online sales. You have a budget for
+search ads, and you want ERPNext to stop or warn you from over spending, based
+on that budget.
+
+Budgets are also great for planning purposes. When you are making plans for
+the next financial year, you would typically target a revenue based on which
+you would set your expenses. Setting a budget will ensure that your expenses
+do not get out of hand, at any point, as per your plans.
+
+You can define it in the Cost Center. If you have seasonal sales you can also
+define a budget distribution that the budget will follow.
+
+> Accounts > Setup > Budget Distribution > New Budget Distribution
+
+
+
+#### Budget Actions
+
+ERPNext allows you to either:
+
+ * Stop.
+ * Warn or,
+ * Ignore
+
+if you exceed budgets.
+
+These can be defined from the Company record.
+
+Even if you choose to “ignore” budget overruns, you will get a wealth of
+information from the “Budget vs Actual” variance report.
+
+> Note: When you set a budget, it has to be set as per Account under the Cost
+Center. For example if you have a Cost Center “Online Sales”, you can restrict
+“Advertising Budget” by creating a row with that Account and defining the
+amount.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5509e2fcdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+A fiscal year is also known as a financial year or a budget year. It is used
+for calculating financial statements in businesses and other organisations.
+The fiscal year may or may not be the same as a calendar year. For tax
+purposes, companies can choose to be calendar-year taxpayers or fiscal-year
+taxpayers. In many jurisdictions, regulatory laws regarding accounting and
+taxation require such reports once per twelve months. However, it is not
+mandatory that the period should be a calendar year (that is, 1 January to 31
+December).
+
+A fiscal year usually starts at the beginning of a quarter, such as April 1,
+July 1 or October 1. However, most companies' fiscal year also coincides with
+the calendar year, which starts January 1. For the most part, it is simpler
+and easier that way. For some organizations, there are advantages in starting
+the fiscal year at a different time. For example, businesses that are seasonal
+might start their fiscal year on July 1 or October 1. A business that has most
+of its income in the fall and most of its expenses in the spring might also
+choose to start its fiscal year on October 1. That way, they know what their
+income will be for that year, and can adjust their expenses to maintain their
+desired profit margins.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7b4504405b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..916f96cf95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+fiscal-year
+cost-center
+accounts-settings
+tax-rule
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fdbc704022
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+You can define which [Tax Template]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) must be applied on a Sales / Purchase transaction using Tax Rule.
+
+
+
+You can define Tax Rules for Sales or Purchase Taxes.
+While making a Transaction the system will select and apply tax template based on the tax rule defined.
+The system selects Tax Rule with maximum matching Filters.
+
+Let us consider a senario to understand Tax Rule Better.
+
+Suppose we define 2 Tax Rules as below.
+
+
+
+
+
+Here Tax Rule 1 has Billing Country as India and Tax Rule 2 has Billing Country as United Kingdom
+
+Now supposed we try to create a Sales Order for a customer whose default Billing Country is India, system shall select Tax Rule 1.
+In case the customers Billing Country was United Kingdom, the system would have selected Tax Rule 2.
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1fd0b378d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+### Bank Reconciliation Statement
+
+A Bank Reconciliation is a process that explains the difference between the
+bank balance shown in an organisation's bank statement, as supplied by the
+bank, and the corresponding amount shown in the organisation's own accounting
+records at a particular point in time.
+
+Such differences may occur, for example, because a cheque or a list of cheques
+issued by the organisation has not been presented to the bank, a banking
+transaction, such as a credit received, or a charge made by the bank, has not
+yet been recorded in the organisations books, or either the bank or the
+organisation itself has made an error.
+
+The Bank Reconciliation statement in ERPNext comes in the form of a report.
+
+#### Figure 1: Bank Reconciliation Statement
+
+
+
+
+
+When you get the report, check whether the field 'Balance as per bank' matches
+the Bank Account Statement. If there is a match then all the clearance dates
+are updated. If there is a mismatch then check clearance dates and journal
+entries.
+
+To add clearance entries go to Accounts > Tools > Bank Reconciliation
+
+### Bank Reconciliation Tool
+
+The Bank Reconciliation tool in ERPNext, helps add clearance dates to the
+account statements. To Reconcile cheque payments go to Accounts and click on
+Bank Reconciliation.
+
+__Step 1:__ Select the Bank Account against which you intend to reconcile. For
+example; HDFC Bank, ICICI Bank, or Citibank etc.
+
+__Step 2:__ Select the Date range that you wish to reconcile for.
+
+__Step 3:__ Click on 'Get Reconciled Entries'
+
+All the entries in the specified date range will be shown in a table below.
+
+__Step 4:__ Click on the JV from the table and update clearance date.
+
+#### Figure 2: Bank Reconciliation Tool
+
+
+
+__Step 5:__ Click on the button 'Update Clearance Date'.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7b4504405b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7f93166c6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+bank-reconciliation
+payment-reconciliation
+period-closing-voucher
+payment-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bf4a65f243
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+Reconciliation is an accounting process used to compare two sets of records to
+ensure the figures are in agreement and are accurate. It is the key process
+used to determine whether the money leaving an account matches the amount
+spent, ensuring the two values are balanced at the end of the recording
+period. In Payment Reconciliation, the invoices are matched against the
+payments made to the bank. Thus if you have many payments which are not
+reconciled with their respective invoices, you can use the payment
+reconciliation tool.
+
+To use Payment Reconciliation Tool go to,
+
+Accounts > Tools > Payment Reconciliation
+
+
+
+__Step 1:__ Select the Account against whom the payments need to be reconciled.
+
+__Step 2:__ Mention the Voucher Type, whether it is Purchase Invoice, Sales
+Invoice or Journal Entry.
+
+__Step 3:__ Select the Voucher Number and click on 'Get Unreconcilled Entries'.
+
+* All the payment entries will be pulled into a table below.
+
+__Step 4:__ Click on the entry row to allocate a particular amount.
+
+__Step 5:__ Click on the button 'Reconcile'
+
+* You will get a message that says 'Amount allocated successfully'
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f96ca5b91b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+###Payment Tool
+The Payment Tool Feature allows non-accounting personnel to generate Journal Entrys by populating relevant fields in the Journal Entry with account and payment details.
+
+To go to Payment Tool, click on Accounts > Tools > Payment Tool.
+
+1. Select the Company Name.
+2. Select the Party Type (Customer or Supplier) and the name of the customer or supplier against whom the payment has been made or received.
+3. Use the Received Or Paid field to specify 'Received' if payment is being received or 'Paid' if User is making the payment.
+4. Select the Mode of Payment and the Payment Account .
+5. Enter the Reference Number and Reference Date of the payment, for instance, the Cheque no. and Cheque date in case the payment is being made by cheque.
+6. Click on Get Outstanding Vouchers to fetch all the valid Vouchers, Invoices and Orders against which a payment can be made/received. These will appear in the Against Voucher section.
+ * __Note:__ In case User is paying a customer or receiving payment from a supplier, add the details regarding the relevant invoices and orders manually.
+
+
+
+7. Once details have been fetched, click on the detail entry and enter the payment amount made against that Invoice/Order/Voucher
+
+
+
+8. Click on 'Make Journal Entry' to generate a new Journal Entry with the relevant Party Details and Credit/Debit details filled in.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5c0e203d0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+At the end of every year or (quarterly or maybe even monthly), after completing auditing, you can close your books of accounts. This means that you make all your special entries like:
+
+ * Depreciation
+ * Change in value of Assets
+ * Defer taxes and liabilities
+ * Update bad debts
+
+etc. and book your Profit or Loss.
+
+By doing this, your balance in your Income and Expense Accounts become zero. You start a new Fiscal Year (or period) with a balanced Balance Sheet and fresh Profit and Loss account.
+
+In ERPNext after making all the special entries via Journal Entry for the current fiscal year, you should set all your Income and Expense accounts to zero via:
+
+> Accounts > Tools > Period Closing Voucher
+
+**Posting Date** will be when this entry should be executed. If your Fiscal Year ends on 31st December, then that date should be selected as Posting Date in the Period Closing Voucher.
+
+**Transaction Date** will be Period Closing Voucher's creation date.
+
+**Closing Fiscal Year** will be an year for which you are closing your financial statement.
+
+
+
+This voucher will transfer Profit or Loss (availed from P&L statment) to Closing Account Head. You should select a libility account like Reserves and Surplus, or Capital Fund account as Closing Account.
+
+The Period Closing Voucher will make accounting entries (GL Entry) making all your Income and Expense Accounts zero and transferring Profit/Loss balance to the Closing Account.
+
+
+
+Entering a Purchase Order is very similar to a Purchase Request, additionally
+you will have to set:
+
+ * Supplier.
+ * A “Required By” date on each Item: If you are expecting part delivery, your Supplier will know how much quantity to deliver at which date. This will help you from preventing over-supply. It will also help you to track how well your Supplier is doing on timeliness.
+
+### Taxes
+
+If your Supplier is going to charge you additional taxes or charge like a
+shipping or insurance charge, you can add it here. It will help you to
+accurately track your costs. Also, if some of these charges add to the value
+of the product you will have to mention them in the Taxes table. You can also
+use templates for your taxes. For more information on setting up your taxes
+see the Purchase Taxes and Charges Template.
+
+### Value Added Taxes (VAT)
+
+Many a times, the tax paid by you to a Supplier, for an Item, is the same tax
+which you collect from your Customer. In many regions, what you pay to your
+government is only the difference between what you collect from your Customer
+and what you pay to your Supplier. This is called Value Added Tax (VAT).
+
+For example you buy Items worth X and sell them for 1.3X. So your Customer
+pays 1.3 times the tax you pay your Supplier. Since you have already paid tax
+to your Supplier for X, what you owe your government is only the tax on 0.3X.
+
+This is very easy to track in ERPNext since each tax head is also an Account.
+Ideally you must create two Accounts for each type of VAT you pay and collect,
+“Purchase VAT-X” (asset) and “Sales VAT-X” (liability), or something to that
+effect. Please contact your accountant if you need more help or post a query
+on our forums!
+
+
+
+#### Purchase UOM and Stock UOM Conversion
+
+You can change your UOM as per your stock requirements in the Purchase Order
+form.
+
+For example, If you have bought your raw material in large quantities with UOM
+-boxes, and wish to stock them in UOM- Nos; you can do so while making your
+Purchase Order.
+
+__Step 1:__ Store UOM as Nos in the Item form.
+
+Note: The UOM in the Item form is the stock UOM.
+
+__Step 2:__ In the Purchase Order mention UOM as Box. (Since material arrives in
+Boxes)
+
+__Step 3:__ In the Warehouse and Reference section, the UOM will be pulled in as
+Nos (from the Item form)
+
+#### Figure 3: Conversion of Purchase UOM to stock UOM
+
+
+
+
+__Step 4:__ Mention the UOM conversion factor. For example, (100);If one box has
+100 pieces.
+
+__Step 5:__ Notice that the stock quantity will be updated accordingly.
+
+__Step 6:__ Save and Submit the Form.
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/purchase-taxes.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/purchase-taxes.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0e5ebb3a20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/purchase-taxes.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+For Tax Accounts that you want to use in the tax templates, you must mention
+them as type “Tax” in your Chart of Accounts.
+
+Similar to your Sales Taxes and Charges Template is the Purchase Taxes and
+Charges Master. This is the tax template that you can use in your Purchase
+Orders and Purchase Invoices.
+
+> Buying > Setup > Purchase Taxes and Charges Template > New Purchase Taxes and Charges
+Master
+
+
+
+
+
+You can specify if the tax / charge is only for valuation (not a part of
+total) or only for total (does not add value to the item) or for both.
+
+If you select a particular tax as your Default tax, the system will apply this
+tax to all the purchase transactions by default.
+
+### Calculation Type
+
+This can be on Net Total (that is the sum of basic amount). On Previous Row
+Total / Amount (for cumulative taxes or charges). If you select this option,
+the tax will be applied as a percentage of the previous row (in the tax table)
+amount or total. Actual (as mentioned).
+
+ * **Account Head:** The Account ledger under which this tax will be booked.
+ * **Cost Center:** If the tax / charge is an income (like shipping) or expense it needs to be booked against a Cost Center.
+ * **Description:** Description of the tax (that will be printed in invoices / quotes).
+ * **Rate:** Tax rate.
+ * **Amount:** Tax amount.
+ * **Total:** Cumulative total to this point.
+ * **Enter Row:** If based on "Previous Row Total" you can select the row number which will be taken as a base for this calculation (default is the previous row).
+ * **Consider Tax or Charge for:** In this section you can specify if the tax / charge is only for valuation (not a part of total) or only for total (does not add value to the item) or for both.
+ * **Add or Deduct:** Whether you want to add or deduct the tax.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/buying-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dc9fa8e143
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+Buying Settings is where you can define properties which will be applied in the Buying module's transactions.
+
+
+
+Let us look at the various options that can be configured:
+
+### 1. Supplier Naming By
+
+When a Supplier is saved, system generates a unique identity or name for that Supplier which can be used to refer the Supplier in various Buying transactions.
+
+If not configured otherwise, ERPNext uses the Supplier's Name as the unique name. If you want to identify Suppliers using names like SUPP-00001, SUPP-00002, or such other patterned series, select the value of Supplier Naming By as "Naming Series".
+
+You can define or select the Naming Series pattern from:
+
+> Setup > Settings > Naming Series
+
+[Click here to know more about defining a Naming Series.]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html)
+
+### 2. Default Supplier Type
+
+Configure what should be the value of Supplier Type when a new Supplier is created.
+
+### 3. Default Buying Price List
+
+Configure what should be the value of Buying Price List when a new Buying transaction is created.
+
+### 4. Maintain Same Rate Throughout Purchase Cycle
+
+If this is checked, ERPNext will stop you if you change the Item's price in a Purchase Invoice or Purchase Receipt created based on a Purchase Order, i.e. it will maintain the same price throughout the purchase cycle. If there is a requirement where you need the Item's price to change, you should uncheck this option.
+
+### 5. Purchase Order Required
+
+If this option is configured "Yes", ERPNext will prevent you from creating a Purchase Invoice or a Purchase Receipt without first creating a Purchase Order.
+
+### 6. Purchase Receipt Required
+
+If this option is configured "Yes", ERPNext will prevent you from creating a Purchase Invoice without first creating a Purchase Receipt.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..259b5ebc42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..980e2266cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+buying-settings
+supplier-type
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/supplier-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9ca8978069
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+A supplier may be distinguished from a contractor or subcontractor, who
+commonly adds specialized input to deliverables. A supplier is also known as a
+vendor. There are different types of suppliers based on their goods and
+products.
+
+ERPNext allows you to create your own categories of suppliers. These
+categories are known as Supplier Type. For Example, if your suppliers are
+mainly pharmaceutical companies and FMCG distributors, You can create a new
+Type for them and name them accordingly.
+
+Based on what the suppliers supply, they are classified into different
+categories called Supplier Type. There can be different types of suppliers.
+You can create your own category of Supplier Type.
+
+> Buying > Setup > Supplier Type > New Supplier Type
+
+
+
+You can classify your suppliers from a range of choice available in ERPNext.
+Choose from a set of given options like Distributor, Electrical,Hardware,
+Local, Pharmaceutical, Raw material, Services etc.
+
+Classifying your supplier into different types facilitates accounting and
+payments.
+
+Type your new supplier category and Save.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/supplier-quotation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/supplier-quotation.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a0047e6867
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/supplier-quotation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+A Supplier Quotation is a formal statement of promise by potential supplier to
+supply the goods or services required by a buyer, at specified prices, and
+within a specified period. A quotation may also contain terms of sale and
+payment, and warranties. Acceptance of quotation by the buyer constitutes an
+agreement binding on both parties.
+
+You can make a supplier quotation from a Material Request
+
+#### Supplier Quotation Flow-Chart
+
+
+
+You can also make a Supplier Quotation directly from:
+
+> Buying > Documents > Supplier Quotation > New Supplier Quotation
+
+#### Create Supplier Quotation
+
+
+
+If you have multiple Suppliers who supply you with the same Item, you
+usually send out a message (Request for Quote) to various Suppliers. In
+many cases, especially if you have centralized buying, you may want to record
+all the quotes so that
+
+ * You can easily compare prices in the future
+ * Audit whether all Suppliers were given the opportunity to quote.
+
+Supplier Quotations are not necessary for most small businesses. Always
+evaluate the cost of collecting information to the value it really provides!
+You could only do this for high value items.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/supplier.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/supplier.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9e20642c97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/buying/supplier.md
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+Suppliers are companies or individuals who provide you with products or
+services. They are treated in exactly the same manner as Customers in ERPNext.
+
+You can create a new Supplier via:
+
+> Buying > Documents > Supplier > New Supplier
+
+
+
+### Contacts and Addresses
+
+Contacts and Addresses in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can attach
+multiple Contacts or Addresses to Customers and Suppliers. To add a Contact or
+Address go to Buying and click on “New Contact” or “New Address”.
+
+> Tip: When you select a Supplier in any transaction, one Contact and Address
+gets pre-selected. This is the “Default Contact or Address”. So make sure you
+set your defaults correctly!
+
+### Integration with Accounts
+
+In ERPNext, there is a separate Account record for each Supplier, of Each
+company.
+
+When you create a new Supplier, ERPNext will automatically create an Account
+Ledger for the Supplier under “Accounts Payable” in the Company set in the
+Supplier record.
+
+> Advanced Tip: If you want to change the Account Group under which the
+Supplier Account is created, you can set it in the Company master.
+
+If you want to create an Account in another Company, just change the Company
+value and “Save” the Supplier again.
+
+> Tip: You can also import from the Data Import Tool
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/collaboration-tools/assignment.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/collaboration-tools/assignment.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d78cf0c7ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/collaboration-tools/assignment.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+Assign To feature in ERPNext allows you to allocate particular document to specific user, whom needs to further work on that document.
+
+For example, if Sales Order needs to be approved/submitted by Sales Manager, first draft user can allocate that Sales Order to Sales Manager. On allocating document to Sales Manager, it will be added to that user's ToDo list. Same way, allocation can also be done to Material User and Account user who needs to create Delivery Note and Sales Invoice respectively against this Sales Note.
+
+| Field property | +Purpose | +
| Print hide | +Checking it will hide field from Standard print format. | +
| Hidden | +Checking it field will hide field in the data entry form. | +
| Mandatory | +Checking it will set field as mandatory. | +
| Field Type | +Click here to learn about of fields types. | +
| Options | +Possible result for a drop down fields can be listed here. Also for a link field, relevant Doctype can be provided. | +
| Allow on submit | +Checking it will let user update value in field even in submitted form. | +
| Default | +Value defined in default will be pulled on new record creation. | +
| Description | +Gives field description for users understanding. | +
| Label | +Label is the field name which appears in form. | +
+
+#### Fixed or Editable Titles
+
+If your title is generated as a default title, it can be edited by the user by clicking on the heading of the document.
+
+
+
+If you want a fixed title, you can set the rule in the **Options** property. In this way, the title will be automatically updated everytime the document is updated.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..57154ad10f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+### Hiding Unused Features
+
+As you have seen from this manual that ERPNext contains tons of features which
+you may not use. We have observed that most users start with using 20% of the
+features, though a different 20%. To hide fields belonging to features you
+dont require, go to:
+
+> Setup > Tools > Hide/Unhide Features
+
+
+
+Check / uncheck the features you want to use and refresh your page for the
+changes to take effect.
+
+* * *
+
+### Hiding Module Icons
+
+To hide modules (icons) from the home page, go to:
+
+Setup > Tools> Modules Setup
+
+
+
+> Note: Modules are automatically hidden for users that have no permissions on
+the documents within that module. For example, if a user has no permissions on
+Purchase Order, Purchase Request, Supplier, the “Buying” module will
+automatically be hidden.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2132a95cf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+# Customize ERPNext
+
+ERPNext offers many tools to customize the system.
+
+You simplify the forms by hiding features you don’t need using Disable
+Features and Module Setup, add Custom Fields, change form properties, like
+adding more options to drop-downs or hiding fields using Customize Form View
+and make your own Print Formats by using HTML Templates. You can also create
+multiple Letter Heads for your Prints.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a225d445fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+custom-field
+custom-doctype
+custom-scripts
+customize-form
+document-title
+hiding-modules-and-features
+print-format
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/print-format.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c373d065de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+
+
+Print Formats are the layouts that are generated when you want to Print or
+Email a transaction like a Sales Invoice. There are two types of Print
+Formats,
+
+ * The auto-generated “Standard” Print Format: This type of format follows the same layout as the form and is generated automatically by ERPNext.
+ * Based on the Print Format document. There are templates in HTML that will be rendered with data.
+
+ERPNext comes with a number of pre-defined templates in three styles: Modern,
+Classic and Standard.
+
+You can modify the templates or create your own. Editing
+ERPNext templates is not allowed because they may be over-written in an
+upcoming release.
+
+To create your own versions, open an existing template from:
+
+> Setup > Printing > Print Formats
+
+
+
+Select the type of Print Format you want to edit and click on the “Copy”
+button on the right column. A new Print Format will open up with “Is Standard”
+set as “No” and you can edit the Print Format.
+
+Editing a Print Format is a long discussion and you will have to know a bit of
+HTML, CSS, Python to learn this. For help, please post on our forum.
+
+Print Formats are rendered on the server side using the [Jinja Templating Language](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/). All forms have access to the doc object which contains information about the document that is being formatted. You can also access common utilities via the frappe module.
+
+For styling, the [Boostrap CSS Framework](http://getbootstrap.com/) is provided and you can enjoy the full range of classes.
+
+> Note: Pre-printed stationary is usually not a good idea because your Prints
+will look incomplete (inconsistent) when you send them by mail.
+
+#### References
+
+1. [Jinja Tempalting Language: Reference](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/)
+1. [Bootstrap CSS Framework](http://getbootstrap.com/)
+
+#### Print Settings
+
+To edit / update your print and PDF settings, go to:
+
+> Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Settings
+
+
+
+#### Example
+
+{% set example = '''| Sr | +Item Name | +Description | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| {{ row.idx }} | +
+ {{ row.item_name }}
+ {% if row.item_code != row.item_name -%}
+ Item Code: {{ row.item_code}} + {%- endif %} + |
+
+ {{ row.description }} |
+ {{ row.qty }} {{ row.uom or row.stock_uom }} | +{{ + row.get_formatted("rate", doc) }} | +{{ + row.get_formatted("amount", doc) }} | +
+
+After you select the template, the remaining form appears.
+
+#### Step 2: Enter Employee Details
+
+
+
+Once the Appraisal Template is completed, you can create Appraisal records for
+each period where you track performance. You can give points out of 5 for each
+parameter and the system will calculate the overall performance of the
+Employee.
+
+To make the Appraisal final, make sure to “Submit” it.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/attendance.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/attendance.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..66c3a4c503
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/attendance.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+An Attendance record stating that an Employee has been present on a particular
+day can be created manually by:
+
+> Human Resources > Attendance > New Attendance
+
+
+
+You can get a monthly report of your Attendance data by going to the “Monthly
+Attendance Details” report.
+
+You can also bulk uppload attendence using the [Upload Attendence Tool ]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.html)
+
+{next}
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/employee.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/employee.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..331fe47396
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/employee.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+There are many fields you can add in your Employee records.
+
+To create new Employee go to:
+
+> Human Resources > Employee > New
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/expense-claim.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/expense-claim.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0a86f9af87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/expense-claim.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+Expense Claim is made when Employee’s make expenses out of their pocket on
+behalf of the company. For example, if they take a customer out for lunch,
+they can make a request for reimbursement via the Expense Claim form.
+
+To make a new Expense Claim, go to:
+
+> HR > Expense Claim > New Expense Claim
+
+
+
+Set the Employee ID, date and the list of expenses that are to be claimed and
+“Submit” the record.
+
+### Approving Expenses
+
+The person making the claim must also set the id of the user who will
+“Approve” these expenses and set the “Assign To” to notify the user of the
+request Approve.
+
+If the Approver sees the “form”, she or he can update the “Approved Amounts”
+and click on “Approve”. To cancel the claim, they can click on the “Reject”
+button.
+
+Comments can be added in the Comments section explaining why the claim was
+approved or rejected.
+
+### Booking the Expense and Reimbursement
+
+The approved Expense Claim must then be converted into a Journal Entry and a
+payment must be made. Note: This amount should not be clubbed with Salary
+because the amount will then be taxable to the Employee.
+
+### Linking with Task & Project
+
+* To Link Expense Claim with Task or Project specify the Task or the Project while making an Expense Claim
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/holiday-list.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/holiday-list.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9676785c91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/holiday-list.md
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+Holiday List is a list which contains the dates of holidays along with the
+occasion of that holiday. The list is generally valid for one calendar year.
+
+Most organisations have a standard Holiday-List for their employees. Some even
+have different holiday lists for laborers and a different one for management
+staff.
+
+
+
+To set up a holiday list in the system, Go to Human Resources Module and Click
+on Holiday List.
+
+
+
+> Human Resources >Holiday List > New Holiday List
+
+
+#### Figure 1: Holiday List
+
+
+
+
+
+__Step 1:__ Give a name to the Holiday list
+
+__Step 2:__ Mention the Fiscal Year
+
+__Step 3:__ State the Weekly off.
+
+__Step 4:__ Click on the button 'Get Weekly Off Dates'
+
+This step will fill the box below with yearly off dates with day as the
+description.
+
+__Step 5:__ Click on Add new row to add more dates
+
+Mention the holiday reason in the description and select the date from the
+'Date' field.
+
+
+#### Figure 2: Adding new holidays to the list
+
+
+
+
+
+> Note 1: If you have selected a holiday list in the Employment Details form,
+the system will give priority to the form mentioned here. It will fetch the
+list mentioned in the form rather than the one which you may have specified as
+Default; However, if there is no list in the employment details form, the
+default list will be fetched.
+
+
+> Note 2: You can form as many holiday lists as you wish. For example, if you
+have a mill, you can have one list for mill workers and another list for
+office staff. You can manage between lists by attaching their respective
+holiday list to their respective employment detail form.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8f29974206
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+The HR module has a setup process where you create the masters for all the
+major activities.
+
+### Organization Setup
+
+To setup your Employee master you must first create:
+
+ * Employment Type (like Permanent, Temp, Contractor, Intern etc).
+ * Branch (if there are multiple offices).
+ * Department (if any, like Accounting, Sales etc).
+ * Designation (CEO, Sales Manager etc).
+ * Grade (A, B, C etc, usually based on seniority).
+
+### Leave Setup
+
+To setup Leaves, create:
+
+ * Leave Type (like Sick Leave, Travel Leave etc)
+ * Holiday List (list of annual holidays for the year - these days will not be considered in Leave Applications).
+
+### Payroll (Salary) Setup
+
+In ERPNext, salaries have two types of components, earnings (basic salary,
+expenses paid by the company, like telephone bill, travel allowance etc) and
+deductions (amounts deducted for taxes, social security etc). To setup
+payroll, you must first setup all the different types of earnings and
+deductions. These are
+
+ * Earning Type
+ * Deduction Type
+
+These are just labels, we will see how to use them when we discuss the payroll
+section.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..20d792b319
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+Human Resources Reports
+
+### Employee Leave Balance
+
+Employee Leave Balance Report shows employees and their respective balance leaves under various leave types. Report is generated as per the number of allowed leaves.
+
+
+
+### Employee Birthday
+
+Employee Birthday Report shows Birthdays of your employees.
+
+
+
+### Employee Information
+
+Employee Information Report shows Report View of important information recorded in Employee master.
+
+
+
+### Monthly Salary Register
+
+Monthly Salary Register shows net pay and its components of employee(s) at a glance.
+
+
+
+
+### Monthly Attendance Sheet
+
+Monthly Attendance Sheet shows monthly attendance of selected employee at a glance.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..02fcfc6334
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+The Human Resources (HR) Module covers the processes linked to managing a team
+of co-workers. Most important feature here is processing the payroll by using
+Process Payroll to generate Salary Slips. Most countries have complex tax
+rules stating which expenses the company can make on behalf of the Employees.
+There are a set of rules for the company to deduct taxes and social security
+from employee payroll. ERPNext allows to accomodate all types of taxes and
+their calculation.
+
+It also maintains a complete employee database including contact information,
+salary details, attendance, performance evaluation, and appraisal records.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eba8accea7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+employee
+leave-application
+expense-claim
+attendance
+salary-and-payroll
+appraisal
+job-applicant
+job-opening
+offer-letter
+tools
+human-resources-reports
+setup
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/introduction-to-human-resources.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/introduction-to-human-resources.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8d4da2fedb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/introduction-to-human-resources.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+The Human Resources (HR) Module covers the processes linked to managing a team
+of co-workers. Most important feature here is processing the payroll by using
+Process Payroll to generate Salary Slips. Most countries have complex tax
+rules stating which expenses the company can make on behalf of the Employees.
+There are a set of rules for the company to deduct taxes and social security
+from employee payroll. ERPNext allows to accomodate all types of taxes and
+their calculation.
+
+It also maintains a complete employee database including contact information,
+salary details, attendance, performance evaluation, and appraisal records.
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/job-applicant.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/job-applicant.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3fafa95f00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/job-applicant.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+You can mantain a list of People who have applied for a [Job Opening]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/human-resources/job-opening.html).
+
+To create a new Job Applicant go to
+
+> Human Resource > Job Applicant > New
+
+
+
+### Linking with an Email Account
+
+You can link Job Application with an Email account.
+Suppose you link Job Application with an email job@example.com
+system shall create a New Job Applicant against each email received on the mailbox.
+
+* To link Email Account with Job Applicant, go to
+
+> Setup > Email Account > New
+
+* Enter the email id and the password, and select 'Enable Incoming'
+
+* In 'Append To' select 'Job Applicant'
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/job-opening.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/job-opening.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bfe914c364
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/job-opening.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+You can make a record of the open vacancies in your company using Job Opening.
+
+To create a new Job Opening go to
+
+> Human Resource > Job Opening > New
+
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/leave-application.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/leave-application.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ecc4677c71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/leave-application.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+If your company has a formal system where Employees have to apply for leaves
+to be able to qualify as paid leaveas, you can create Leave Application to
+track approval and usage of leaves. You have to mention the Employee, Leave
+Type and the period for which the leave is taken.
+
+> Human Resources > Leave Application > New Leave Application
+
+
+
+###Setting Leave Approver
+
+* A leave approver is a user who can approve an leave application for an employee.
+
+* You need to mention a list of Leave Approvers against an Employee in the Employee Master.
+
+
+
+> Tip : If you want all users to create their own Leave Applications, you can set
+their “Employee ID” as a match rule in the Leave Application Permission
+settings. See the earlier discussion on [Setting Up Permissions]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions.html)
+for more info.
+
+You assign Leaves aginast an Employee check [Leave Allocation]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.html)
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/offer-letter.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/offer-letter.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..16176f1a0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/offer-letter.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+Offer Letter is given to candidate after Interview & selection which states the offered salary package,
+designation, grade, department working, no of days entitled for leave.
+
+In ERPNext you can make a record of the Offer Letters that you can given to candidates. To create a new offer Letter go to
+
+> Human Resource > Offer Letter > New
+
+
+
+> Note: An offer letter can be made only against a [Job Applicant]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/human-resources/job-applicant.html)
+
+There is a pre-designed print format to print you offer letter.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..64c8f3ccde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+Salary is a fixed amount of money or compensation paid to an employee by an employer in return for the work performed .
+
+Payroll is the administration of financial records of employees' salaries, wages, bonuses, net pay, and deductions.
+
+To process Payroll in ERPNext,
+
+ 1. Create Salary Structures for all Employees.
+ 2. Generate Salary Slips via Process Payroll.
+ 3. Book the Salary in your Accounts.
+
+### Salary Structure
+
+The Salary Structure represents how Salaries are calculated based on Earnings
+and Deductions.
+
+Salary structures are used to help organizations:
+ 1. Maintain pay levels that are competitive with the external labor market,
+ 2. Maintain internal pay relationships among jobs,
+ 3. Recognize and reward differences in level of responsibility, skill, and performance, and manage pay expenditures.
+
+The usual components of the salary structure (in india) include:
+
+__Basic Salary:__ It is the taxable base income and generally not more than 40% of CTC.
+
+__House Rent Allowance:__ The HRA constitutes 40 to 50% of the basic salary.
+
+__Special Allowances:__ Makes up for the remainder part of the salary, mostly smaller than the basic salary which is completely taxable.
+
+__Leave Travel Allowance:__ The non-taxable amount paid by the employer to the employee for vacation/trips with family within India.
+
+__Gratuity:__ It is basically a lump sum amount paid by the employer when the employee resigns from the organization or retires.
+
+__PF:__ Fund collected during emergency or old age. 12% of the basic salary is automatically deducted and goes to the employee provident fund.
+
+__Medical Allowance:__ The employer pays the employee for the medical expenditures incurred. It is tax free up to Rs.15,000.
+
+__Bonus:__ Taxable part of the CTC, usually a once a year lump sum amount, given to the employee based on the individual’s as well as the organizational performance for the year.
+
+__Employee Stock Options:__ ESOPS are Free/discounted shares given by the company to the employees. This is done to primarily increase employee retention.
+
+To create a new Salary Structure go to:
+
+> Human Resources > Setup > Salary Structure > New Salary Structure
+
+#### Figure 1:Salary Structure
+
+
+
+### In the Salary Structure,
+
+ * Select the Employee
+ * Set the starting date from which this is valid (Note: There can only be one Salary Structure that can be “Active” for an Employee during any period)
+ * In the “Earnings” and “Deductions” table all your defined Earning Type and Deductions Type will be auto-populated. Set the values of the Earnings and Deductions and save the Salary Structure.
+
+### Leave Without Pay (LWP)
+
+Leave Without Pay (LWP) happens when an Employee runs out of allocated leaves
+or takes a leave without an approval (via Leave Application). If you want
+ERPNext to automatically deduct salary in case of LWP, then you must check on
+the “Apply LWP” column in the Earning Type and Deduction Type masters. The
+amount of pay cut is the proportion of LWP days divided by the total working
+days for the month (based on the Holiday List).
+
+If you don’t want ERPNext to manage LWP, just don’t click on LWP in any of the
+Earning Types and Deduction Types.
+
+* * *
+
+### Creating Salary Slips
+
+Once the Salary Structure is created, you can make a salary slip from the same
+form or you can process your payroll for the month using Process Payroll.
+
+To create a salary slip from Salary Structure, click on the button Make Salary
+Slip.
+
+#### Figure 2: Salary Slip
+
+
+
+You can also create salary slip for multiple employees using Process Payroll:
+
+> Human Resources > Process Payroll
+
+#### Figure 3: Process Payroll
+
+
+
+In Process Payroll,
+
+ 1. Select the Company for which you want to create the Salary Slips.
+ 2. Select the Month and the Year for which you want to create the Salary Slips.
+ 3. Click on “Create Salary Slips”. This will create Salary Slip records for each active Employee for the month selected. If the Salary Slips are created, the system will not create any more Salary Slips. All updates will be shown in the “Activity Log” section.
+ 4. Once all Salary Slips are created, you can check if they are created correctly or edit it if you want to deduct Leave Without Pay (LWP).
+ 5. After checking, you can “Submit” them all together by clicking on “Submit Salary Slips”. 1. If you want them to be automatically emailed to the Employee, make sure to check the “Send Email” box.
+
+### Booking Salaries in Accounts
+
+The final step is to book the Salaries in your Accounts.
+
+Salaries in businesses are usually dealt with extreme privacy. In most cases,
+the companies issues a single payment to the bank combining all salaries and
+the bank distributes the salaries to each employee’s salary account. This way
+there is only one payment entry in the company’s books of accounts and anyone
+with access to the company’s accounts will not have access to the individual
+salaries.
+
+The salary payment entry is a Journal Entry entry that debits the total
+salary of all Employees to the Salary Account and credits the company’s bank
+Account.
+
+To generate your salary payment voucher from Process Payroll, click on
+“Make Bank Voucher” and a new Journal Entry with the total salaries will be
+created.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/branch.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/branch.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9fc71d534d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/branch.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+Branches of your organization
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dde17a303f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+You can make a record of the tax and other salary deductions and describe it as Deduction Type
+
+To create a new Deduction Type
+
+> Human Resource > Setup > Deduction Type > New
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/department.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/department.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8376626751
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/department.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+Departments in your organization
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/designation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/designation.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c8af1069b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/designation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+Designations in your organization
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ab97634e4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+You can make a record of the Salary Components and describe it as Earning Type
+
+To create a new Earning Type
+
+> Human Resource > Setup > Earning Type > New
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..84b6aad470
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+Various employment contracts you have with your employees.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/holiday-list.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/holiday-list.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ea64cdfa45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/holiday-list.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+You can specify the Holidays for a particular year using Holiday List.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f349fc74f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+# HR Settings
+
+GLobal settings for HR related documents
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0dff60b400
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..550236a2b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+hr-settings
+employment-type
+branch
+department
+designation
+earning-type
+deduction-type
+leave-allocation
+leave-type
+holiday-list
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..985b0c0e61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+Helps you allocate Leaves to a particular Employee
+
+
+
+To assign leaves to multiple employees use the [Leave Allocation Tool]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.html)
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..78b3ab660a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+Specify the Type of Leave that can be allocated against an Employee
+
+
+
+* 'Max Days Leave Allowed' specifies the maximum number of days this type of leave can be taken at a strech.
+* 'Is LWP' specifies if the Leave is without Pay.
+* 'Allow Negative Balance' specifies if system can maintain negative leaves.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0dff60b400
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3da2e7166a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+upload-attendance
+leave-allocation-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a1fa8018fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+Leave Allocation tool helps you allocated a specific number of leaves for your employees.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5f70933dda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+This tool helps you to upload bulk attendence from a csv file.
+
+To upload the attendance go to:
+
+> Human Resources > Upload Attendance
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..454b4a834f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+# User Manual
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e9e30ed89c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+introduction
+setting-up
+accounts
+stock
+CRM
+selling
+buying
+manufacturing
+projects
+support
+human-resources
+customer-portal
+website
+collaboration-tools
+customize-erpnext
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e445963c0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
@@ -0,0 +1,423 @@
+Before you start implementation, lets get familiar with the terminology that
+is used and some basic concepts in ERPNext.
+
+* * *
+
+### Basic Concepts
+
+#### Company
+
+This represents the Company records for which ERPNext is setup. With this same
+setup, you can create multiple Company records, each representing a different
+legal entity. The accounting for each Company will be different, but they will
+share the Customer, Supplier and Item records.
+
+> Setup > Company
+
+#### Customer
+
+Represents a customer. A Customer can be an individual or an organizations.
+You can create multiple Contacts and Addresses for each Customer.
+
+> Selling > Customer
+
+#### Supplier
+
+Represents a supplier of goods or services. Your telephone company is a
+Supplier, so is your raw materials Supplier. Again, a Supplier can be an
+individual or an organization and has multiple Contacts and Addresses.
+
+> Buying > Supplier
+
+#### Item
+
+A Product, sub-product or Service that is either bought, sold or manufactured
+and is uniquely identified.
+
+> Stock > Item
+
+#### Account
+
+An Account is a heading under which financial and business transactions are
+carried on. For example, “Travel Expense” is an account, “Customer Zoe”,
+“Supplier Mae” are accounts. ERPNext creates accounts for Customers and
+Suppliers automatically.
+
+> Accounts > Chart of Accounts
+
+#### Address
+
+An address represents location details of a Customer or Supplier. These can be
+of different locations such as Head Office, Factory, Warehouse, Shop etc.
+
+> Selling > Address
+
+#### Contact
+
+An individual Contact belongs to a Customer or Supplier or is just an
+independent. A Contact has a name and contact details like email and phone
+number.
+
+> Selling > Contact
+
+#### Communication
+
+A list of all Communication with a Contact or Lead. All emails sent from the
+system are added to the Communication table.
+
+> Support > Communication
+
+#### Price List
+
+A Price List is a place where different rate plans can be stored. It’s a name
+you give to a set of Item Prices stored under a particular List.
+
+> Selling > Price List
+
+
+> Buying > Price List
+
+* * *
+
+### Accounting
+
+#### Fiscal Year
+
+Represents a Financial Year or Accounting Year. You can operate multiple
+Fiscal Years at the same time. Each Fiscal Year has a start date and an end
+date and transactions can only be recorded in this period. When you “close” a
+fiscal year, it's balances are transferred as “opening” balances for the next
+fiscal year.
+
+> Setup > Company > Fiscal Year
+
+#### Cost Center
+
+A Cost Center is like an Account, but the only difference is that its
+structure represents your business more closely than Accounts.
+For example, in your Chart of Accounts, you can separate your expenses by its type
+(i.e., travel, marketing, etc.). In your Chart of Cost Centers, you can separate
+them by product line or business group (e.g., online sales, retail sales, etc.).
+
+> Accounts > Chart of Cost Centers
+
+#### Journal Entry
+
+A document that contains General Ledger (GL) entries and the sum of Debits and
+Credits of those entries is the same. In ERPNext you can update Payments,
+Returns, etc., using Journal Entrys.
+
+> Accounts > Journal Entry
+
+#### Sales Invoice
+
+A bill sent to Customers for delivery of Items (goods or services).
+
+> Accounts > Sales Invoice
+
+#### Purchase Invoice
+
+A bill sent by a Supplier for delivery of Items (goods or services).
+
+> Accounts > Purchase Invoice
+
+#### Currency
+
+ERPNext allows you to book transactions in multiple currencies. There is only
+one currency for your book of accounts though. While posting your Invoices with
+payments in different currencies, the amount is converted to the default
+currency by the specified conversion rate.
+
+> Setup > Currency
+
+* * *
+
+### Selling
+
+#### Customer Group
+
+A classification of Customers, usually based on market segment.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Customer Group
+
+#### Lead
+
+A person who could be a future source of business. A Lead may generate
+Opportunities. (from: “may lead to a sale”).
+
+> Selling > Lead
+
+#### Opportunity
+
+A potential sale. (from: “opportunity for a business”).
+
+> Selling > Opportunity
+
+#### Sales Order
+
+A note confirming the terms of delivery and price of an Item (product or
+service) by the Customer. Deliveries, Production Orders and Invoices are made
+on basis of Sales Orders.
+
+> Selling > Sales Order
+
+#### Territory
+
+A geographical area classification for sales management. You can set targets
+for Territories and each sale is linked to a Territory.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Territory
+
+#### Sales Partner
+
+A third party distributer / dealer / affiliate / commission agent who sells
+the company’s products usually for a commission.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Sales Partner
+
+#### Sales Person
+
+Someone who pitches to the Customer and closes deals. You can set targets for
+Sales Persons and tag them in transactions.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Sales Person
+
+* * *
+
+### Buying
+
+#### Purchase Order
+
+A contract given to a Supplier to deliver the specified Items at the specified
+cost, quantity, dates and other terms.
+
+> Buying > Purchase Order
+
+#### Material Request
+
+A request made by a system User, or automatically generated by ERPNext based
+on reorder level or projected quantity in Production Plan for purchasing a set
+of Items.
+
+> Buying > Material Request
+
+* * *
+
+### Stock (Inventory)
+
+#### Warehouse
+
+A logical Warehouse against which stock entries are made.
+
+> Stock > Warehouse
+
+#### Stock Entry
+
+Material transfer from a Warehouse, to a Warehouse or from one Warehouse to
+another.
+
+> Stock > Stock Entry
+
+#### Delivery Note
+
+A list of Items with quantities for shipment. A Delivery Note will reduce the
+stock of Items for the Warehouse from where you ship. A Delivery Note is
+usually made against a Sales Order.
+
+> Stock > Delivery Note
+
+#### Purchase Receipt
+
+A note stating that a particular set of Items were received from the Supplier,
+most likely against a Purchase Order.
+
+> Stock > Purchase Receipt
+
+#### Serial Number
+
+A unique number given to a particular unit of an Item.
+
+> Stock > Serial Number
+
+#### Batch
+
+A number given to a group of units of a particular Item that may be purchased
+or manufactured in a group.
+
+> Stock > Batch
+
+#### Stock Ledger Entry
+
+A unified table for all material movement from one warehouse to another. This
+is the table that is updated when a Stock Entry, Delivery Note, Purchase
+Receipt, and Sales Invoice (POS) is made.
+
+#### Stock Reconciliation
+
+Update Stock of multiple Items from a spreadsheet (CSV) file.
+
+> Stock > Stock Reconciliation
+
+#### Quality Inspection
+
+A note prepared to record certain parameters of an Item at the time of Receipt
+from Supplier, or Delivery to Customer.
+
+> Stock > Quality Inspection
+
+#### Item Group
+
+A classification of Item.
+
+> Stock > Setup > Item Group
+
+* * *
+
+### Human Resource Management
+
+#### Employee
+
+Record of a person who has been in present or past, in the employment of the
+company.
+
+> Human Resources > Employee
+
+#### Leave Application
+
+A record of an approved or rejected request for leave.
+
+> Human Resource > Leave Application
+
+#### Leave Type
+
+A type of leave (e.g., Sick Leave, Maternity Leave, etc.).
+
+> Human Resource > Leave and Attendance > Leave Type
+
+#### Process Payroll
+
+A tool that helps in creation of multiple Salary Slips for Employees.
+
+> Human Resource > Salary and Payroll > Process Payroll
+
+#### Salary Slip
+
+A record of the monthly salary given to an Employee.
+
+> Human Resource > Salary Slip
+
+#### Salary Structure
+
+A template identifying all the components of an Employees' salary (earnings),
+tax and other social security deductions.
+
+> Human Resource > Salary and Payroll > Salary Structure
+
+#### Appraisal
+
+A record of the performance of an Employee over a specified period based on
+certain parameters.
+
+> Human Resources > Appraisal
+
+#### Appraisal Template
+
+A template recording the different parameters of an Employees' performance and
+their weightage for a particular role.
+
+> Human Resources > Employee Setup > Appraisal Template
+
+#### Attendance
+
+A record indicating presence or absence of an Employee on a particular day.
+
+> Human Resources > Attendance
+
+* * *
+
+### Manufacturing
+
+#### Bill of Materials (BOM)
+
+A list of Operations and Items with their quantities, that are required to
+produce another Item. A Bill of Materials (BOM) is used to plan purchases and
+do product costing.
+
+> Manufacturing > BOM
+
+#### Workstation
+
+A place where a BOM operation takes place. It is useful to calculate the
+direct cost of the product.
+
+> Manufacturing > Workstation
+
+#### Production Order
+
+A document signaling production (manufacture) of a particular Item with
+specified quantities.
+
+> Manufacturing > Production Order
+
+#### Production Planning Tool
+
+A tool for automatic creation of Production Orders and Purchase Requests based
+on Open Sales Orders in a given period.
+
+> Manufacturing > Production Planning Tool
+
+* * *
+
+### Website
+
+#### Blog Post
+
+A short article that appears in the “Blog” section of the website generated
+from the ERPNext website module. Blog is a short form of “Web Log”.
+
+> Website > Blog Post
+
+#### Web Page
+
+A web page with a unique URL (web address) on the website generated from
+ERPNext.
+
+> Website > Web Page
+
+* * *
+
+### Setup / Customization
+
+#### Custom Field
+
+A user defined field on a form / table.
+
+> Setup > Customize ERPNext > Custom Field
+
+#### Global Defaults
+
+This is the section where you set default values for various parameters of the
+system.
+
+> Setup > Data > Global Defaults
+
+#### Print Heading
+
+A title that can be set on a transaction just for printing. For example, you
+want to print a Quotation with a title “Proposal” or “Pro forma Invoice”.
+
+> Setup > Branding and Printing > Print Headings
+
+#### Terms and Conditions
+
+Text of your terms of contract.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Terms and Conditions
+
+#### Unit of Measure (UOM)
+
+How quantity is measured for an Item. E.g., Kg, No., Pair, Packet, etc.
+
+> Stock > Setup > UOM
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0c2a0a5e48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+ERPNext is a modern tool that covers not only accounting but also all other
+business functions, on an integrated platform. It has many benefits over both
+traditional accounting as well as ERP applications.
+
+### Benefits over traditional accounting software:
+
+ * Do a lot more than just accounting! Manage inventory, billing, quotes, leads, payroll and a lot more.
+ * Keep all your data safe and in one place. Don’t keep hunting for data when you need it across spreadsheets and different computers. Manage everyone on the same page. All users get the same updated data.
+ * Stop repetitive work. Don’t enter the same information from your word processor to your accounting tool. It's all integrated.
+ * Keep track. Get the entire history of a customer or a deal in one place.
+
+### Benefits over big ERPs
+
+ * $$$ - Saves money.
+ * **Easier to configure:** Big ERPs are notoriously hard to setup and will ask you a zillion questions before you can do something meaningful.
+ * **Easier to use:** Modern web like user interface will keep your users happy and in familiar territory.
+ * **Open Source :** This software is always free and you can host it anywhere you like.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5439d513eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+There are many ways to get started with ERPNext.
+
+### 1\. See the Demo
+
+If you want to check out the user interface and **feel** the application, just
+see the demo at:
+
+ * 
+
+We have seen dozens of ERP implementations over the past few years and we
+realize that successful implementation is a lot about intangibles and
+attitude.
+
+**ERPs are not required.**
+
+Like exercise.
+
+Human body may seem like it does not require exercise today or even tomorrow,
+but in the long run, if you wish to maintain your body and its health, you
+should get on the treadmill.
+
+In the same way, ERPs improve the health of your organization over a long run
+by keeping it fit and efficient. The more you delay putting things in order,
+the more time you lose, and the closer you get to a major disaster.
+
+So when you start implementing an ERP, keep your sight on the long term
+benefits. Like exercise, its painful in the short run, but will do wonders if
+you stay on course.
+
+* * *
+
+## The Champion
+
+ERP means organization wide change and it does not happen without effort.
+Every change requires a champion and it is the duty of the champion to
+organize and energize the entire team towards implementation. The champion
+needs to be resilient incase something goes wrong .
+
+In many organizations we have seen, the champion is most often the owner or a
+senior manager. Occasionally, the champion is an outsider who is hired for a
+particular purpose.
+
+In either case, you must identify your champion first.
+
+Most likely it's **you!**
+
+Lets Begin!
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9ddf81ab4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+At the heart of the Manufacturing system is the **Bill of Materials** (BOM).
+The **BOM** is a list of all materials (either bought or made) and operations
+that go into a finished product or sub-Item. In ERPNext, the component could
+have its own BOM hence forming a tree of Items with multiple levels.
+
+To make accurate Purchase Requests, you must always maintain correct BOMs.
+To make a new BOM:
+
+> Manufacturing > Bill of Materials > New BOM
+
+
+
+* To add Operations select 'With Operation'. The Operations table shall appear.
+
+
+
+ * Select the Item for which you want to make the BOM.
+ * Add the operations that you have to go through to make that particular Item in the “Operations” table. For each operation, you will be asked to enter a Workstation. You must create new Workstations as and when necessary.
+ * Workstations are defined only for product costing and Production Order Operations scheduling purposes not inventory.
+ * Inventory is tracked in Warehouses not Workstations.
+
+###Costing of a BOM
+
+* The Costing section in BOM gives an approximate cost of producing the Item.
+
+* Add the list of Items you require for each operation, with its quantity. This Item could be a purchased Item or a sub-assembly with its own BOM. If the row Item is a manufactured Item and has multiple BOMs, select the appropriate BOM. You can also define if a part of the Item goes into scrap.
+
+
+
+* This cost can be updated on by using the 'Update Cost' button.
+
+
+
+### Materials Required(exploded)
+
+This table lists down all the Material required for the Item to be Manufactured.
+It also fetches sub-assemblies along with the quantity.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3fcccf42f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+# Manufacturing
+
+The Manufacturing module in ERPNext helps you to maintain multi-level Bill of
+Materials (BOMs) for your Items.
+It helps in product costing, production planning, creating production orders for your manufacturing shop floors and
+planning inventory by getting your material requirement via BOMs (also called Material Requirements Planning MRP).
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1fe03a6260
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+introduction
+bill-of-materials
+production-order
+workstation
+operation
+subcontracting
+tools
+setup
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/introduction.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/introduction.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2d60e6780b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/introduction.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+
+### Types of Production Planning
+
+Broadly there are three types of Production Planning Systems
+
+ * __Make-to-Stock:__ In these systems, production is planned based on a forecast and the Items are then sold to distributors or customers. All fast moving consumer goods that are sold in retail shops like soaps, packaged water etc and electronics like phones etc are Made-to-Stock.
+ * __Make-to-Order:__ In these systems, manufacturing takes place after a firm order is placed by a customer.
+ * __Engineer-to-Order:__ In this case each sale is a separate project and has to be designed and engineered to the requirements of the customer. Common examples of this are any custom business like furniture, machine tools, speciality devices, metal fabrication etc.
+
+Most small and medium sized manufacturing businesses are based on a make-to-
+order or engineer-to-order system and so is ERPNext.
+
+For engineer-to-order systems, the Manufacturing module should be used along
+with the Projects module..
+
+#### Manufacturing and Inventory
+
+You can track work-in-progress by creating work-in-progress Warehouses.
+
+ERPNext will help you track material movement by automatically creating Stock
+Entries from your Production Orders by building from Bill of Materials.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/operation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/operation.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6c77089438
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/operation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+### Operation
+
+Stores a list of all Manufacturing Operations, its description and the Default Workstation for the Operation.
+
+You can also create a Operation by:
+
+> Manufacturing > Documents > Operation > New
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/production-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/production-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c9729be6f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/production-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+Production Order (also called as Work Order) is a document that is given to
+the manufacturing shop floor by the Production Planner as a signal to produce
+a certain quantity of a certain Item. Production Order also helps to generate
+the material requirements (Stock Entry) for the Item to be produced from its
+**Bill of Materials**.
+
+The **Production Order** is generated from the **Production Planning
+Tool** based on Sales Orders. You can also create a direct Production Order
+by:
+
+> Manufacturing > Documents > Production Order > New
+
+
+
+### Creating Production Orders
+
+ * Select the Item to be produced.
+ * The default BOM for that item will be fetched by the system. You can also change BOM.
+ * If the selected BOM has operartion mentioned in it, the system shall fetch all operations from BOM.
+ * Mention the Planned Start Date (an Estimated Date at which you want the Production to begin.)
+ * Select Warehouses. Work-in-Progress Warehouse is where your Items will be transferred when you begin production and Target Warehouse is where you store finished Items before they are shipped.
+
+> Note : You can save a Production Order without selecting the warehouses, but warehouses are mandatory for submitting a Production Order
+
+###Reassigning Workstation/Duration for Operations
+
+* By default the system fetchs workstation and duration for Production Order Operations from the selected BOM.
+
+
+
+* If you wish to reassign the wrokstation for a particular opeeration in the Production Order, you can do so before submitting the Production Order.
+
+
+
+* Select the respective operation, and change its workstation.
+* You can also change the Operating Time for that operation
+
+### Capacity Planning in Production Order
+
+* When a Production Order is submitted, based on the Planned Start Date and the availability of the workstations, system schedules all operations for the Production Order (if Production Order has operations specified).
+* Drafts of Time Logs are also created based on the scheduled operations.
+
+### Transfering Materials for Manufacturing
+
+* Once you have submitted your Production Order, you need to Transfer the Raw Materials to initiate the Manufacturing Process.
+* This will create a Stock Entry with all the Items required to complete this Production Order to be added to the WIP Warehouse. (this will add sub-Items with BOM as one Item or explode their children based on your setting above).
+
+* Click on 'Transfer Materials for Manufacturing'.
+
+
+
+* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
+
+
+
+* Submit the Stock Entry
+
+
+
+* Material Transfered for Manufacturing will be updated in the Production Order based on the Stock Entry.
+
+
+
+### Making Time Logs
+
+* Progress in the Production Order can be tracked using [Time Log]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/projects/time-log.html)
+* Time Logs are created against Production Order Operations.
+* Drafts of Time Logs are also created based on the scheduled operations when an Production Order is Submitted.
+* To create more Time Logs against an operation select 'Make TIme Log' in the respective operation.
+
+
+
+###Updating Finished Goods
+
+* Once you are done with the Production Order you need to update the Finished Goods.
+* This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
+* Click on 'Update Finished Goods'.
+
+
+
+* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
+
+
+
+ > Tip : You can also partially complete a Production Order by updating the Finished Goods stock creating a Stock Entry.
+
+### Stopping a Production Order
+
+* When you stop a Production Order its status is changed to Stop indicating that all production process against that Production Order is to be ceased.
+* To stop the Production Order click on the 'stop' Button
+
+ 1. On Submitting the Production Order, the system will reserve a slot for each of the Production Order Operations serially after the planned start date based on the workstation availability. The Workstation availability depends on the Workstation timings, holiday list and if some other Production Order Operation was scheduled in that slot. You can mention the number of days for the system to try scheduling the operations in the Manufacturing Settings. This is set to 30 Days by default. If the operation requires time exceeding the available slot, system shall ask you to break the operations. Once the scheduling is done system shall create Time Logs and save them. You can Modify them and submit them later.
+ 2. You can also create additional time logs against an Operation. For doing so select the respective operation and click on 'Make Time Log'
+ 3. Transfer Raw Material: This will create a Stock Entry with all the Items required to complete this Production Order to be added to the WIP Warehouse. (this will add sub-Items with BOM as one Item or explode their children based on your setting above).
+ 4. Update Finished Goods: This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
+ 5. To check all Time Logs made against the Production Order click on 'Show Time Logs'
+
+
+
+* You can Also re-start a stopped Production Order.
+
+> Note : In order to make a Production Order against an Item you must specify 'Yes' to "Allow Production Order" on the Item form.
+
+> Note : In order to make a Production Order against an Item you must specify 'Yes' to "Allow Production Order" on the Item form.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ec22505469
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+Global settings for manufacturing Processes
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..68a2ad8c91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+manufacturing-settings
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eb0a08c5ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+* Manufacturing Settings can be found at
+
+> Manufacturing > Production Order > Setup > Manufacturing Settings
+
+
+
+* Allow Overtime - Specify if workstations are to allow overtime.(schedule operations outside working hours)
+
+* Allow Production on Holidays - Specify if system is to allow scheduling of operations on Holidays.
+
+* Capacity Planning for (Days) - Specify no. of Days for Capacity Planning.
+
+* Time Between Operations (in mins) - Specify the gap between two Production Operations.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/subcontracting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..832e8a2334
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+Subcontracting is a type of job contract that seeks to outsource certain types
+of work to other companies. It allows work on more than one phase of the
+project to be done at once, often leading to a quicker completion.
+Subcontracting is practiced by various industries. For example, manufacturers
+making a number of products from complex components subcontract certain
+components and package them at their facilities.
+
+If your business involves outsourcing certain processes to a third party
+Supplier, where you buy the raw material from, you can track this by using the
+sub-contracting feature of ERPNext.
+
+### Setup Sub-Contracting:
+
+ 1. Create separate Items for the unprocessed and the processed product. For example if you supply unpainted X to your Supplier and the Supplier returns you X, you can create two Items: “X-unpainted” and “X”.
+ 2. Create a Warehouse for your Supplier so that you can keep track of Items supplied. (you may supply a months worth of Items in one go).
+ 3. For the processed Item, in the Item master, set “Is Sub Contracted Item” to “Yes”.
+
+
+
+
+
+__Step 1:__ Make a Bill of Materials for the processed Item, with the unprocessed
+Items as sub-items. For example, If you are manufacturing a pen, the processed
+pen will be named under Bill of Materials(BOM), whereas, the refill, knob, and
+other items which go into the making of pen, will be categorized as sub-items.
+
+__Step 2:__ Make a Purchase Order for the processed Item. When you “Save”, in the “Raw Materials Supplied”, all your un-processed Items will be updated based on your Bill of Materials.
+
+__Step 3:__ Make a Stock Entry to deliver the raw material Items to your Supplier.
+
+__Step 4:__ Receive the Items from your Supplier via Purchase Receipt. Make sure to check the “Consumed Quantity” in the “Raw Materials” table so that the
+correct stock is maintained at the Supplier’s end.
+
+> Note 1: Make sure that the “Rate” of processed Item is the processing rate
+(excluding the raw material rate).
+
+> Note 2: ERPNext will automatically add the raw material rate for your
+valuation purpose when you receive the finished Item in your stock.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8722d2645c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+# BOM Replace Tool
+
+Replace BOM is the utility to replace BOM of sub-assembly item, which is already updated in the BOM of Finished Good item.
+
+To use the Production Planning Tool, go to:
+
+> Manufacturing > Tools > BOM Replace Tool
+
+Let's consider a scenario to understand this better.
+
+If company manufactures computers, Bill of Material of its finished item will constitute of:
+
+1. Monitor
+1. Key Board
+1. Mouse
+1. CPU
+
+Out of all the items above, CPU is asembled separately. Hence separate BOM will be created for the CPU. Following are the items from the BOM of CPU.
+
+1. 250 GB Hard Disk
+1. Mother Board
+1. Processor
+1. SMTP
+1. DVD player
+
+If we have more items to be added , or existing items to be edited in the BOM of CPU, then we should create new BOM for it.
+
+1. _350 GB Hard Disk_
+1. Mother Board
+1. Processor
+1. SMTP
+1. DVD player
+
+To update new BOM updated in the BOM of finished item, where CPU is selected as raw-material, you can use BOM Replace tool.
+
+
+
+In this tool, you should select Current BOM, and New BOM. On clicking Replace button, current BOM of CPU will be replaced with New BOM in the BOM of finished Item (Computer).
+
+**Will BOM Replace Tool work for replacing finsihed item in BOM?**
+
+No. You should Cancel and Amend current BOM, or create a new BOM for finished item.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..259b5ebc42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..aaf7cecc70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+production-planning-tool
+bom-replace-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b966e7a8c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+Production Planning Tool helps you plan production and purchase of Items for a
+period (usually a week or a month).
+
+This list of Items can be generated from the open Sales Orders in the system
+and will generate:
+
+ * Production Orders for each Item.
+ * Purchase Requests for Items whose Projected Quantity is likely to fall below zero.
+
+To use the Production Planning Tool, go to:
+
+> Manufacturing > Tools > Production Planning Tool
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Step 1: Select and get Sales Order
+
+* Select sales orders for MRP using filters (Time, Item, and Customer)
+* Click on Get Sales Order to generate a list.
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Get Item from Sales Orders.
+
+You can add/remove or change quantity of these Items.
+
+
+
+#### Step 3: Create Production Orders
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Step 4: Create Material Request
+
+Create Material Request for Items with projected shortfall.
+
+
+
+
+
+The Production Planning Tool is used in two stages:
+
+ * Selection of Open Sales Orders for the period based on “Expected Delivery Date”.
+ * Selection of Items from those Sales Orders.
+
+The tool will update if you have already created Production Orders for a
+particular Item against its Sales Order (“Planned Quantity”).
+
+You can always edit the Item list and increase / reduce quantities to plan
+your production.
+
+> Note: How do you change a Production Plan? The output of the Production
+Planning Tool is the Production Order. Once your orders are created, you can
+change them by amending the Production Orders.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/workstation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/workstation.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..abc8933f41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/manufacturing/workstation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+### Workstation
+
+Workstation stores information regarding the place where the workstation operations is carried out.
+Data regarding the operation cost of the place can be stored here.
+We can also specify the workstation operation timings and a Holiday List.
+
+You can also create a Workstation by:
+
+> Manufacturing > Documents > Workstation > New
+
+
+
+In workstation specify the workstation working hours under the 'working hour' section.
+You can also specify the working hours based on shifts.
+While scheduling Production Order, system will check for the availability of the workstation based on the working hours specified.
+
+> Note : You can enable overtime for your workstation in [Manufacturing Settings]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.html)
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/activity-cost.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/activity-cost.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3ad95fc14b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/activity-cost.md
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+Activity Cost records the per-hour billing rate and costing rate of an Employee against an Activity Type.
+This rate is pulled by the system while making Time Logs. It is used for Project Costing.
+
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/activity-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/activity-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a59885378f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/activity-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+Activity Type makes a list of the different types of activities against which a Time Log can be made.
+
+
+
+By default the following Activity Types are created.
+
+* Planning
+* Research
+* Proposal Writing
+* Execution
+* Communication
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..220c67fa84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+ERPNext helps you manage your Projects by breaking them into Tasks and
+allocating them to different people.
+
+Purchasing and selling can also be tracked against Projects and this can help
+the company keep tabs on its budget, delivery and profitability for a Project.
+
+Projects can be used to manage internal projects, manufacturing jobs or
+service jobs. For service jobs, Time Sheets can also be created that can be
+used to bill Customers if billing is done on a Time & Money basis.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e5ef847a5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+tasks
+project
+time-log
+time-log-batch
+activity-type
+activity-cost
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/introduction-to-projects.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/introduction-to-projects.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..85a67b94f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/introduction-to-projects.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+ERPNext helps you manage your Projects by breaking them into Tasks and
+allocating them to different people.
+
+Purchasing and selling can also be tracked against Projects and this can help
+the company keep tabs on its budget, delivery and profitability for a Project.
+
+Projects can be used to manage internal projects, manufacturing jobs or
+service jobs. For service jobs, Time Sheets can also be created that can be
+used to bill Customers if billing is done on a Time & Money basis.
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/project.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/project.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9b265c0abb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/project.md
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+Project management in ERPNext is Task driven. You can create Project and assign multiple Tasks against it.
+
+
+
+### Managing tasks
+Project can be divided into multiple Tasks.
+Task can be created via Project document itself or can be created via [Task]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/projects/tasks.html)
+
+
+
+* To view Task made against a Project click on 'Tasks'
+
+
+
+
+
+* You can also view the Tasks from the Project document itself
+
+
+
+### Managing time
+
+ERPNext uses [Time Log]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Project.
+You can create Time Logs against each task.
+The Actual Start and End Time along with the costing shall then be updated based on the Time Log.
+
+* To view Time Log made against a Project click on 'Time Logs'
+
+
+
+
+
+* You can also create a Time Log directlly and link it to the Project.
+
+
+
+### Managing expenses
+
+You can book [Expense Claim]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/human-resources/expense-claim.html) against a project task.
+The system shall update the total amount from expense claims in the project costing section.
+
+* To view Expense Claims made against a Project click on 'Expense Claims'
+
+
+
+* You can also create a Expense Claims directlly and link it to the Project.
+
+
+
+* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a project is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Project Costing Section
+
+
+
+### Cost Center
+
+You can make a [Cost Center]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/accounts/setup/cost-center.html) against a Project or use an existing cost center to track all expenses made against that project.
+
+
+
+###Project Costing
+
+The Project Costing section helps you track the time and expenses incurred against the project.
+
+
+
+* The Costing Section is updated based on Time Logs made.
+
+* Gross Margin is the difference between Total Costing Amount and Total Billing Amount
+
+###Billing
+
+You can make/link a [Sales Order]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/selling/sales-order.html) against a project. Once linked you can use the standard sales module to bill your customer against the Project.
+
+
+
+###Gantt Chart
+
+A Gantt Chart illustrates a project schedule.
+ERPNext gives you a illustrated view of tasks scheduled against that project in Gantt Chart View.
+
+* To view gantt chart against a project, go to that project and click on 'Gantt Chart'
+
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/tasks.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/tasks.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6ee97a0e78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/tasks.md
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+Project is divided into Tasks.
+In ERPNext, you can also create a Task independently.
+
+
+
+### Status of the Task
+
+A Task can have either of the following status - Open, Working, Pending Review, Closed, Cancelled.
+
+
+
+* By default each new Task created shall have the status set to 'Open'.
+
+* If a Time Log is made against a task, its status shall be set to 'Working'.
+
+### Dependent Task
+
+You can specify a list of dependent task under the 'Depends On' section.
+
+
+
+* You cannot close the parent Task until all 'Dependant Task' are closed.
+
+* If the Dependent Task are delayed and overlap with the expected Start Date of the Parent task, the system will reschedule the parent task.
+
+### Managing Time
+
+ERPNext uses [Time Log]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Task.
+You can create multiple Time Logs against each task.
+The Actual Start and End Time along with the costing shall then be updated based on the Time Log.
+
+* To view Time Log made against a Task click on 'Time Logs'
+
+
+
+
+
+* You can also create a Time Log directlly and link it to the Task.
+
+
+
+### Managing Expenses
+
+You can book [Expense Claim]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/human-resource-management/expense-claim.html) against a task.
+The system shall update the total amount from expense claims in the costing section.
+
+* To view Expense Claims made against a Task click on 'Expense Claims'
+
+
+
+* You can also create a Expense Claims directlly and link it to the Task.
+
+
+
+* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a task is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Task Costing Section
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/time-log-batch.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/time-log-batch.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e16383bb94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/time-log-batch.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+You can bill Time Logs by batching them together. This gives you the flexiblity to manage your customer billing in the way you want. To create a new Time Log Batch, go to
+
+> Projects > Time Log Batch > New Time Log Batch
+
+OR
+
+Just open your Time Log list and check the Items to you want to add to the Time Log. Then click on "Make Time Log Batch" button and these Time Logs will be selected.
+
+
+
+###Making Sales Invoice
+
+* After submitting the Time Log Batch, "Make Invoice" button shall appear.
+
+
+
+* Click on that button to raise a Sales Invoice against the Time Log Batch.
+
+
+
+* When you "Submit" the Sales Invoice, the Sales Invoice number will get updated in the Time Logs and Time Log Batch and their status will change to "Billed".
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/time-log.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/time-log.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c1802089aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/projects/time-log.md
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+Time Logs are a way to track time worked.
+They can be used to track the following
+
+* Billable work to Customers
+* Production Order Operations
+* Tasks
+* Project
+* Internal References
+
+
+
+###Creating Time Logs
+
+1. To create a new Time Log, you can go to
+> Projects > Time Log > new Time Log
+
+2. You can also create a new Time Log via Calendar
+
+To create Time Logs via Calender, go to Time Log and select Calendar.
+
+
+
+* To create a Time Log for multiple days, click and drag the cursor across days.
+
+
+
+* You can also create Time Logs from 'week' and 'day' view of the calender.
+
+
+
+* Time Logs for Manufacturing processes needs to be created from the Production Order.
+* To create more Time Logs against Operations select the respective operation and click on the 'Make Time Log' button.
+
+###Billing using Time Logs
+
+* If you wish to bill against a Time Log you need to select the 'Billable' option.
+
+* In the costing section, the system will pull up the Costing & Billing rate from [Activity Cost]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/projects/activity-cost.html)
+ based on the Employee and Activity Type specified.
+
+* The system shall then calculate the Costing and Billing amount based on the Hours mentioned in the Time Log.
+
+* If 'Billable' is not selected, the system shall display the 'Billing Amount' as 0.
+
+
+
+* After submitting the Time Log, you need to create [Time Log batch]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/projects/time-log-batch.html) to further bill the Time Log.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..36a99d2173
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+# Selling
+
+Selling is the communication that happens with the customer prior to and
+during the sale. You might be managing all the communication yourself or you
+may have a small team of sales people to handle this. ERPNext helps you track
+the communication leading up to the sale, by keeping all your documents in an
+organized and searchable manner.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e1d9efd1a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+quotation
+sales-order
+setup
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/quotation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/quotation.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..25590e07ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/quotation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+During a sale, the customer may request for a written note about the products
+or services you are planning to offer, along with the prices and other terms
+of engagement. This is called a “Proposal” or an “Estimate” or a “Pro Forma
+Invoice”or a Quotation.
+
+To create a new Quotation go to:
+
+> Selling > Quotation > New Quotation
+
+###Creating Quotation from Oppurtunity
+
+You can also create a Quotation from an Opportunity.
+
+
+
+Or You can create a new Quotation and pull details from an Opportunity.
+
+
+
+A Quotation contains details about:
+
+ * The recipient of the Quotation
+ * The Items and quantities you are offering.
+ * The rates at which they are offered. For details refer
+ * The taxes applicable.
+ * Other charges (like shipping, insurance) if applicable.
+ * The validity of contract.
+ * The time of delivery.
+ * Other conditions.
+
+> Tip: Images look great on Quotations. To add images to your Quotations,
+attach the corresponding image in the Item master.
+
+### Rates
+
+The rates you quote may depend on two things.
+
+ * The Price List: If you have multiple Price Lists, you can select a Price List or tag it to the Customer (so that it is auto-selected). Your Item prices will automatically be updated from the Price List.For details refer [Price List]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/price-lists.html)
+
+ * The Currency: If you are quoting to a Customer in a different currency, you will have to update the conversion rates to enable ERPNext to save the information in your standard Currency. This will help you to analyze the value of your Quotations in standard Currency.
+
+### Taxes
+
+To add taxes to your Quotation, you can either select a tax template, Sales
+Taxes and Charges Template or add the taxes on your own. To understand taxes in
+detail visit [Taxes]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html)
+
+You can add taxes in the same manner as the Sales Taxes and Charges Template.
+
+### Terms and Conditions
+
+Each Quotation must ideally contain a set of terms, of your contract. It is
+usually a good idea to make templates of your Terms and Conditions, so that
+you have a standard set of terms. You can do this by going to:
+
+> Selling > Terms and Conditions
+
+#### What should Terms and Conditions Contain?
+
+ * Validity of the offer.
+ * Payment Terms (In Advance, On Credit, part advance etc).
+ * What is extra (or payable by the Customer).
+ * Safety / usage warning.
+ * Warranty if any.
+ * Returns Policy.
+ * Terms of shipping, if applicable.
+ * Ways of addressing disputes, indemnity, liability, etc.
+ * Address and Contact of your Company.
+
+### Submission
+
+Quotation is a “Submittable” transaction. Since you send this Quotation to
+your Customer or Lead, you must freeze it so that changes are not made after
+you send the Quotation. See Document Stages.
+
+> Tip: Quotations can also be titled as “Proforma Invoice” or “Proposal”.
+Select the right heading in the “Print Heading” field in the “More Info”
+section. To create new Print Headings go to Setup > Branding and Printing >
+Print Headings.
+
+### Discount
+
+While making your sales transactions like a Quotation (or Sales Order) you
+would already have noticed that there is a “Discount” column. On the left is
+the “Price List Rate” on the right is the “Basic Rate”. You can add a
+“Discount” value to update the basic rate. To understand more about discount
+read [Discount.](http://erpnext.org/discount)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/sales-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/sales-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b1438eb34b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/sales-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+# Sales Order
+
+The Sales Order confirms your sales and triggers purchase (**Material
+Request**) shipment (**Delivery Note**), billing (**Sales Invoice**) and
+manufacturing (**Production Plan**)
+
+A Sales Order is usually a binding Contract with your Customer.
+
+Once your customer confirms the Quotation you can convert your Quotation into
+a Sales Order.
+
+### Sales Order Flow-Chart
+
+
+
+To create a new Sales Order go to:
+
+> Selling > Sales Order > New Sales Order
+
+### Creating Sales Order from Quotation
+
+You can also create a Sales Order from a submitted Quotation.
+
+
+
+Or you can create a new Sales Order and pull details from an Quotation.
+
+
+
+Most of the information in your Sales Order is the same as the Quotation.
+There are a few amongst other things that a Sales Order will ask you to
+update.
+
+ * Expected date of delivery.
+ * Customer Purchase Order number: If your customer has sent you a Purchase Order, you can update its number for future reference (in billing).
+
+### Packing List
+
+The “Packing List” table will be automatically updated when you “Save” the
+Sales Order. If any Items in your table are Product Bundle (packets), then the
+“Packing List” will contain the exploded (detailed) list of your Items.
+
+### Reservation and Warehouses
+
+If your Sales Order contains Items for which inventory is tracked (Is Stock
+Item is “Yes”) then, ERPNext will ask you for “Reservation Warehouse”. If you
+have set a default Warehouse for the Item, it will automatically set this
+Warehouse here.
+
+This “reserved” quantity will help you project what is the quantity you need
+to purchase based on all your commitments.
+
+### Sales Team
+
+**Sales Partner:** If this Sale was booked via a Sales Partner, you can update the Sales Partner’s details with commission and other info that you can aggregate.
+
+**Sales Persons:** ERPNext allows you to tag multiple Sales Persons who may have worked on this deal. You can also split the amount in targets of different Sales Persons and track how much incentives they earned on this deal.
+
+### Recurring Sales Orders
+
+If you have a recurring contract with a Customer where you are required to generate a Sales Order on a monthly, quarterly, half-yearly or annual basis, you can check the “Convert To Recurring Order” box.
+
+Here you can fill in the details like; of how frequently you want to generate an Order in the 'Recurring Type' field, specify the day of of the month on which the Order needs to be generated in the 'Repeat On Day Of Month' field and the date on which the recurring orders should stop in the 'End Date' field.
+
+**Recurring Type:** Here you can update how frequently you want to generate an Order.
+
+**Repeat On Day Of Month:** You can specify the day of of the month on which the Order needs to be generated.
+
+**End Date:** The date on which the recurring orders should stop can be specified here.
+
+On updating the Sales Order, a Recurring ID will be generated which will be same for all recurring orders generated from this particular Sales Order.
+
+ERPNext will automatically create new Order and mail a notification to the email IDs you set in the 'Notification Email Address'field.
+
+
+
+### Next Steps
+
+Once you “Submit” your Sales Order, you can now trigger different aspects of
+your organization:
+
+ * To begin purchase click on “Make Purchase Request”
+ * To make a shipment entry click on “Make Delivery Note”
+ * To bill, make “Make Sales Invoice”
+ * To stop further process on this Sales Order, click on “Stop”
+
+### Submission
+
+Sales Order is a “Submittable” transaction. See Document Stages. You will be
+able to execute dependent steps (like making a Delivery Note) only after
+“Submitting” this Sales Order.
+
+### Sales Order with Order type Maintenance
+
+When the 'Order Type' of the Sales Order is 'Maintenance' follow the steps
+given below:
+
+__Step 1:__ Enter Currency, Price list and Item details.
+
+__Step 2:__ Mention taxes and other information.
+
+__Step 3:__ Save and Submit the form
+
+__Step 4:__ Once the form is submitted, the Action button will provide three
+choices.i) Maintenance Visit ii) Maintenance Schedule iii) Invoice.
+
+
+
+> **Note 1:**
+By clicking on the Action button and selecting 'Maintenance Visit' you can directly fill the visit form. The Sales Order details will be fetched directly.
+
+> **Note 2:**
+By clicking on the Action button and selecting 'Maintenance Schedule' you can fill the schedule details. The Sales Order details will be fetched directly.
+
+> **Note 3:**
+By clicking on the Invoice button you can make an Invoice for your
+services . The sales orders details will be fetched directly.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0ab4b5ab0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+This section includes information on how to setup customer groups, sales partners, sales persons and terms and conditions.
+
+It has instructions on how to configure selling settings, in order to enable default fields.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..245c1a90bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+selling-settings
+sales-partner
+shipping-rule
+product-bundle
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/item-price.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/item-price.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a235341cef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/item-price.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+Item Price is the record in which you can log sellig and buying rate of an item.
+
+There are two ways to reach to new Item Price form.
+
+> Selling/Buying/Stock >> Setup >> Item Price >> New Item Price
+
+Or
+
+> Item >> Add/Edit Prices >> Click on "+" >> New Item Price
+
+Following are the steps to create new Item Price.
+
+Step 1: Select Price List
+
+You can create multiple Price List in ERPNext to track Selling and Buying Price List of an item separtely. Also if item's selling prices id changing based on territory, or due to other criteria, you can create multiple selling Price List for it.
+
+
+
+On selection of Price List, its currency and for selling or buying property will be fetched as well.
+
+To have Item Price fetching in the sales or purchase transaction, you should have Price List id selected in the transaction, just above Item table.
+
+Step 2: Select Item
+
+Select item for which Item Price record is to be created. On selection of Item Code, Item Name and Description will be fetched as well.
+
+
+
+Step 3: Enter Rate
+
+Enter selling/buying rate of an item in Price List currency.
+
+
+
+Step 4: Save Item Price
+
+To check all Item Price together, go to:
+
+Stock >> Main Report >> Itemwise Price List Rate
+
+You will find option to create new Item Price record (+) in this report as well.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/product-bundle.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bb11b98051
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+#Product Bundle
+
+Product Bundle stands for Sales Bill-of-Material. It's a master where you can list item which are bundled together and
+sold as one item. For instance, when laptop is delivered, you need to ensure that charger, mouse and laptop bag are
+delivered and stock level of these items gets affected. To address this scenario, you can set create Product Bundle for
+the main item, i.e. laptop, and list deliverable items i.e. laptop + charger + other accessories as child items.
+
+Following are the steps on how to setup Product Bundle master, and how is it used in the sales transactions.
+
+####Create new Product Bundle
+
+To create new Product Bundle, Go to:
+
+Selling > Setup > Product Bundle > New
+
+
+
+###Select Parent Item
+
+In Product Bundle master, there are two sections. Product Bundle Item and Package Item.
+
+In Product Bundle item, you will select a Parent Item. The parent item must be a non-stock item.
+This is non-stock item because there is no stock maintained for it but only the Package Items.
+If you want to maintain stock for the Parent Item, then you must create a regular Bill of Material (BOM)
+and package them using a Stock Entry Transactions.
+
+###Select Child Items
+
+In Package Item section, you will list all the child items for which we maintain stock and is delivered to customer.
+
+###Product Bundle in the Sales Transactions
+
+When making Sales transactions like Sales Invoice, Sales Order and Delivery Note,
+Parent Item will be selected in the main item table.
+
+
+
+On selection on Parent Item in the main item table, its child items will be fetched in Packing List
+table of the transaction. If child item is the serialized item, you will be able to specify its Serial Mo.
+in packing List table itself. On submission of transaction, system will reduce the stock level of child items from
+warehouse specified in Packing List table.
+
+
+
+You can track their address and contact details and also allocate Sales Partner for each Item Group, based on Qty and Amount.
+
+### Including Sales Partners in Your Website
+
+To include the name of your Partner on your website, check the "Show in
+Website" box. When click on "Show in Website", you will see field where you can attach logo of partner's company and enter brief and introduction of partner.
+
+
+
+To see listing of partner, you should go to:
+
+https://example.erpnext.com/partners
+
+
+
+Following is the complete partners details published on the website.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..812e7aca04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+With management of Sales Person, ERPNext also allow you to assign target to Sales Persons based on Item Group and Territory. Based on target allocated and actual sales booked by Sales Person, you will get target variance report for the Sales Person.
+
+###1. Sales Person - Item Groupwise Target Allocation
+
+####1.1 Open Sales Person's Master
+
+To allocate target, you should open specific Sales Person master.
+
+`Selling > Setup > Sales Person > (Open Sales Person)`
+
+####1.2 Allocate Item Groupwise Target
+
+In the Sales Person master, you will find table called Sales Person Target.
+
+
+
+In this table, you should select Item Group, Fiscal Year, Target Qty and Amount.
+
+
+
+####1. Customer Naming By
+
+When customer is saved, system generated unique ID for that Customer. Using that Customer ID,
+you can select Customer in other transactions.
+
+Bydefault Customer will be saved with Customer Name. If you wish to save Customer using
+a naming series, you should set Customer Naming By as "Naming Series".
+
+Example of Customer Id's saved in Naming Series - `CUST00001,CUST00002, CUST00003...` and so on.
+
+You can set Naming Series for customer naming from:
+
+> Setup > Settings > Naming Series`
+
+####2. Campaign Naming By
+
+Just like for Customer, you can also configure as how ID will be generated for the Campaign master.
+Bydefault Campaign will be saved with Campaign Name provided while its creation.
+
+####3. Default Customer Group
+
+Customer Group in this field will be auto-updated when you open new Customer form.
+While converting Quotation created for Lead into Sales Order, system attempts to convert
+Lead into Customer in the backend. While creating Customer in the backend, system pickup
+Customer Group and Territory as defined in the Selling Setting. If system doesn't find
+any values, then following validation message will be raised.
+To resolve this, you should:
+Either manually convert Lead into Customer, and define Customer Group and Territory manually while
+creating Customer or define Default Customer Group and Territory in the Selling Setting.
+Then you should have Lead automatically converted into Customer when convert Quotation into Sales Order.
+
+####4. Default Territory
+
+Territory defined in this field will be auto-updated in the Territory field of Customer master.
+
+Just like Customer Group, Territory is also checked when system tries creating Customer in the backend.
+
+####5. Default Price List
+
+Price List set in this field will be auto-updated in the Price List field of Sales transactions.
+
+####6. Sales Order Required
+
+If you wish to make Sales Order creation mandatory before creation of Sales Invoice, then you should
+set Sales Order Required field as Yes. Bydefault, this will be "No" for a value.
+
+####7. Delivery Note Required
+
+To make Delivery Note creation as mandatory before Sales Invoice creation, you should set
+this field as "Yes". It will be "No" by default.
+
+####8. Maintain Same Rate Throughout Sales Cycle
+
+System bydefault validates that item price will be same throughout sales cycle
+(Sales Order - Delivery Note - Sales Invoice). If you could have item price changing within the cycle,
+and you need to bypass validation of same rate throughout cycle, then you should uncheck this field and save.
+
+####9. Allow User to Edit Price List Rate in Transaction
+
+Item table of the sale transactions has field called Price List Rate. This field be non-editale
+by default in all the sales transactions. This is to ensure that price of an item is fetched from
+Item Price record, and user is not able to edit it.
+
+If you need to enable user to edit Item Price, fetched from Price List of an item, you should uncheck this field.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7fc24f1961
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+Using Shipping Rule you can define the cost for delivering the product to the customer.
+You can define different shipping rules for the same item across different territories.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/authorization-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3afdd79865
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+Authorization Rule is a tool to define rule for conditional authorization.
+
+If you sales and purchase transactions of higher value or discount requires an authorization from senior manager, you can set authorization rule for it.
+
+To create new Authorization Rule, go to:
+
+> Setup > Customize > Authorization Rule
+
+Let's consider an example of Authorization Rule to learn better.
+
+Assume that Sales Manager needs to authorize Sales Orders, only if its Grand Total value exceeds 10000. If Sales Orer values is less than 10000, then even Sales User will be able to submit it. It means Submit permision of Sales User will be restricted only upto Sales Order of Grand Total less than 10000.
+
+**Step 1:**
+
+Open new Authorization Rule
+
+**Step 2:**
+
+Select Company and Transaction on which Authorization Rule will be applicable. This functionality is available for limited transactions only.
+
+**Step 3:**
+
+Select Based On. Authorization Rule will be applied based on value selected in this field.
+
+**Step 4:**
+
+Select Role on whom this Authorization Rule will be applicable. As per the example considered, Sales User will be selected as Application To (Role). To be more specific you can also select Applicale To User, if you wish to apply to rule for specific Sales User, and not all Sales User. Its okay to not select Sales User, as its not mandatory.
+
+**Step 5:**
+
+Select approvers Role. It will be Sales Manager role which if assigned to user, will be able to submit Sales Order above 10000. Also you can select specific Sales Manager, and then rule should be applicable for that User only. Selecting Approving User field is not mandatory.
+
+**Step 6:**
+
+Set Above Value. Given the exmaple, Above Value will be set as 10000.
+
+
+
+If Sales User tries submitting Sales Order of value higher than 10000, then he will get error message.
+
+>If you wish to restrict Sales User from submitting Sales Orders, then instead of creating Authorization Rule, you should remove submit previledge from Role Permission Manager for Sales User.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/bar-code.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/bar-code.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0f54d9784c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/bar-code.md
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+A Barcode is a machine-readable code in the form of numbers and a pattern of
+parallel lines of varying widths, printed on a commodity and used especially
+for stock control.
+
+When you purchase an item from any store, you will notice a label with thin,
+black lines across it, along with a variation of different numbers. This label
+is then scanned by the cashier, and the item's description and price
+automatically comes up. This set of lines and numbers on the label are termed
+as bar-code.
+
+A bar-code machine scans the number from the label of an Item. To work with
+ERPNext and the bar-code mechanism, connect the bar-code machine to your
+operating hardware. Then go to ERPNext setup and activate bar-code by going to
+tools and clicking on 'hide / unhide features'. Under Materials, feature
+setup, check the box that says Item Barcode.
+
+> Setup > Customize > Hide/ Unhide Features > Item Barcode.
+
+#### Figure 1: Check the box 'Item Barcode'
+
+
+
+
+To start scanning with a bar-code, go to
+
+> Accounts > Sales Invoice
+
+Under Item, click on Add new row. The item row will expand to show new fields.
+Place your cursor on the bar-code field and begin scanning. The bar-code will
+be updated in the field. Once the bar-code is entered, all the Item details
+will be fetched automatically by the system.
+
+For more ease, activate the POS view in ERPnext. The activation process is
+same as the bar-code activation. Go to Setup and click on 'hide/unhide
+features'. Check the 'POS view' box.
+
+Then go to Accounts and click on Sales Invoice. Check the box 'Is POS'
+
+
+#### Figure 2: Check the box 'Is POS'
+
+
+
+
+Go to Item and click on Add new row.
+
+The cursor will automatically be placed in the bar-code field. Thus you can
+immediately scan the bar-code and proceed with your operations.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/calculate-incentive-for-sales-team.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/calculate-incentive-for-sales-team.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..72f36c04b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/calculate-incentive-for-sales-team.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+Can be used in any Sales Transaction with **Sales Team** Table:
+
+
+
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_validate = function(doc) {
+ // calculate incentives for each person on the deal
+ total_incentive = 0
+ $.each(wn.model.get("Sales Team", {parent:doc.name}), function(i, d) {
+
+ // calculate incentive
+ var incentive_percent = 2;
+ if(doc.grand_total > 400) incentive_percent = 4;
+
+ // actual incentive
+ d.incentives = flt(doc.grand_total) * incentive_percent / 100;
+ total_incentive += flt(d.incentives)
+ });
+
+ doc.total_incentive = total_incentive;
+ }
+
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/company-setup.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/company-setup.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e73aa25c19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/company-setup.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+Enter your company details to complete Company Setup. Mention the type of
+business, under Domain. You can enter manufacturing, retail, or services
+depending on the nature of your business activity. If you have more than one
+companies, create the setup under the Company Setup page.
+
+After clicking on Setup, go to Masters and click on Company.
+
+> Setup > Masters > Company > New Company
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2aec08be35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+# Bulk Renaming of Records
+
+You can rename a document if ERPNext (if it is allowed) by going to **Menu > Rename** in the document.
+
+Alternatively, if you want to rename a whole bunch of records, just go to:
+
+> Setup > Data > Rename Tool
+
+This tool will allow you to rename multiple records at the same time.
+
+### Example
+
+To rename multiple records, upload a **.csv** file with the old name in the first column and the new name in the second column and click on **Upload**.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2a7eff11ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+The Data Import Tool is a great way to upload (or edit) bulk data, specially
+master data, into the system.
+
+To Open the data import tool, you either go to Setup or go to the Transaction
+you want to Import. If Data Import is allowed, you will see an Import Button:
+
+
+
+The tool has two sections, one to download a template and the second to upload
+the data.
+
+(Note: Only those DocTypes are allowed for Import whose Document Type is
+"Master" or Allow Import property is set.)
+
+### 1\. Downloading The Template
+
+Data in ERPNext is stored in tables, much like a spreadsheet with columns and
+rows of data. Each entity in ERPNext can have multiple child tables associated
+with it too. The child tables are linked to the parent tables and are
+implemented where there are multiple values for any property. For example an
+Item can have multiple prices, An Invoice has multiple Items and so on.
+
+
+
+ * Click on the table you want to download or "All Tables"
+ * For bulk editing, you can click on "Download With Data"
+
+### 2\. Fill in the Template
+
+After downloading the template, open it in a spreadsheet application and fill
+in the data below the column headings.
+
+
+
+Then export your template or save it as a **Comma Separated Values** (CSV)
+file.
+
+
+
+### 3\. Upload the .csv File
+
+Finally attach the .csv file in the section. Click on the "Upload and Import"
+button.
+
+
+
+#### Notes:
+
+1. Make sure that if your application allows, use encoding as UTF-8.
+1. Keep the ID column blank for new records.
+
+### 4\. Uploading All Tables (Main + Child)
+
+If you select all tables, you will get columns belonging to all the tables in
+one row separated by `~` columns.
+
+If you have multiple child rows then you must start a new main item on a new
+row. See the example:
+
+
+ Main Table ~ Child Table
+ Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 ~ Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
+ v11 v12 v13 c11 c12 c13
+ c14 c15 c17
+ v21 v22 v23 c21 c22 c23
+
+> To see how its done, enter a few records manually using forms and export
+"All Tables" with "Download with Data"
+
+### 5\. Overwriting
+
+ERPNext also allows you to overwrite all / certain columns. If you want to
+update certain columns, you can download the template with data. Remember to
+check on the “Overwrite” box before uploading.
+
+> Note: For child records, if you select Overwrite, it will delete all the
+child records of that parent.
+
+### 6\. Upload Limitations
+
+ERPNext restricts the amount of data you can upload in one file. Though the
+number may vary based on the type of data. It is usually safe to upload around
+1000 rows of a table at one go. If the system will not accept, then you will
+see an error.
+
+Why is this? Uploading a lot of data can cause your system to crash, specially
+if there are other users doing things in parallel. Hence ERPNext restricts the
+number of “writes” you can process in one request.
+
+***
+
+#### How to Attach files?
+
+When you open a form, on the right sidebar, you will see a section to attach
+files. Click on “Add” and select the file you want to attach. Click on
+“Upload” and you are set.
+
+#### What is a CSV file?
+
+A CSV (Comma Separated Value) file is a data file that you can upload into
+ERPNext to update various data. Any spreadsheet file from popular spreadsheet
+applications like MS Excel or Open Office Spreadsheet can be saved as a CSV
+file.
+
+If you are using Microsoft Excel and using non-English characters, make sure
+to save your file encoded as UTF-8. For older versions of Excel, there is no
+clear way of saving as UTF-8. So save your file as a CSV, then open it in
+Notepad, and save as “UTF-8”. (Sorry blame Microsoft for this!)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..60942fd4b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+# Data Management
+
+You can import, export bulk edit data from and to spreadsheet files (**.csv**) from the Data Import Export Tool. This tool will be very helpful initially to setup your data from other systems.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..998b5a2164
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/data/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+data-import-tool
+bulk-rename
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-account.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-account.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..37ceddb7c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-account.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+# Email Accounts
+
+You can manage multiple incoming and outgoing Email Accounts in ERPNext. There has to be atleast one default outgoing account and one default incoming account. If you are on the ERPNext cloud, the default outgoing email is set by us.
+
+> **Note for self implementers:** For outgoing emails, you should setup your own SMTP server or sign up with an SMTP relay service like mandrill.com or sendgrid.com that allows a larger number of transactional emails to be sent. Regular email services like GMail will restrict you to a limited number of emails per day.
+
+### Default Email Accounts
+
+ERPNext will create templates for a bunch of email accounts by default. Not all of them are enabled. To enable them, you must set your account details.
+
+There are 2 types of email accounts, outgoing and incoming. Outgoing email accounts use an SMTP service to send emails and emails are retrived from your inbox using a POP service. Most email providers such as GMail, Outlook or Yahoo provide these services.
+
+
+
+### Outgoing Email Accounts
+
+All emails sent from the system, either by the user to a contact or notifications or transaction emails, will be sent from an Outgoing Email Account.
+
+To setup an outgoing Email Account, check on **Enable Outgoing** and set your SMTP server settings, if you are using a popular email service, these will be preset for you.
+
+
+
+### Incoming Email Accounts
+
+To setup an incoming Email Account, check on **Enable Incoming** and set your POP3 settings, if you are using a popular email service, these will be preset for you.
+
+
+
+### How ERPNext handles replies
+
+In ERPNext when you send an email to a contact like a customer, the sender will be the user who sent the email. In the **Reply-To** property, the email id will be of the default incoming account (like `replies@yourcompany.com`). ERPNext will automatically extract these emails from the incoming account and tag it to the relvant communication
+
+### Notification for unreplied messages
+
+If you would like ERPNext to notify you if an email is unreplied for a certain amount of time, then you can set **Notify if Unreplied**. Here you can set the number of minutes to wait before notifications are sent and whom the notifications must go to.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4b1dad6ffe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+# Email Alerts
+
+You can configure various email alerts in your system to remind you of important activities such as:
+
+1. Completion date of a Task.
+1. Expected Delivery Date of a Sales Order.
+1. Expected Payment Date.
+1. Reminder of followup.
+1. If an Order greater than a particular value is received or sent.
+1. Expiry notification for a Contract.
+1. Completion / Status change of a Task.
+
+For this, you need to setup an Email Alert.
+
+> Setup > Email > Email Alert
+
+### Setting Up An Alert
+
+To setup an Email Alert:
+
+1. Select which Document Type you want watch changes on
+1. Define what events you want to watch. Events are:
+ 1. New: When a new document of the selected type is made.
+ 2. Save / Submit / Cancel: When a document of the selected type is saved, submitted, cancelled.
+ 3. Value Change: When a particular value in the selected type changes.
+ 4. Days Before / Days After: Trigger this alert a few days before or after the **Reference Date.** To set the days, set **Days Before or After**. This can be useful in reminding you of upcoming due dates or reminding you to follow up on certain leads of quotations.
+1. Set additional conditions if you want.
+1. Set the recipients of this alert. The recipient could either be a field of the document or a list of fixed email ids.
+1. Compose the message
+
+---
+
+### Example
+
+1. Defining the Criteria
+ 
+
+1. Setting the Recipients and Message
+ 
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-digest.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..390c566b8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+# Email Digest
+
+Email Digests allow you to get regular updates about your sales, expenses and other critical numbers directly in your Inbox.
+
+Email Digests are a great way for top managers to keep track of the big numbers like “Sales Booked” or “Amount Collected” or “Invoices Raised” etc.
+
+To set up Email Digest, go to:
+
+> Setup > Email > Email Digest
+
+## Example
+
+Set your frequency, check all the items you want to receive in your weekly update and select the user ids whom you want to send the Digest to.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..74ef1cc409
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+# Email
+
+Email is at the heart of electronic communication and ERPNext is deeply integrated with Email. You can create multiple email accounts, automatically create transactions like Lead, Issue from incoming emails, send documents to your contacts via ERPnext. You can also setup email digests and email alerts to send you reminders.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..01061d03f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+email-account
+email-alerts
+email-digest
+sending-email
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/sending-email.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..61a76c5807
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+# Sending Email from any Document
+
+In ERPNext you can send any document as email (with a PDF attachment) by clicking on `Menu > Email` from any open document.
+
+
+
+**Note:** You must have outgoing [email accounts]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/email/email-account.html) setup for this.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/setting-up-email.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/setting-up-email.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0fb4658765
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/email/setting-up-email.md
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+Emails are the nervous system of business communication and ERPNext has been
+designed to make good use of this.
+
+## Sending Emails
+
+You can email any document from the system, by clicking on the “Email” button
+on the right sidebar. Before that you will need to set your outgoing email
+settings (SMTP server).
+
+All emails sent from the system are added to the Communication table.
+
+> **Info:** What is SMTP? There are two types of email services, sending and
+receiving emails. Sending is done via a protocol called SMTP (Simple Mail
+Transfer Protocol) and the server (computer) that sends your email to its
+destination is called SMTP Server.
+
+
+Bulk Emails, especially those that are sent without consent (spam), are considered as bad behavior. While it may be okay to send emails to those who have “opted-in” to receive mails, it is very difficult for the internet community to know what is spam and what is allowed. To overcome this problem, most email servers share a black and white list of email senders. If your emails have been marked as spam, you will be blacklisted. So be careful. Many times, it may be a good idea to send email via whitelisted services also known as SMTP relay services which are paid services.These
+services will block you from sending spam while ensuring that most of your email does not go in the spam folder. There are many such services available like SendGrid and SMTP.com.
+
+To setup your outgoing mails, go to
+
+> Setup > Outgoing Email Settings
+
+#### Figure 1: Set up outgoing mail server.
+
+
+
+Set your outgoing mail server settings here. These are the same settings you
+would use in your Outlook, Thunderbird, Apple Mail or other such email
+applications. If you are not sure, get in touch with your email service
+provider.
+
+> **Tip:** If you are using EPRNext hosted service, keep the first section
+blank. Emails will still be sent from your email id, but via our SMTP relay
+service.
+
+### Creating Issues from Incoming Emails
+
+A very useful email integration is to sync the incoming emails from support
+inbox into Issue, so that you can track, assign and monitor support
+issues.
+
+> **Case Study:** Here at ERPNext, we have regularly tracked incoming support
+issues via email at “support@erpnext.com”. At the time of writing we had
+answered more than 3000 tickets via this system.
+
+To setup your Support integration, go to:
+
+> Setup > Support Email Settings
+
+#### Figure 2: Setup support Integration
+
+
+
+To make ERPNext pull emails from your mail box, enter the POP3 settings. (POP3
+is a way of extracting emails from your mailbox. It should be fairly easy to
+find out what your POP3 settings are. If you have problems, contact your email
+service provider). If you want to setup an auto reply, check on the “Send
+Autoreply” box and whenever someone sends an email, an autoreply will be sent.
+Add a custom signature which you want to send with your replies.
+
+### Setting Auto-notification on Documents
+
+ERPNext allows you to automatically email documents on “Submission” to the
+contact mentioned in the document. To set this up, go to:
+
+> Setup > Tools > Enable / Disable Notifications.
+
+#### Figure 3: Set Auto Notification
+
+
+
+Check on the transactions you want to send via email directly on Submission
+and add a custom message if you want on these documents.
+
+### Email Digests
+
+Email Digests allow you to get regular updates about your sales, expenses and
+other critical numbers directly in your Inbox.
+
+Set your frequency, check all the items you want to receive in your weekly
+update and select the user ids whom you want to send the Digest to.
+
+Email Digests are a great way for top managers to keep track of the big
+numbers like “Sales Booked” or “Amount Collected” or “Invoices Raised” etc.
+
+To setup Email Digests, go to:
+
+> Setup > Email Digest > New Email Digest
+
+#### Figure 4: Set up Email Digest
+
+
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9f5de0fc60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+# Setting Up
+
+Setting up an ERP system is like starting your business all over again,
+although in the virtual world. Thankfully it is not as hard as the real
+business and you get to do a trial too!
+
+Implementation requires the implementer to take a step back and set aside some
+time to do this right. This is usually not a couple-of-hours, after-work kind
+of a project.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cbd14e5dab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+setup-wizard
+users-and-permissions
+settings
+data
+email
+print
+setting-up-taxes
+pos-setting
+price-lists
+authorization-rule
+sms-setting
+stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item
+territory
+third-party-backups
+workflows
+bar-code
+company-setup
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/pos-setting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/pos-setting.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8380877e04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/pos-setting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+# Point of Sale Setting
+
+POS includes advanced features to cater to different functionality, such as
+inventory management, CRM, financials, warehousing, etc., all built into the
+POS software. Prior to the modern POS, all of these functions were done
+independently and required the manual re-keying of information, which could
+lead to entry errors.
+
+If you are in retail operations, you want your Point of Sale to be as quick
+and efficient as possible. To do this, you can create a POS Setting for a user
+from:
+
+> Accounts > Setup > Point-of-Sale Setting
+
+Set default values as defined.
+
+
+
+> Important : If you specify a particular User, the POS setting will be
+applied only to that User. If the User option is left blank, the setting will
+be set for all users. To understand POS in detail visit [Point of Sale]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.html)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/price-lists.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/price-lists.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2acd83dbb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/price-lists.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+ERPNext lets you maintain multiple selling and buying prices for an Item using Price Lists. A PriceList is a name you can give to a set of Item prices.
+
+Why would you want Price Lists? You have different prices for different zones (based on the shipping costs), for different currencies etc.
+
+An Item can have multiple prices based on customer, currency, region, shipping cost etc, which can be stored as different rate plans. In ERPNext, you are required to store all the lists separately. Buying Price List is different from Selling Price List and thus is stored separately.
+
+You can create new Price List
+
+> Selling/Buying/Stock > Setup > Price List >> New
+
+
+
+* These Price List will be used when creating Item Price record to track selling or buying price of an item. Click here to learn more about Item Price.
+
+* To disable specific Price List, uncheck Enabled field in it. Disabled Price List will not be availale for selection in the Sales and Purchase transactions.
+
+* Standard Buying and Selling Price List are created by default.
+
+To disable specific Price List, uncheck Enabled field in it. Disabled Price List will not be availale for selection in the Sales and Purchase transactions.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/address-template.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/address-template.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..70682b2e9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/address-template.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+# Address Template
+
+Each region has its own way of defining Addresses. To manage multiple address formats for your Documents (like Quotation, Purchase Invoice etc.), you can create country-wise **Address Templates**.
+
+> Setup > Printing and Branding > Address Template
+
+A default Address Template is created when you setup the system. You can either edit or update it or create a new template.
+
+One template is default and will apply to all countries that do not have an specific template.
+
+#### Template
+
+The templating engine is based on HTML and the [Jinja Templating](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/) system and all the fields (including Custom Fields) will be available for creating the template.
+
+Here is the default template:
+
+ {{ address_line1 }}
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1204cbce26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+# Printing and Branding
+
+Documents that you send to your customers carry your brand and image and they must be tailored to your requirements. ERPNext gives you many options so that you can set your oraganization's branding in your documents.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0ddb2170cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+print-settings
+print-format-builder
+print-headings
+letter-head
+address-template
+terms-and-conditions
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/letter-head.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1e69540d13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+# Letter Heads
+
+You can manage multiple letter heads in ERPNext. In a letter head you can:
+
+ * Create an image with your logo, brand and other information that you want to put on your letter head.
+ * Attach the image in your Letter Head record by clicking on image icon to automatically generate the HTML required for this Letter Head.
+ * If you want to make this the default letter head, click on “Is Default”.
+
+Your letter head will now appear in all Prints and Emails of documents.
+
+You can create / manage Letter Heads from:
+
+> Setup > Printing > Letter Head > New Letter Head
+
+### Example
+
+
+
+This is how the letter head looks in a document print:
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3af05f5e1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+# Print Format Builder
+
+The Print Format Builder helps you quickly make a simple customized Print Format by dragging and dropping data fields and adding custom text or HTML.
+
+You can create a new Print Format either by going to:
+
+> Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Format Builder
+
+or Open the document for which you want to make a print format. Click the Printer icon, or go to Menu > Print and click on the **Edit** button. Note: You must have System Manager permission to do this.
+
+### Step 1: Make a new Format
+
+
+
+### Step 2: Add a new Field
+
+To add a field, just drag it from the left sidebar and add it in your layout. You can edit the layout by clicking on the settings icon.
+
+
+
+### Step 3
+
+To remove a field, just drag it back into the fields sidebar.
+
+
+
+### Step 4
+
+You can add customized text, HTML in your print format, just add the **Custom HTML** field (in dark colour) and add it to the the place where you want to add the text.
+
+Then click on **Edit HTML** to edit your content.
+
+
+
+To save your format, just click on the **Save** button on the top.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/print-headings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4c492e0835
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Print Headings are the names which you can give to your sales invoices,
+supplier quotations etc. You can create a list of names for different business
+communications.
+
+You can create print headings from :
+
+> Setup > Printing > Print Heading > New Print Heading
+
+#### Figure 1: Save Print Heading
+
+
+
+Example of a change in print heading is shown below:
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/print-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a4788df66e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+# Print Settings
+
+In Print Settings you can set your default printing preferences like Paper Size, default text size, whether you want output as PDF or HTML etc.
+
+To edit print settings, go to:
+
+> Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Settings
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..383ca48a3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+Terms and conditions are the general and special arrangements, provisions, requirements, rules, specifications, and standards that a company follows. These specifications are an integral part of an agreement or contract that the company gets into with its customers, suppliers or partners.
+
+### 1. Make a new Terms and Conditions
+
+To setup Terms and Condition master, go to:
+
+`Selling > Terms and Condition > New`
+
+
+
+### 2. Editing in HTML
+
+Content of Terms and Condition can be formatted as per your preference, and also insert images where needed. If you have expertise in HTML, you will also find option to edit the content of Terms and Condition in HTML.
+
+
+
+This also allows you to use Terms and Condition master for footer, which otherwise is not availale in ERPNext as dedicated functionality. Since contents of Terms and Condition is always the last to appear in the print format, details of footer should be inserted at the end of the content, so that it actually appears as footer in the print format.
+
+### 3. Select in Transaction
+
+In transactions, you will find section of Terms and Condition where you will be able to search and fetched required Terms and Condition master.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0c42819868
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+One of the primary motivator for compulsory use of accounting tools is
+calculation of Taxes. You may or may not make money but your government will
+(to help your country be safe and prosperous). And if you don’t calculate your
+taxes correctly, they get very unhappy. Ok, philosophy aside, ERPNext allows
+you to make configurable tax templates that you can apply to your sales or
+purchase.
+
+### Tax Accounts
+
+For Tax Accounts that you want to use in the tax templates, you must go to
+Chart of Accounts and mention them as type “Tax” in your Chart of Item.
+
+## Item Tax
+
+If some of your Items require different tax rates as compared to others,
+mention them in the Item tax table. Even if you have selected your sales and
+purchase taxes as default tax rates, the system will pull the Item tax rate
+for calculations. Item tax will get preference over other sales or purchase
+taxes. However, if you wish to apply default sales and purchase taxes, do not
+mention item tax rates in the Item master. The system will then select the
+sales or purchase tax rate specified by you as default rates.
+
+Item Tax table can be found as a section within the Item Master document.
+
+
+
+ * **Inclusive and Exclusive Tax**: ERPNext allows you to enter Item rates which are tax inclusive.
+
+
+
+ * **Exception to the rule**: Item tax settings are required only if a particular Item has a different tax rate than the rate defined in the standard tax Account
+ * **Item tax is overwrite-able**: You can overwrite or change the item tax rate by going to the Item master in the Item tax table.
+
+## Sales Taxes and Charges Template
+
+You must usually collect taxes from your Customer and pay them to the
+government. At times, you may have to pay multiple taxes to multiple
+government bodies like local government, state or provincial and federal or
+central government.
+
+The way ERPNext sets up taxes is via templates. Other types of charges that
+may apply to your invoices (like shipping, insurance etc.) can also be
+configured as taxes.
+
+Select template and modify as per your need.
+
+To create a new sales tax template called Sales Taxes and Charges Template, you
+have to go to:
+
+> Setup > Accounts > Sales Taxes and Charge Master
+
+
+
+When you create a new master, you will have to add a row for each tax type.
+
+The tax rate you define here will be the standard tax rate for all Items. If
+there are Items that have different rates, they must be added in the Item Tax
+table in the Item master.
+
+In each row, you have to mention:
+
+ * Calculation Type:
+
+ * On Net Total : This can be on net total (total amount without taxes).
+ * On Previous Row Total/Amount: You can apply taxes on previous row total / amount. If you select this option, the tax will be applied as a percentage of the previous row (in the tax table) amount or total. Previous row amount means a particular tax amount.And, previous row total means net total plus taxes applied up to that row. In the Enter Row Field, mention row number on which you want to apply the current tax. If you want to apply the tax on the 3rd row, mention "3" in the Enter Row field.
+
+ * Actual : Enter as per actual amount in rate column.
+
+ * Account Head: The Account ledger under which this tax will be booked
+
+ * Cost Center: If the tax / charge is an income (like shipping) it needs to be booked against - a Cost Center.
+ * Description: Description of the tax (that will be printed in invoices / quotes).
+ * Rate: Tax rate.
+ * Amount: Tax amount.
+ * Total: Cumulative total to this point.
+ * Enter Row: If based on "Previous Row Total" you can select the row number which will be taken as a base for this calculation (default is the previous row).
+ * Is this Tax included in Basic Rate?: If you check this, it means that this tax will not be shown below the item table, but will be included in the rate in your main item table. This is useful when you want to give a flat price (inclusive of all taxes) to your customers.
+
+Once you setup your template, you can select this in your sales transactions.
+
+## Purchase Taxes and Charges Template
+
+Similar to your Sales Taxes and Charges Template is the Purchase Taxes and
+Charges Master.
+
+This is the tax template that you can use in your Purchase Orders and Purchase
+Invoices. If you have value added taxes (VAT), where you pay to the government
+the difference between your incoming and outgoing taxes, you can select the
+same Account that you use for sales taxes.
+
+The columns in this table are similar to the Sales Taxes and Charges Template
+with the difference as follows:
+
+Consider Tax or Charge for: In this section you can specify if the tax /
+charge is only for valuation (not a part of total) or only for total (does not
+add value to the item) or for both.
+
+{next}
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fd3868c9b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+# Global Defaults
+
+You can set default values for your documents from Global Defaults
+
+> Setup > Settings > Global Defaults
+
+Whenever a new document is created, these values will be set as default.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4cba9917a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+# Settings
+
+In `Setup > Settings` you will find ways to manage your system settings like defaults, number and currency formats, global session timeout settings etc.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e33aedce10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+system-settings
+module-settings
+naming-series
+global-defaults
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..db54494c19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+# Show or Hide Modules
+
+You can globally switch off certain desktop module via:
+
+> Setup > Settings > Show or Hide Modules
+
+For example if you are in the services business, you want to hide the Manufacturing Module, you can do this via **Show or Hide Modules**
+
+### Example
+
+Check / uncheck the items to show / hide.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4c3f2c10de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+# Naming Series
+
+### 1. Introduction
+
+Data records are broadly classified as “Master” or “Transaction”. A master
+record is a record that has a “name”, for example a Customer, Item, Supplier,
+Employee etc. A Transaction is a record that has a “number”. Examples of
+transactions include Sales Invoices, Quotations etc. You make transactions
+against a number of master records.
+
+ERPNext allows you to make prefixes to your transactions, with each prefix
+forming its own series. For example a series with prefix INV12 will have
+numbers INV120001, INV120002 and so on.
+
+You can have multiple series for all your transactions. It is common to have a
+separate series for each financial year. For example in Sales Invoice you
+could have:
+
+ * INV120001
+ * INV120002
+ * INV-A-120002
+
+etc. You could also have a separate series for each type of Customer or for
+each of your retail outlets.
+
+### 2. Managing Naming Series for Documents
+
+To setup a series, go to:
+
+> Setup > Tools > Update Numbering Series
+
+In this form,
+
+ 1. Select the transaction for which you want to make the series The system will update the current series in the text box.
+ 2. Edit the series as required with unique prefixes for each series. Each prefix must be on a new line.
+ 3. The first prefix will be the default prefix. If you want the user to explicitly select a series instead of the default one, check the “User must always select” check box.
+
+You can also update the starting point of a series by entering the series
+name and the starting point in the “Update Series” section.
+
+### 3. Example
+
+See how to set the naming series
+
+
+
+{next}
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a529171dab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+# System Settings
+
+You can localize ERPNext to use particular timezone, date, number or currency format and also set global session expiry via System Settings.
+
+To open System Settings, go to:
+
+> Setup > Settings > System Settings
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..244d893c7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+# Setup Wizard
+
+The Setup Wizard helps you quickly setup your ERPnext by helping you create your company, Items, Customer, Suppliers and will also setup a basic website with this data.
+
+Here is a quick overview of the steps:
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..74f6a42fdf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+step-1-language
+step-2-currency-and-timezone
+step-3-user-details
+step-4-company-details
+step-5-letterhead-and-logo
+step-6-add-users
+step-7-tax-details
+step-8-customer-names
+step-9-suppliers
+step-10-item
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4e2ffe8917
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+# Step 1: Language
+
+Select your language. ERPNext is available in more than 20 languages.
+
+
+
+---
+
+Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..61e3c494c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+# Step 9: Item Names
+
+In this final step, please enter the names of the Items you buy or sell.
+
+
+
+---
+
+### Default Currency
+
+For most countries, your currency and timezone will be automatically set
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9b20dd0fb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+# Step 3: User Details
+
+Enter Users Profile Details like Name, User ID and preferred password.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Enter Data in csv file.
+
+
+
+The csv format is case-sensitive. Do not edit the headers which are preset in the template. In the Item Code and Warehouse column, enter exact Item Code and Warehouse as created in your ERPNext account. For quatity, enter stock level you wish to set for that item, in a specific warehouse. If you do not want to change the quantity or valuation rate of an Item, you should leave it blank.
+
+Note: Make sure you do not put zero if you do not want to change the quantity
+amount or valuation amount. The system will calculate zero as zero quantity.
+So leave the field blank.
+
+#### **Step 3: Upload file and Enter Values in Stock Reconciliation Form
+
+
+
+**Posting Date**
+
+Posting Date will be date when you want uploaded stock to reflect in the report. Posting Date selection option allows you making back dated stock reconcialiation as well.
+
+**Difference Account:**
+
+When making Stock Reconciliation for updating **opening balance**, then you should select Balance Sheet account. By default **Temporary Opening** is created in the chart of account which can be used here.
+
+If you are making Stock Reconciliation for **correcting stock level or valuation of an item**, then you can select any expense account in which you would want difference amount (derived from difference of valuation of item) should be booked. If Expense Account is selected as Difference Account, you will also need to select Cost Center as it is mandatory with any income and expense account selection.
+
+After reviewing saved Reconciliation Data, submit the Stock Reconciliation. On
+successful submission, the data will be updated in the system. To check the
+submitted data go to stock and view stock level report.
+
+Note: While filling the valuation rates of Items, if you wish to find out the
+valuation rates of all items, you can go to stock and click on Item Prices
+report. The report will show you all types of rates.
+
+#### Step 4: Review the reconciliation data
+
+
+
+### Stock Ledger Report
+
+
+
+**How Stock Reconciliation Works**
+
+Stock Reconciliation on a specific date means balance quantity frozen for that item on reconciliation date, and shall not get affected due to stock entries made before its date.
+
+Example:
+
+Item Code: ABC001
+Warehouse: Mumbai
+Let's assume stock as on 10th January is 100 nos.
+Stock Reconciliation is made on 12th January to bring stock balance to 150 nos.
+Existing Stock Ledger:
+
+
+ | Posting Date + | +Qty + | +Balance Qty + | +Voucher Type + | +
| 10/01/2014 | +100 | +100 | +Purchase Receipt | +
| 12/01/2014 | +50 | +150 | +Stock Reconciliation | +
| Posting Date | +Qty | +Balance Qty | +Voucher Type | +
| 05/01/2014 | +20 | +20 | +Purchase Receipt | +
| 10/01/2014 | +100 | +120 | +Purchase Receipt | +
| 12/01/2014 | +150 | +Stock Reconciliation |
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/third-party-backups.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/third-party-backups.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a65c533d49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/third-party-backups.md
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+If you wish to store your backups on a periodic basis,on Dropbox, you can do
+it directly through ERPNext.
+
+> Setup > Manage 3rd Party Backups
+
+__Step 1:__ Click on Setup.
+
+__Step 2:__ Click on Manage Third Party Backup
+
+#### Figure 1: Manage Third Party Backup
+
+
+
+On the Backup Manager page, enter the email addresses of those people whom you
+wish to notify about the upload status. Under the topic 'Sync with Dropbox',
+select whether you wish to upload Daily, Weekly or Never.
+
+__Step 3__ Click on **Allow Dropbox Access**.
+
+> Tip: In future, if you wish to discontinue uploading backups to dropbox,
+then select the Never option.
+
+#### Figure 2: Allow Dropbox Access
+
+
+
+You need to login to your dropbox account, with your user id and password.
+
+
+
+## Open Source Users
+
+Installing Pre-Requisites
+
+
+
+ pip install dropbox
+ pip install google-api-python-client
+
+
+
+
+#### Create an App in Dropbox
+
+First create your Dropbox account and create a new app (https://www.dropbox.com/developers/apps).
+After successful creation of account you will receive `app_key`, `app_secret` and `access_type`. Now edit `site_config.json` of your site (/frappe-bench/sites/your-site/) and add the following lines:
+- `"dropbox_access_key": "app_key",` and
+- `"dropbox_secret_key": "app_secret"`
+
+Then you can go to the "Integrations" module and Allow Dropbox Access.
+
+> Note: Please ensure Allow Pop-ups are enabled in your browser.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7272178c3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+# Adding Users
+
+Users can be added by the System Manager. If you are a System Manager, you can add Users via
+
+> Setup > User
+
+### 1. List of Users
+
+
+
+
+To add a new user, click on "New"
+
+### 2. Add the user details
+
+Add user details such as First Name, Last Name, Email etc.
+
+The user's Email will become the user id.
+
+After adding these details, save the user.
+
+### 3. Setting Roles
+
+After saving, you will see a list of roles and a checkbox next to it. Just check the roles you want the
+the user to have and save the document. To click on what permissions translate into roles, click on the role
+name.
+
+
+
+### 4. Setting Module Access
+
+Users will have access to all modules for which they have role based access. If you want to block certain modules for certain users, un-check the module from the list.
+
+
+
+### 5. Security Settings
+
+If you wish to give the user access to the system only between office hours,
+or during weekends, mention it under security settings.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..05ad06012d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+In ERPNext, you can create multiple users and assign them different roles. There are some users which can only access the public facing part of ERPNext (i.e. the website). Such users are called "Website Users".
+
+ERPNext implements permission control at the User and Role level. Each user in the system can be assigned multiple
+roles and permissions.
+
+The most important role is the "System Manager". Any user having this role can add other users and set roles to all users.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b00f32ad32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+adding-users
+role-based-permissions
+user-permissions
+sharing
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..87144888e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+# Role Based Permissions
+
+ERPNext has a role-based permission system. It means that you can assign Roles to Users, and set Permissions on Roles. The permission structure also allows you to define different permission rules for different fields, using a concept called **Permission "Level"** of a field. Once roles are assigned to a user, it gives you the ability to limit access for a user to only specific documents.
+
+To start with, go to:
+> Setup > Permissions > Role Permissions Manager
+
+
+
+Permissions are applied on a combination of:
+
+ * **Roles:** As we saw earlier, Users are assigned to Roles and it is on these Roles that permission rules are applied.
+
+ *Examples of Roles include Accounts Manager, Employee, HR User.*
+
+ * **Document Types:** Each type of document, master or transaction, has a separate list of Role based permissions.
+
+ *Examples of Document Types are Sales Invoice, Leave Application, Stock Entry, etc.*
+
+ * **Permission "Levels":** In each document, you can group fields by "levels". Each group of field is denoted by a unique number (0, 1, 2, 3, etc.). A separate set of permission rules can be applied to each field group. By default all fields are of level 0.
+
+ *Permission "Level" connects the group of fields with level X to a permission rule with level X.*
+
+ * **Document Stages:** Permissions are applied on each stage of the document like on Creation, Saving, Submission, Cancellation and Amendment. A role can be permitted to Print, Email, Import or Export data, access Reports, or define User Permissions.
+
+ * **Apply User Permissions:** This switch decides whether User Permissions should be applied for the role on selected Document Stages.
+
+ If enabled, a user with that role will be able to access only specific Documents for that Document Type. Such specific Document access is defined in the list of User Permissions. Additionally, User Permissions defined for other Document Types also get applied if they are related to the current Document Type through Link Fields.
+
+ To set, User Permissions go to:
+ > Setup > Permissions > [User Permissions Manager]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
+
+---
+
+**To add a new rule**, click on "Add a New Rule" button and a pop-up box will ask you to select a Role and a Permission Level. Once you select this and click on "Add", this will add a new row to your rules table.
+
+---
+
+Leave Application is a good **example** that encompasses all areas of Permission System.
+
+
+
+ 1. **It should be created by an Employee.**
+ For this, Employee Role should be given Read, Write, Create permissions.
+
+
+
+ 1. **An Employee should only be able to access his/her Leave Application.**
+ Hence, Apply User Permissions should be enabled for Employee Role, and a User Permission record should be created for each User Employee combination. (This effort is reduced for Employee Document Type, by programmatically creating User Permission records.)
+
+
+
+ 1. **HR Manager should be able to see all Leave Applications.**
+ Create a Permission Rule for HR Manager at Level 0, with Read permissions. Apply User Permissions should be disabled.
+
+
+
+ 2. **Leave Approver should be able to see and update Leave Applications applicable to him/her.**
+ Leave Approver is given Read and Write access at Level 0, with Apply User Permissions enabled. Relevant Employee Documents should be enlisted in the User Permissions of Leave Approvers. (This effort is reduced for Leave Approvers mentioned in Employee Documents, by programmatically creating User Permission records.)
+
+
+
+ 3. **It should be Approved / Rejected only by HR User or Leave Approver.**
+ The Status field of Leave Application is set at Level 1. HR User and Leave Approver are given Read and Write permissions for Level 1, while everyone else (All) are given Read permission for Level 1.
+
+
+
+
+ 4. **HR User should be able to delegate Leave Applications to his/her subordinates**
+ HR User is given the right to Set User Permissions. A User with HR User role would be able to defined User Permissions on Leave Application for other users.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..471efc1c5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+# Sharing
+
+In addition to user and role permissions, you can also Share a document with another user if you have sharing rights.
+
+To share a document, open the document, click on the "+" icon under sharing and select the user
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2e2220aa2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+# User Permissions
+
+Limit access for a User to a set of documents using User Permissions Manager
+
+Role Base Permissions define the periphery of document types within which a user with a set of Roles can move around in. However, you can have an even finer control by defining User Permissions for a User. By setting specific documents in User Permissions list, you can limit access for that User to specific documents of a particular DocType, on the condition that "Apply User Permissions" is checked in Role Permissions Manager.
+
+To start with, go to:
+> Setup > Permissions > User Permissions Manager
+
+
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+
+#### Step 2: Enter Transition Rules.
+
+
+
+#### Notes:
+
+> Note 1: When you make a workflow you essentially overwrite the code that is
+written for that document. Thus the document will function based on your
+workflow and not based on the pre-set code settings. Hence there might be no
+submit button / option if you have not specified it in the workflow.
+
+> Note 2: Document status of saved is 0, of submitted is 1, and of cancelled is
+2.
+
+> Note 3: A document cannot be cancelled unless it is submitted.
+
+> Note 4: If you wish to give the option to cancel, you will have to write a
+workflow transition step that says from submitted you can cancel.
+
+
+
+#### Example of a Leave Application Process:
+
+Go to the Human Resources Module and click on Leave Application. Apply for a
+Leave.
+
+When a Leave Application is submitted, the status on the right hand corner of
+the page shows as "Applied"
+
+
+
+When the HR User logs in, he can either Approve or Reject. If approved the
+status on the right hand corner of the page shows as Approved. However, a blue
+band of information is displayed saying approval is pending by leave approver.
+
+
+
+When the leave approver opens the Leave Application page, he should select the
+status and convert to Approved or Rejected.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4907186a67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+The value of available inventory is treated as an Asset in company's Chart of
+Accounts. Depending on the type of items, it can be treated as Fixed Asset or
+Current Asset. To prepare Balance Sheet, you should make the accounting
+entries for those assets. There are generally two different methods of
+accounting for inventory:
+
+### **Auto / Perpetual Inventory**
+
+In this process, for each stock transactions, the system posts relevant
+accounting entries to sync stock balance and accounting balance. This is the
+default setting in ERPNext for new accounts.
+
+When you buy and receive items, those items are booked as the company’s assets
+(stock-in-hand / fixed-assets). When you sell and deliver those items, an
+expense (cost-of-goods-sold) equal to the buying cost of the items is booked.
+General Ledger entries are made after every stock transaction. As a result,
+the value as per Stock Ledger always remains same with the relevant account
+balance. This improves accuracy of Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss
+statement.
+
+To check accounting entries for a particular stock transaction, please check
+[examples]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html)
+
+#### **Advantages**
+
+Perpetual Inventory system will make it easier for you to maintain accuracy of
+company's asset and expense values. Stock balances will always be synced with
+relevant account balances, so no more periodic manual entry has to be done to
+balance them.
+
+In case of new back-dated stock transactions or cancellation/amendment of an
+existing transaction, all the future Stock Ledger entries and GL Entries will
+be recalculated for all items of that transaction. The same is applicable if
+any cost is added to the submitted Purchase Receipt, later through the Landed
+Cost Wizard.
+
+> Note: Perpetual Inventory totally depends upon the item valuation rate.
+Hence, you have to be more careful entering valuation rate while making any
+incoming stock transactions like Purchase Receipt, Material Receipt, or
+Manufacturing / Repack.
+
+* * *
+
+### **Periodic Inventory**
+
+In this method, accounting entries are manually created periodically, to sync
+stock balance and relevant account balance. The system does not create
+accounting entries automatically for assets, at the time of material purchases
+or sales.
+
+In an accounting period, when you buy and receive items, an expense is booked
+in your accounting system. You sell and deliver some of these items.
+
+At the end of an accounting period, the total value of items to be sold, need
+to be booked as the company’s assets, often known as stock-in-hand.
+
+The difference between the value of the items remaining to be sold and the
+previous period’s stock-in-hand value can be positive or negative. If
+positive, this value is removed from expenses (cost-of-goods-sold) and is
+added to assets (stock-in-hand / fixed-assets). If negative, a reverse entry
+is passed.
+
+This complete process is called Periodic Inventory.
+
+If you are an existing user using Periodic Inventory and want to use Perpetual
+Inventory, you have to follow some steps to migrate. For details, check
+[Migration From Periodic Inventory]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.html).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..21624e525e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+perpetual-inventory
+migrate-to-perpetual-inventory
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c3d10ed8c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+Existing Users, need to follow some steps to activate the new Perpetual
+Inventory system. As Perpetual Inventory always maintains a sync between stock
+and account balance, it is not possible to enable it with existing Warehouse
+setup. You have to create a whole new set of Warehouses, each linked to
+relevant account.
+
+Steps:
+
+ * Nullify the balance of account heads (stock-in-hand / fixed-asset) which you are using to maintain available stock value, through a Journal Entry.
+
+ * As existing warehouses are linked to stock transactions which does not have corresponding accounting entries, those warehouses can not be used for perpetual inventory. You have to create new warehouses for the future stock transactions which will be linked to their respective accounts. While creating new warehouses, select an account group under which the child account for the warehouse will be created.
+
+ * Setup the following default accounts for each Company
+
+ * Stock Received But Not Billed
+ * Stock Adjustment Account
+ * Expenses Included In Valuation
+ * Cost Center
+ * Activate Perpetual Inventory
+
+> Setup > Accounts Settings > Make Accounting Entry For Every Stock Movement
+
+
+
+
+ * Create Stock Entry (Material Transfer) to transfer available stock from existing warehouse to new warehouse. As stock will be available in the new warehouse, you should select the new warehouse for all the future transactions.
+
+System will not post any accounting entries for existing stock transactions
+submitted prior to the activation of Perpetual Inventory as those old
+warehouses will not be linked to any account. If you create any new
+transaction or modify/amend existing transactions, with old warehouse, there
+will be no corresponding accounting entries. You have to manually sync stock
+and account balance through Journal Entry.
+
+> Note: If you are already using old Perpetual Inventory system, it will be
+deactivated automatically. You need to follow the above steps to reactivate
+it.
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ee62942ecd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -0,0 +1,371 @@
+In perpetual inventory, system creates accounting entries for each stock
+transactions, so that stock and account balance will always remain same. The
+account balance will be posted against their respective account heads for each
+Warehouse. On saving of a Warehouse, the system will automatically create an
+account head with the same name as warehouse. As account balance is maintained
+for each Warehouse, you should create Warehouses, based on the type of items
+(Current / Fixed Assets) it stores.
+
+At the time of items received in a particular warehouse, the balance of asset
+account (linked to that warehouse) will be increased. Similarly when you
+deliver some items from that warehouse, an expense will be booked and the
+asset account will be reduced, based on the valuation amount of those items.
+
+## **Activation**
+
+ 1. Setup the following default accounts for each Company
+
+ * Stock Received But Not Billed
+ * Stock Adjustment Account
+ * Expenses Included In Valuation
+ * Cost Center
+ 2. In perpetual inventory, the system will maintain seperate account balance for each warehouse under separate account head. To create that account head, enter "Create Account Under" in Warehouse master.
+
+ 3. Activate Perpetual Inventory
+
+> Setup > Accounts Settings > Make Accounting Entry For Every Stock Movement
+
+* * *
+
+## **Example**
+
+Consider following Chart of Accounts and Warehouse setup for your company:
+
+#### Chart of Accounts
+
+ * Assets (Dr)
+ * Current Assets
+ * Accounts Receivable
+ * Jane Doe
+ * Stock Assets
+ * Stores
+ * Finished Goods
+ * Work In Progress
+ * Tax Assets
+ * VAT
+ * Fixed Assets
+ * Fixed Asset Warehouse
+ * Liabilities (Cr)
+ * Current Liabilities
+ * Accounts Payable
+ * East Wind Inc.
+ * Stock Liabilities
+ * Stock Received But Not Billed
+ * Tax Liabilities
+ * Service Tax
+ * Income (Cr)
+ * Direct Income
+ * Sales Account
+ * Expenses (Dr)
+ * Direct Expenses
+ * Stock Expenses
+ * Cost of Goods Sold
+ * Expenses Included In Valuation
+ * Stock Adjustment
+ * Shipping Charges
+ * Customs Duty
+
+#### Warehouse - Account Configuration
+
+ * Stores
+ * Work In Progress
+ * Finished Goods
+ * Fixed Asset Warehouse
+
+### **Purchase Receipt**
+
+Suppose you have purchased _10 nos_ of item "RM0001" at _$200_ and _5 nos_ of
+item "Desktop" at **$100** from supplier "East Wind Inc". Following are the
+details of Purchase Receipt:
+
+**Supplier:** East Wind Inc.
+
+**Items:**
+
+| Item | +Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +Valuation Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +10 | +200 | +2000 | +2200 | +
| Desktop | +Fixed Asset Warehouse | +5 | +100 | +500 | +550 | +
Taxes: +
+| Account | +Amount | +Category | +
|---|---|---|
| Shipping Charges | +100 | +Total and Valuation | +
| VAT | +120 | +Total | +
| Customs Duty | +150 | +Valuation | +
Stock Ledger +
+ + + +**General Ledger** + + + +As stock balance increases through Purchase Receipt, "Store" and "Fixed Asset +Warehouse" accounts are debited and a temporary account "Stock Receipt But Not +Billed" account is credited, to maintain double entry accounting system. At the same time, negative expense is booked in account "Expense included in Valuation" for the amount added for valuation purpose, to avoid double expense booking. + +* * * + +### **Purchase Invoice** + +On receiving Bill from supplier, for the above Purchase Receipt, you will make +Purchase Invoice for the same. The general ledger entries are as follows: + +**General Ledger** + + + +Here "Stock Received But Not Billed" account is debited and nullified the +effect of Purchase Receipt. + +* * * + +### **Delivery Note** + +Lets say, you have an order from "Jane Doe" to deliver 5 nos of item "RM0001" +at $300. Following are the details of Delivery Note: + +**Customer:** Jane Doe + +**Items:** +| Item | +Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +5 | +300 | +1500 | +
Taxes: +
+| Account | +Amount | +
|---|---|
| Service Tax | +150 | +
| VAT | +100 | +
| Item | +Target Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +50 | +220 | +11000 | +
| Item | +Source Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +10 | +220 | +2200 | +
| Item | +Source Warehouse | +Target Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +Work In Progress | +10 | +220 | +2200 | +
+
+> Note: In stock transactions, Batch IDs will be filtered based on Item Code, Warehouse,
+Batch Expiry Date (compared with Posting date of a transaction) and Actual Qty in Warehouse.
+While searching for Batch ID without value in Warehouse field, then Actual Qty filter won't be applied.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/delivery-note.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/delivery-note.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1cdf41f547
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/delivery-note.md
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+A Delivery Note is made when a shipment is shipped from the company’s
+Warehouse.
+
+A copy of the Delivery Note is usually sent with the transporter. The Delivery
+Note contains the list of Items that are sent in the shipment and updates the
+inventory.
+
+The entry of the Delivery Note is very similar to a Purchase Receipt. You can
+create a new Delivery Note from:
+
+> Stock > Delivery Note > New
+
+or from a “Submitted” Sales Order (that is not already shipped) by clicking on
+“Make Delivery Note”.
+
+
+
+You can also “fetch” the details from an unshipped Sales Order.
+
+You will notice that all the information about unshipped Items and other
+details are carried over from your Sales Order.
+
+### Shipping Packets or Items with Product Bundle
+
+If you are shipping Items that have a [Product Bundle]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/selling/setup/sales-bom.html), ERPNext will automatically
+create a “Packing List” table for you based on the sub-Items in that Item.
+
+If your Items are serialized, then for Product Bundle type of Items, you will have
+to update the Serial Number in the “Packing List” table.
+
+### Packing Items in to Cases, for Container Shipment
+
+If you are doing container shipment or by weight, then you can use the Packing
+Slip to breakup your Delivery Note into smaller units. To make a Packing Slip
+go to:
+
+> Stock > Packing Slip > New Packing Slip
+
+You can create multiple Packing Slips for your Delivery Note and ERPNext will
+ensure that the quantities in the Packing Slip do not exceed the quantities in
+the Delivery Note.
+
+* * *
+
+#### Q. How to Print Without Amounts?
+
+If you want to print your Delivery Notes without the amount (this might be
+useful if you are shipping high value items), just check the “Print without
+Amount” box in the “More Info” section.
+
+#### What happens when the Delivery Note is “Submitted”?
+
+A Stock Ledger Entry is made for each Item and stock is updated. Pending
+Quantity in the Sales Order is updated (if applicable).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..971c33c5b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+For most small business that deal in physical goods, a large part of their net
+worth is invested in the stock in hand.
+
+### Material Flow
+
+There are three main types of entries:
+
+ * Purchase Receipt: Items received from Suppliers against Purchase Orders.
+ * Stock Entry: Items transferred from one Warehouse to another.
+ * Delivery Note: Items shipped to Customers.
+
+#### How does ERPNext track stock movement / levels?
+
+Tracking stock is not just about adding and subtracting quantities. Some
+complications arise when:
+
+ * Back-dated (past) entries are made / edited: This affects future stock levels and may lead to negative stock.
+ * Stock has to be valued based on First-in-First-out: ERPNext needs to maintain a sequence of all transactions to know the exact value of your Items.
+ * Stock reports are required at any point in time in the past: You have to lookup what was the quantity / value your stock of Item X on date Y.
+
+To manage this, ERPNext collects all inventory transactions in a table called
+the Stock Ledger Entry. All Purchase Receipts, Stock Entries and Delivery
+Notes update this table.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..75e9cbf2f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+material-request
+stock-entry
+delivery-note
+purchase-receipt
+installation-note
+item
+warehouse
+serial-no
+batch
+projected-quantity
+accounting-of-inventory-stock
+tools
+setup
+sales-return
+purchase-return
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/installation-note.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/installation-note.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c4e3bc0fae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/installation-note.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+You can use installation note to record the instalation of a product having a serial number.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item-price.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item-price.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a235341cef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item-price.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+Item Price is the record in which you can log sellig and buying rate of an item.
+
+There are two ways to reach to new Item Price form.
+
+> Selling/Buying/Stock >> Setup >> Item Price >> New Item Price
+
+Or
+
+> Item >> Add/Edit Prices >> Click on "+" >> New Item Price
+
+Following are the steps to create new Item Price.
+
+Step 1: Select Price List
+
+You can create multiple Price List in ERPNext to track Selling and Buying Price List of an item separtely. Also if item's selling prices id changing based on territory, or due to other criteria, you can create multiple selling Price List for it.
+
+
+
+On selection of Price List, its currency and for selling or buying property will be fetched as well.
+
+To have Item Price fetching in the sales or purchase transaction, you should have Price List id selected in the transaction, just above Item table.
+
+Step 2: Select Item
+
+Select item for which Item Price record is to be created. On selection of Item Code, Item Name and Description will be fetched as well.
+
+
+
+Step 3: Enter Rate
+
+Enter selling/buying rate of an item in Price List currency.
+
+
+
+Step 4: Save Item Price
+
+To check all Item Price together, go to:
+
+Stock >> Main Report >> Itemwise Price List Rate
+
+You will find option to create new Item Price record (+) in this report as well.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3cabe3585b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+### How are Items Valued?
+
+One of the major features of any inventory system is that you can find out the
+value of any item based on its historic or average price. You can also find
+the value of all your items for your balance sheet.
+
+Valuation is important because:
+
+ * The buying price may fluctuate.
+ * The value may change because of some process (value add).
+ * The value may change because of decay, loss etc.
+
+You may encounter these terms, so lets clarify:
+
+ * Rate: Rate at which the transaction takes place.
+ * Valuation Rate: Rate at which the items value is set for your valuation.
+
+There are two major ways in which ERPNext values your items.
+
+ * **FIFO (First In First Out):** In this system, ERPNext assumes that you will consume / sell those Items first which you bought first. For example, if you buy an Item at price X and then after a few days at price Y, whenever you sell your Item, ERPNext will reduce the quantity of the Item priced at X first and then Y.
+
+
+
+ * **Moving Average:** In this method, ERPNext assumes that the value of the item at any point is the average price of the units of that Item in stock. For example, if the value of an Item is X in a Warehouse with quantity Y and another quantity Y1 is added to the Warehouse at cost X1, the new value X2 would be:
+
+> New Value X2 = (X * Y + X1 * Y1) / (Y + Y1)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..89ec5e5c51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+An Item is your companys' product or a service. The term Item is applicable to your core products as well as your raw materials. It can be a product or service that you buy/sell from your customers/ suppliers. ERPNext allows you to manage all sorts of items like raw-materials, sub-assemblies, finished goods, item variants and service items.
+
+ERPNext is optimized for itemized management of your sales and purchase. If you are in services, you can create an Item for each services that your offer. Completing the Item Master is very essential for successful implementation of ERPNext.
+
+## Item Properties
+
+ * **Item Name:** Item name is the actual name of your product or service.
+ * **Item Code:** Item Code is a short-form to denote your Item. If you have very few Items, it is advisable to keep the Item Name and the Item Code same. This helps new users to recognise and update Item details in all transactions. In case you have lot of Items with long names and the list runs in hundreds, it is advisable to code. To understand naming Item codes see [Item Codification]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/stock/item/item-codification.html)
+ * **Item Group:** Item Group is used to categorize an Item under various criterias like products, raw materials, services, sub-assemblies, consumables or all Item groups. Create your default Item Group list under Setup> Item Group and pre-select the option while filling your New Item details under [Item Group]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/stock/setup/item-group.html)
+ * **Default Unit of Measure:** This is the default measuring unit that you will use for your product. It could be in nos, kgs, meters, etc. You can store all the UOM’s that your product will require under Set Up> Master Data > UOM. These can be preselected while filling New Item by using % sign to get a pop up of the UOM list.
+ * **Brand:** If you have more than one brand save them under Set Up> Master Data> Brand and pre-select them while filling a New Item.
+ * **Variant:** A Item Variant is a different version of a Item.To learn more about managing varaints see [Item Variants]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/stock/item/item-variants.html)
+
+### Upload an Image
+
+To upload an image for your icon that will appear in all transactions, save
+the partially filled form. Only after your file is saved the 'upload' button will
+work above the Image icon. Click on this sign and upload the image.
+
+### Inventory : Warehouse and Stock Setting
+
+In ERPNext, you can select different type of Warehouses to stock your
+different Items. This can be selected based on Item types. It could be Fixed
+Asset Item, Stock Item or even Manufacturing Item.
+
+ * **Stock Item:** If you are maintaining stock of this Item in your Inventory, ERPNext will make a stock ledger entry for each transaction of this item.
+ * **Default Warehouse:** This is the Warehouse that is automatically selected in your transactions.
+ * **Allowance Percentage:** This is the percent by which you will be allowed to over-bill or over-deliver this Item. If not set, it will select from the Global Defaults.
+ * **Valuation Method:** There are two options to maintain valuation of stock. FIFO (first in - first out) and Moving Average. To understand this topic in detail please visit “ Item Valuation, FIFO and Moving Average”.
+
+### Serialized and Batched Inventory
+
+These numbers help to track individual units or batches of Items which you sell. It also tracks warranty and returns. In case any individual Item is recalled by the supplier the number system helps to track individual Item. The numbering system also manages expiry dates. Please note that if you sell your items in thousands, and if the items are very small like pens or erasers, you need not serialize them. In ERPNext, you will have to mention the serial number in some accounting entries. To create serial numbers you will have to manually create all the numbers in your entries. If your product is not a big consumer durable Item, if it has no warranty and has no chances of being recalled, avoid giving serial numbers.
+
+> Important: Once you mark an item as serialized or batched or neither, you cannot change it after you have made any stock entry.
+
+ * [Discussion on Serialized Inventory]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html)
+
+### Re Ordering
+
+ * **Re-order level** suggests the amount of stock balance in the Warehouse.
+ * **Re-order Qty** suggests the amount of stock to be ordered to maintain minimum stock levels.
+ * **Minimum Order Qty** is the minimum quantity for which a Material Request / Purchase Order must be made.
+
+### Item Tax
+
+These settings are required only if a particular Item has a different tax rate
+than the rate defined in the standard tax Account. For example, If you have a
+tax Account, “VAT 10%” and this particular Item is exempted from tax, then you
+select “VAT 10%” in the first column, and set “0” as the tax rate in the
+second column.
+
+Go to [Setting Up Taxes]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) to understand this topic in detail.
+
+### Inspection
+
+Inspection Required: If an incoming inspection (at the time of delivery from
+the Supplier) is mandatory for this Item, mention “Inspection Required” as
+“Yes”. The system will ensure that a Quality Inspection will be prepared and
+approved before a Purchase Receipt is submitted.
+
+Inspection Criteria: If a Quality Inspection is prepared for this Item, then
+this template of criteria will automatically be updated in the Quality
+Inspection table of the Quality Inspection. Examples of Criteria are: Weight,
+Length, Finish etc.
+
+### Purchase Details
+
+
+
+**Lead time days:** Lead time days are the number of days required for the Item to reach the warehouse.
+
+**Default Expense Account:** It is the account in which cost of the Item will be debited.
+
+**Default Cost Centre:** It is used for tracking expense for this Item.
+
+### Sales Details
+
+
+
+**Default Income Account:** Income account selected here will be fetched automatically in sales invoice for this item.
+
+**Cost Centre:** Cost center selected here will be fetched automatically in sales invoice for this item.
+
+### Manufacturing And Website
+
+
+
+Visit [Manufacturing]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/manufacturing.html) and [Website ]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/website.html)to understand these topics in detail.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..deaa805147
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+item-codification
+item-variants
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/item-codification.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/item-codification.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eeb4f49a2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/item-codification.md
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+If you already have a full-fledged business with a number of physical items,
+you would have probably coded your items. If you have not, you have a choice.
+We recommend that you should codify if you have lot of products with long or
+complicated names. In case you have few products with short names, it is
+preferable to keep the Item Code same as Item Name.
+
+Item codification has been a sensitive topic and wars have been fought on this
+(not joking). In our experience, when you have items that cross a certain
+size, life without codification is a nightmare.
+
+### Benefits
+
+ * Standard way of naming things.
+ * Less likely to have duplicates.
+ * Explicit definition.
+ * Helps to quickly find if a similar item exists.
+ * Item names get longer and longer as more types get introduced. Codes are shorter.
+
+### Pain
+
+ * You have to remember the codes!
+ * Harder for new team members to pick up.
+ * You have to create new codes all the time.
+
+### Example
+
+You should have a simple manual / cheat-sheet to codify your Items instead of
+just numbering them sequentially. Each letter should mean something. Here is
+an example:
+
+If your business involves wooden furniture, then you may codify as follows:
+
+Item Codification Summary Sheet (SAMPLE)
+
+
+
+ First letter: "Material" Third letter: "Size"
+
+ - W - Wood - 0 - less than 1mm
+ - H - Hardware - 1 - 1mm - 5mm
+ - G - Glass - 2 - 5mm - 10mm
+ - U - Upholstery - 3 - 10mm - 10cm
+ - P - Plastic
+
+ Second Letter: "Type"
+
+ For Wood: For Hardware:
+
+ - S - Sheet - S - Screw
+ - B - Bar - N - Nut
+ - L - L-section - W - Washer
+ - M - Molded - B - Bracket
+ - R - Round
+
+
+The last few letters could be sequential. So by looking at code **WM304** \-
+you know its a wooden molding less than 10cm in size
+
+### Standardization
+
+If you have more than one person naming items, the style of naming items will
+change for everyone. Sometimes, even for one person, he or she may forget how
+they had named the item and may create a duplicate name _"Wooden Sheet 3mm" or
+"3mm Sheet of Wood"?_
+
+### Rationalizing
+
+It is a good practice to have minimum varieties of items so that you keep
+minimum stock, housekeeping is simpler etc. When you are planning a new
+product and you want to know if you are already purchasing a part in some
+other product, the item codes will help you quickly determine if you are using
+a similar raw material in another product.
+
+We believe if you do this small investment, it will help you rationalize
+things as your business grows, though its okay not to codify if you have less
+items.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/item-variants.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/item-variants.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..256a37ead8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/item-variants.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+A Item Variant is a different version of a Item, such as differing sizes or differing colours.
+Without Item variants, you would have to treat the small, medium and large versions of a t-shirt as three separate Items;
+Item variants let you treat the small, medium and large versions of a t-shirt as variations of the same Item.
+
+To use Item Variants in ERPNext, create an Item and check 'Has Variants'
+
+* The Item shall then be referred as a 'Template'
+
+
+
+On selecting 'Has Variants' a table shall appear. Specify the variant attributes for the Item in the table.
+In case the attribute has Numeric Values, you can specify the range and increment values here.
+
+
+
+> Note: You cannot make Transactions against a 'Template'
+
+To create 'Item Variants' against a 'Template' select 'Make Variants'
+
+
+
+
+
+To learn more about setting Attributes Master check [Item Attributes]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/stock/setup/item-attribute.html)
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/purchase-details.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/purchase-details.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..47f724c1f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/purchase-details.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+# purchase details
+
+# How Do I Track Warranty Status?
+
+To track a warranty period, it is necessary that the Item is a serialized Item.
+When this Item is delivered, the delivery date and the expiry period is saved in the serial number master. Through the serial number master you can track the warranty status.
+
+A warranty means a guarantee or a promise which provides assurance by one party to the other party which allows for a legal remedy if that promise is not true or followed. A warranty period is a time period in which a purchased product may be returned or exchanged.
+
+
+
+# How To Name A Manufacturer Part Number?
+
+Go to the purchase details section of the Item form, and enter the number on the right hand side in the field ‘Manufacturer Part Number’
+
+> Stock > Item
+
+A manufacturer part number is a series of numbers and /or letters that has been given to a part by the manufacturer. The manufacturer part number belongs to the manufacturer and helps distinguish the part from other manufacturers. If two parts come from different manufacturers, they will have different MPNs. This allows businesses to identify which company made the part.
+
+
+
+__For Example:__ A refrigerator will have different parts which will have manufacturer part number. Thus, when any part fails and you want to replace it, you can simply order that part based on its part number.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/reorder.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/reorder.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..34a079f13e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/item/reorder.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+# Re-Order
+
+# How To Setup Re-order Level?
+
+Go to the Re-order section of the Item form in the Stock module.
+
+> Stock > Item
+
+The Re-order level is the point at which stock on a particular item has diminished to a point where it needs to be replenished. To order based on Re-order level can avoid shortages. Re-order level can be determined based on the lead time and the average daily consumption.
+
+
+
+__For example:__ You can set your reorder level of bath towels at 10. When there are only 10 towels remaining in stock, the system will either send a mail or take action depending upon what you have selected in global settings.
+
+# How To Setup Reorder Quantity?
+
+To setup Reorder quantity, go to the Re-order section of the Item form. In the field ‘Re-order Qty’ type the amount that is needed.
+
+> Stock> Item
+
+Re-order quantity is the quantity to order, so that the sum of ordering cost and holding cost is at its minimum.The re-order quantity is based on the minimum order quantity specified by the supplier and many other factors.
+
+
+
+__For example:__ If reorder level is 100 items, your reorder quantity may not necessarily be 100 items. The Reorder quantity can be greater than or equal to reorder level. It may depend upon lead time, discount, transportation and average daily consumption.
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/material-request.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/material-request.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..69ce0ea9b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/material-request.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+A Material Request is a simple document identifying a requirement of a set of
+Items (products or services) for a particular reason.
+
+
+
+To generate a Material Request manually go to:
+
+> Stock > Documents > Material Request > New
+
+#### Creating Material Request
+
+
+
+A Material Request can be generated:
+
+ * Automatically from a Sales Order.
+ * Automatically when the Projected Quantity of an Item in stores reaches a particular level.
+ * Automatically from your Bill of Materials if you use Production Plan to plan your manufacturing activities.
+ * If your Items are inventory items, you must also mention the Warehouse where you expect these Items to be delivered. This helps to keep track of the [Projected Quantity]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/stock/projected-quantity.html) for this Item.
+
+A Material Request can be of type:
+
+* Purchase - If the request material is to be purchased.
+* Material Transfer - If the requested material is to be shifted from one warehouse to another.
+* Material Issue - If the requested material is to be Issued.
+
+> Info: Material Request is not mandatory. It is ideal if you have centralized
+buying so that you can collect this information from various departments.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/opening-stock.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/opening-stock.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ef285d20aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/opening-stock.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+# Opening Stock
+
+Opening Stock is the Stock quantity in the beginning of every accounting year of an organisation. The closing Stock with the prior accounting year becomes the opening Stock with the existing accounting year.
+ +Opening Stock can be done for serialized Items as well as non-serialized Items.To update opening stock for non-serialized Item, you should perform Stock Reconciliation. For serialised Item, you can make Stock Entry of type Material Receipt. + +> Stock > Stock Reconciliation > New Stock Reconciliation + +In both cases, you should enter "Difference/Expense Account" as **Temporary Opening** account. On submission of the document, system will debit Warehouse account which is an asset account and credit difference/expense account. Before making these entries, make sure you have enabled "Perpetual Inventory" by checking Stock Settings page. + +If you are not making opening Stock Entry, you can select "Stock Adjustment" account in Difference/Expense Account field which is an expense account. + +To understand Opening Stock for serialzed Items visit [Stock Reconciliation]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html) + +{next} diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/projected-quantity.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/projected-quantity.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..796d427f4e --- /dev/null +++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/projected-quantity.md @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Projected Quantity is the level of stock that is predicted for a particular +Item, based on the current stock levels and other requirements. It is the +quantity of gross inventory that includes supply and demand in the past which +is done as part of the planning process. + +The projected inventory is used by the planning system to monitor the reorder +point and to determine the reorder quantity. The projected Quantity is used by +the planning engine to monitor the safety stock levels. These levels are +maintained to serve unexpected demands. + +Having a tight control of the projected inventory is crucial to determine +shortages and to calculate the right order quantity. + + + + +> Projected Qty = Actual Qty + Planned Qty + Requested Qty + Ordered Qty - +Reserved Qty + + * Actual Qty: Quantity available in the warehouse. + * Planned Qty: Quantity, for which, Production Order has been raised, but is pending to be manufactured. + * Requested Qty: Quantity requested for purchase, but not ordered. + * Ordered Qty: Quantity ordered for purchase, but not received. + * Reserved Qty: Quantity ordered for sale, but not delivered. + +{next} diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/purchase-receipt.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/purchase-receipt.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..68f29d4760 --- /dev/null +++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/purchase-receipt.md @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +Purchase Receipts are made when you accept material from your Supplier usually +against a Purchase Order. + +You can also accept Purchase Receipts directly ( Set Purchase Order +Required as “No” in Global Defaults). + +You can make a Purchase Receipt directly from: + +> Stock > Purchase Receipt > New Purchase Receipt + +or from a “Submitted” Purchase Order, by clicking on “Make Purchase Receipt”. + +
+
+### Rejections
+
+In the Purchase Receipt, you are required to enter whether all the materials
+you receive are of acceptable quality (in case you check). If you have any
+rejections, update the “Rejected Quantity” column in the Items table.
+
+If you reject, you are required to enter a “Rejected Warehouse” to indicate
+where you are storing the rejected Items.
+
+### Quality Inspections
+
+If for certain Items, it is mandatory to record Quality Inspections (if you
+have set it in your Item master), you will need to update the “Quality
+Inspection No” (QA No) column. The system will only allow you to “Submit” the
+Purchase Receipt if you update the “Quality Inspection No”.
+
+### UOM Conversions
+
+If your Purchase Order for an Item is in a different Unit of Measure (UOM)
+than what you stock (Stock UOM), then you will need to update the “UOM
+Conversion Factor”.
+
+### Currency Conversions
+
+Since the incoming Item affects the value of your inventory, it is important
+to convert it into your base Currency, if you have ordered in another
+Currency. You will need to update the Currency Conversion Rate if applicable.
+
+### Taxes and Valuation
+
+Some of your taxes and charges may affect your Items value. For example, a Tax
+may not be added to your Item’s valuation, because if you sell the Item, you
+will have to add the tax at that time. So make sure to mark all your taxes in
+the Taxes and Charges table correctly for accurate valuation.
+
+### Serial Numbers and Batches
+
+If your Item is serialized or batched, you will have to enter Serial Number
+and Batch in the Item's table. You are allowed to enter multiple Serial Numbers
+in one row (each on a separate line) and you must enter the same number of
+Serial Numbers as the quantity. You must enter each Batch number on a separate
+line.
+
+* * *
+
+#### What happens when the Purchase Receipt is “Submitted”?
+
+A Stock Ledger Entry is created for each Item adding the Item in the Warehouse
+by the “Accepted Quantity” If you have rejections, a Stock Ledger Entry is
+made for each Rejection. The “Pending Quantity” is updated in the Purchase
+Order.
+
+* * *
+
+#### Adding value to your Items post Purchase Receipt:
+
+Some times, certain expenses that add value to your purchased Items are known
+only after a while. Common example is, if you are importing the Items, you
+will come to know of Customs Duty etc only when your “Clearing Agent” sends
+you a bill. If you want to attribute this cost to your purchased Items, you
+will have to use the Landed Cost Wizard. Why “Landed Cost”? Because it
+represents the charges that you paid when it landed in your possession.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/purchase-return.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/purchase-return.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5a924a2c1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/purchase-return.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+ERPNext has an option for products that are need to be returned to the
+supplier. This may be on account of a number of reasons like defects in goods,
+quality not matching, the buyer not needing the stock, etc.
+
+You can create a Purchase Return by simply making a Purchase Receipt with negative quantity.
+
+First open the original Purchase Receipt, against which supplier delivered the items.
+
+
+
+Then click on "Make Purchase Return", it will open a new Purchase Receipt with "Is Return" checked, items and taxes with negative amount.
+
+
+
+On submission of Return Purchase Return, system will decrease item qty from the mentioned warehouse. To maintain correct stock valuation, stock balance will also go up according to the original purchase rate of the returned items.
+
+
+
+If Perpetual Inventory enabled, system will also post accounting entry against warehouse account to sync warehouse account balance with stock balance as per Stock Ledger.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/sales-return.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/sales-return.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..15b8b11b21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/sales-return.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+Goods sold being returned is quite a common practice in business. They could
+be returned by the customer on quality issues, non-delivery on agreed date, or
+any other reason.
+
+In ERPNext, you can create a Sales Return by simply making a Delivery Note / Sales Invoice with negative quantity.
+
+First open the original Delivery Note / Sales Invoice, against which customer returned the items.
+
+
+
+Then click on "Make Sales Return", it will open a new Delivery Note with "Is Return" checked, items and taxes with negative amount.
+
+
+
+You can also create the return entry against original Sales Invoice, to return stock along with credit note, check "Update Stock" option in Return Sales Invoice.
+
+
+
+On submission of Return Delivery Note / Sales Invoice, system will increase stock balance in the mentioned warehouse. To maintain correct stock valuation, stock balance will go up according to the original purchase rate of the returned items.
+
+
+
+In case of Return Sales Invoice, Customer account will be credited and associated income and tax account will be debited.
+
+If Perpetual Inventory enabled, system will also post accounting entry against warehouse account to sync warehouse account balance with stock balance as per Stock Ledger.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/serial-no.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/serial-no.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..678bd4d4f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/serial-no.md
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+As we discussed in the **Item** section, if an **Item** is _serialized_, a
+**Serial Number** (Serial No) record is maintained for each quantity of that
+**Item**. This information is helpful in tracking the location of the Serial
+No, its warranty and end-of-life (expiry) information.
+
+**Serial Nos** are also useful to maintain fixed assets. **Maintenance Schedules** can also be created against serial numbers for planning and scheduling maintenance activity for these assets (if they require maintenance).
+
+You can also track from which **Supplier** you purchased the **Serial No** and
+to which **Customer** you have sold it. The **Serial No** status will tell you
+its current inventory status.
+
+If your Item is _serialized_ you will have to enter the Serial Nos in the
+related column with each Serial No in a new line.
+You can maintain single units of serialized items using Serial Number.
+
+### Serial Nos and Inventory
+
+Inventory of an Item can only be affected if the Serial No is transacted via a
+Stock transaction (Stock Entry, Purchase Receipt, Delivery Note, Sales
+Invoice). When a new Serial No is created directly, its warehouse cannot be
+set.
+
+
+
+* The Status is set based on Stock Entry.
+
+* Only Serial Numbers with status 'Available' can be delivered.
+
+* Serial Nos can automatically be created from a Stock Entry or Purchase Receipt. If you mention Serial No in the Serial Nos column, it will automatically create those serial Nos.
+
+* If in the Item Master, the Serial No Series is mentioned, you can leave the Serial No column blank in a Stock Entry / Purchase Receipt and Serial Nos will automatically be set from that series.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6f3f1cb6f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b21c4f9286
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+stock-settings
+item-group
+item-attribute
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/item-attribute.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a39c9ee8fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+You can define Attributes and attribute values for your Item Variants here.
+
+
+
+#### Non Numeric Attributes
+
+* For Non Numeric Attributes, specify attributes values along with its abbreviation in the Attribute Value Table.
+
+
+
+#### Numeric Attributes
+
+* If your attribute is Numeric, select Numeric Values
+* Specify the Range and the Increment Value
+
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/item-group.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/item-group.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1d2343d485
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/item-group.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Item Group is the classification category. Depending on the type of product,
+categorise it under its respective field. If the product is
+service oriented, name it under the group head - service. If the
+product is used as a raw-material, you have to name it under the Raw-material
+category. In case, your product is used only in trading, you can categorise it
+under Trading.
+
+
+
+### Create a Item Group
+
+* Select an Item Group under which you wish to create the group.
+
+* Select 'Add Child'
+
+
+
+### Delete an Item Group
+
+* Select the Item Group you want to delete.
+
+* Select 'delete'
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/stock-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..409037a1e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+You can set default settings for your stock related transactions here.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/stock-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/stock-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ab8bf12d04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/stock-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+A Stock Entry is a simple document that lets you record Item movement from a
+Warehouse, to a Warehouse and between Warehouses.
+
+To make a Stock Entry you have to go to:
+
+> Stock > Stock Entry > New
+
+
+
+Stock Entries can be made for the following purposes:
+
+* Material Issue - If the material is being issued. (Outgoing Material)
+* Material Receipt - If the material is being received. (Incoming Material)
+* Material Transfer - If the material is being moved from one warehouse to another.
+* Material Transfer for Manufacturing - If the material being transfered is for Manufacturing Process.
+* Manufacture - If the Material is being received from a Manufacturing/Production Operation.
+* Repack - If the Original item/items is being repacked into new item/items.
+* Subcontract - If the Material is being issued for a sub-contract activity.
+
+In the Stock Entry you have to update the Items table with all your
+transactions. For each row, you must enter a “Source Warehouse” or a “Target
+Warehouse” or both (if you are recording a movement).
+
+**Additional Costs:**
+
+If the stock entry is an incoming entry i.e any item is receiving at a target warehouse, you can add related additional costs (like Shipping Charges, Customs Duty, Operating Costs etc) assotiated with the process. The additional costs will be considered to calculate valuation rate of the items.
+
+To add additional costs, enter the description and amount of the cost in the Additional Costs table.
+
+
+
+The added additional costs will be distributed among the receiving items (where the target warehouse mentioned) proportionately based on Basic Amount of the items. And the distributed additional cost will be added to the basic rate of the item, to calculate valuation rate.
+
+
+
+If perpetual inventory system is enabled, additional costs will be booked in "Expense Included In Valuation" account.
+
+
+
+
+> **Note:** To update Stock from a spreadsheet, see Stock Reconciliation.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/stock-how-to.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/stock-how-to.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e0f5b2f285
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/stock-how-to.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+This page contains most frequently asked questions on Stocks.
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6f3f1cb6f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d6a5816b66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+packing-slip
+quality-inspection
+landed-cost-voucher
+stock-uom-replace-utility
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..aa146b47f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+Landed Cost is the total cost of a product to reach the product at the buyer’s door. Landed costs include the original cost of the item, complete shipping costs, customs duties, taxes, insurance and currency conversion fees etc. All of these components might not be applicable in every shipment, but relevant components must be considered as a part of the landed cost.
+
+> To understand landed cost better, let’s take an example based on our daily lives. You need to purchase a new washing machine for your home. Before making actual purchase, you probably do some investigation to know the best price. In this process, you often found a better deal from a store which is long away from your home. But you should also consider shipping cost while buying from that store. Total cost including transportation might be more than the price you get in your nearby store. In that case you will choose to buy from your nearest store, as landed cost of the item is cheaper in the nearest store.
+
+Similarly in business, identifying landed cost for a item / product is very crucial, as it helps to decide selling cost of that item and impacts company’s profitability. Hence all applicable landed cost charges should be included in item’s valuation rate.
+
+According to the [Third-Party Logistics Study](http://www.3plstudy.com/), only 45% of the respondents stated that they use Landed Cost extensively. The main reasons of not using Landed Cost are unavailability of necessary data (49%), lack of right tools (48%), do not have sufficient time (31%) and not sure how to apply landed cost (27%).
+
+### Landed Cost via Purchase Receipt
+
+In ERPNext, you can add landed cost related charges in “Taxes and Charges” table while creating Purchase Receipt (PR). You should add those charges for “Total and Valuation” or “Valuation”. Charges which are payable to the same supplier from whom you are buying the items, should be tagged as “Total and Valuation”. Otherwise if applicable charges are payable to a 3rd party, it should be tagged as “Valuation”. On submission of PR, system will calculate landed cost of all items, considering those charges and that landed cost will be considered to calculate item’s valuation rate (based on FIFO / Moving Average method).
+
+But in reality, while making Purchase Receipt we might not know all the charges which are applicable for landed cost. Your transporter can send the invoice after 1 month, but there is no point in waiting for booking Purchase Receipt till then. Companies who imports their products / parts, pays a huge amount as Customs Duty. And generally they get invoices from Customs Department after a period of time. In these cases, “Landed Cost Voucher” becomes handy, as it allows you to add those additional charges on a later date, and to update landed cost of purchased items.
+
+### Landed Cost Voucher
+
+You can update landed cost any time in the future via Landed Cost Voucher.
+
+> Stock > Tools > Landed Cost Voucher
+
+In the document, you can select multiple Purchase Receipts and fetch all items from those Purchase Receipts. Then you should add applicable charges in “Taxes and Charges” table. You can easily delete an item if the added charges is not applicable to that item. The added charges are proportionately distributed among all the items based their amount.
+
+
+
+### What happend on submission?
+
+1. On submission of Landed Cost Voucher, the applicable landed cost charges are updated in Purchase Receipt Item table.
+
+2. Valuation Rate of items are recalculated based on new landed cost.
+
+3. If you are using “Perpetual Inventory”, the system will post general ledger entries to correct Stock-in-Hand balance. It will debit (increase) corresponding “warehouse account” and credit (decrease) “Expense Included in Valuation” account. If items are already delivered, the Cost-of-Goods-Sold (CoGS) value has been booked as per old valuation rate. Hence, general ledger entries are reposted for all future outgoing entries of associated items, to correct CoGS value.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/packing-slip.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2c133bd9cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+A packing slip is a document listing the items in a shipment. Usually attached to the goods delivered.
+While Shipping a product 'Draft' for Delivery Notes are created.
+You can make a Packing Slip from these Delivery Notes (Draft)
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..175fa23553
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+In ERPNext, you can mark your incoming or outgoing products for Quality
+Inspection. To enable ERPNext to perform this function, go to :
+
+> Stock > Quality Inspection > New
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/stock-uom-replace-utility.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/stock-uom-replace-utility.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3c5428a38f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/tools/stock-uom-replace-utility.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+#Stock UOM Replace Utility
+
+This tool will help you to change the UOM (Unit of measurement) of an existing Item.
+
+You need to select an Item, system fetches the Existing UOM of that item. You can then select the new UOM for that item
+and specify the conversion factor.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/warehouse.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/warehouse.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..60dd30cd07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/stock/warehouse.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+A warehouse is a commercial building for storage of goods. Warehouses are used
+by manufacturers, importers, exporters, wholesalers, transport businesses,
+customs, etc. They are usually large plain buildings in industrial areas of
+cities, towns, and villages. They mostly have loading docks to load and unload
+goods from trucks.
+
+To go to Warehouse, click on Stock and go to Warehouse under Masters. You
+could also go to the Setup module and click on Warehouse under Master Data.
+
+> Stock > Warehouse > New Warehouse
+
+
+
+In ERPNext, every Warehouse must belong to a specific company, to maintain
+company wise stock balance. The Warehouses are saved with their respective
+company’s abbreviations. This facilitates in identifying which Warehouse
+belongs to which company, at a glance.
+
+You can include user restrictions for these Warehouses. In case you do not
+wish a particular user to operate on a particular Warehouse, you can refrain
+the user from accessing that Warehouse.
+
+### Merge Warehouse
+
+In day to day transactions, duplicate entries are done by mistake, resulting
+in duplicate Warehouses. Duplicate records can be merged into a single
+Warehouse. From the top bar of the system select the File menu. Select Rename
+and Enter the correct Warehouse and check the Merge button. The system will
+replace all the links of wrong Warehouse with the correct Warehouse, in all
+transactions. Also, the available quantity (actual qty, reserved qty, ordered
+qty etc) of all items in the duplicate warehouse will be transferred to the
+correct warehouse. Once merging is done, delete the duplicate Warehouse.
+
+> Note: ERPNext system maintains stock balance for every distinct combination
+of Item and Warehouse. Thus you can get stock balance for any specific Item in
+a particular Warehouse on any particular date.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7777049e2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Great customer support and maintenance is at the heart of any successful small
+business. ERPNext gives you the tools to track all incoming requests and issues
+from your customers so that you can respond quickly. Your database of incoming
+queries will also help you track where the biggest opportunities are for
+improvements.
+
+In this module, you can track incoming queries from your email using Support
+Ticket. You can keep track on Customer Issues raised by Customers on specific
+Serial No and respond to them based on their warranty and other information.
+You can also make Maintenance Schedules for Serial Nos and keep a record of
+all Maintenance Visits made to your Customers.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eaff69e849
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+issue
+warranty-claim
+maintenance-visit
+maintenance-schedule
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/issue.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/issue.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..984a00bac7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/issue.md
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+Issue is an incoming query from your Customer, usually via email or
+from the “Contact” section of your website. (To fully integrate the Support
+Ticket to email, see the Email Settings section).
+
+> Tip: A dedicated support email id is a good way to integrate incoming
+queries via email. For example, you can send support queries to ERPNext at
+support@erpnext.com and it will automatically create a Issue in the
+Frappe system.
+
+
+
+> Support > Issue > New Issue
+
+
+
+#### Discussion Thread
+
+When a new email is fetched from your mailbox, a new Issue record is
+created and an automatic reply is sent to the sender indicating the Support
+Ticket Number. The sender can send additional information to this email. All
+subsequent emails containing this Issue number in the subject will be
+added to this Issue thread. The sender can also add attachments to
+the email.
+
+Issue maintains all the emails which are sent back and forth against
+this issue in the system so that you can track what transpired between the
+sender and the person responding.
+
+#### Status
+
+When a new Issue is created, its status is “Open”, when it is
+replied, its status becomes “Waiting for Reply”. If the sender replies back
+its status again becomes “Open”.
+
+#### Closing
+
+You can either “Close” the Issue manually by clicking on “Close
+Ticket” in the toolbar or if its status is “Waiting For Reply” . If the sender
+does not reply in 7 days, then the Issue closes automatically.
+
+#### Allocation
+
+You can allocate the Issue by using the “Assign To” feature in the
+right sidebar. This will add a new To Do to the user and also send a message
+indicating that this Issue is allocated.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/maintenance-schedule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/maintenance-schedule.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1ae3a3079c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/maintenance-schedule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+All machines require regular maintenance, specially those that contain a lot
+of moving parts, so if you are in the business of maintaining those or have
+some of them in your own premises, this is a useful tool to plan a calendar of
+activities for its maintenance.
+
+If the Customer Issue refers to “Breakdown Maintenance”, this refers to
+“Preventive Maintenance”.
+
+To create a new Maintenance Schedule go to:
+
+> Support > Maintenance Schedule > New Maintenance Schedule
+
+
+
+In the Maintenance Schedule, there are two sections:
+
+In the first section, you select the Items for which you want to generate the
+schedule and set how frequently you want to plan a visit or a maintenance.
+These can be optionally fetched from a Sales Order. After selecting the Items,
+“Save” the record.
+
+The second section contains the maintenance activities planned in the
+schedule. “Generate Schedule” will generate a separate row for each
+maintenance activity.
+
+Each Item in a Maintenance Schedule is allocated to a Sales Person.
+
+When the document is “Submitted” Calendar events are created in the User of
+the Sales Person for each maintenance.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/maintenance-visit.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/maintenance-visit.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4f2bdbf332
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/maintenance-visit.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+A Maintenance Visit is a record of a visit made by an engineer to a
+Customer’s premise usually against a Customer Issue. You can create a new
+Maintenance Visit from:
+
+> Support > Maintenance Visit > New Maintenance Visit
+
+
+
+The Maintenance Visit contains information about the:
+
+ * Customer.
+ * The Items that were inspected / maintenance activity was carried out on.
+ * Details of actions taken.
+ * The person who carried out the actions.
+ * Feedback from the Customer.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/warranty-claim.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/warranty-claim.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a9d1b8bb77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/support/warranty-claim.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+If you are selling **Items** under warranty or if you have sold and extended
+service contract like the Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC), your **Customer**
+may call you about an issue or a break-down and give you the Serial No of this
+Item.
+
+To record this, you can create a new **Warranty Claim** and add the
+**Customer** and **Item** / **Serial No**. The system will then automatically
+fetch the Serial No’s details and indicate whether this is under warranty or
+AMC.
+
+You must also add a description of the **Customer**’s issue and assign it to
+the person who needs to look into solving the issue.
+
+To create a new **Warranty Claim**:
+
+> Support > Warranty Claim > New Warranty Claim
+
+
+
+If a Customer visit is required to address the issue, you can create a new
+Maintenance Visit record from this.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/add-products-to-website.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/add-products-to-website.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..55b7900b22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/add-products-to-website.md
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+### Add Products to the Website
+
+To list your Item on the Website, fill the Item details and save the file.
+Once the file is saved, a plus (+) button will appear next to the Image icon.
+Click on the plus button and add your Item image. The html code will be
+generated automatically.
+
+##### Step 1: Save Image
+
+
+
+
+
+##### Step 2: Check the 'Show in Website' box.
+
+Under the Website section, please check the box that says 'show in Website'.
+Once the box is checked, the page will display other fields for entering
+information.
+
+
+
+
+
+##### Step 3: Enter Website Details
+
+
+
+The page name will be generated automatically. Mention the Item-Group under
+which the Item will be displayed.
+
+#### Item Groups
+
+Mention the Item Group under this column. If you wish to list your Item under
+the broad category products, name your Item Group as Products. In case you
+have various varieties of Item and want to classify them under different
+names, make Item Groups with those names and check the box that says 'show in
+Website'. For Example, if you wish to create a category called 'Bags', create
+a Item Group named Bags.
+
+
+
+Once the Item Group is created go to the Website Settings page under Website.
+Enter the Label, Url, and Parent Label.
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Webpage labels
+
+
+
+Add more Items under a particular Item Group.
+
+To add more Items under a certain Label, mention the Item Group on the Item
+Page. The Items will be added automatically on the Webpage, under the Item
+Group Label. For Example, To add Item-Kiddies Bag and Butterfly Print Bag,
+check the 'Show in Website'box. The Items will be placed under the Label Bags
+on the Webpage.
+
+
+
+
+
+Item Group Display
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/blog-post.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/blog-post.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e0b88627a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/blog-post.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Blogs are a great way to share your thoughts about your business and keep your
+customers and readers updated of what you are up to.
+
+In the age of internet, writing assumes a lot of significance because when
+people come to your website, they want to read about you and your product.
+
+To create a new blog, just create a new Blog from:
+
+> Website > Blog > New Blog
+
+
+
+You can format a blog using the Markdown format.You can also access your blog
+by going to the page “blog.html”.
+
+#### A sample blog-page.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/blogger.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/blogger.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c548817a61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/blogger.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+Blogger is a user who can post blogs.
+You can mention a shori bio about the blogger and also set a avatar here.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a499316c5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+Websites are a core component of any business and having a good website
+usually means:
+
+ * Invest lot of money.
+ * Difficult to update.
+ * Not interactive.
+
+Unless you are a web designer yourself.
+
+Wouldn't it be nice if there was a way to update your product catalog on your
+site automatically from your ERP?
+
+We thought exactly the same and hence built a small Website Development app
+right inside ERPNext! Using ERPNext’s Website module, you can
+
+ 1. Create Web Pages
+ 2. Write a Blog
+ 3. Publish your Product Catalog using the Item master
+
+We will soon be adding a shopping cart facility so that your customers can
+place orders and pay you online!
+
+Though not necessary, to make a good website, you might have to know a bit of
+HTML / CSS or hire the services of a professional. The good part is that once
+this is setup, you can add and edit content, blogs and products directly from
+your ERP.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cf794db006
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+web-page
+blog-post
+web-form
+blogger
+setup
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/introduction-to-website.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/introduction-to-website.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..82f95cb872
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/introduction-to-website.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+Websites are a core component of any business and having a good website
+usually means:
+
+ * Invest lot of money.
+ * Difficult to update.
+ * Not interactive.
+
+Unless you are a web designer yourself.
+
+Wouldn't it be nice if there was a way to update your product catalog on your
+site automatically from your ERP?
+
+We thought exactly the same and hence built a small Website Development app
+right inside ERPNext! Using ERPNext’s Website module, you can
+
+ 1. Create Web Pages
+ 2. Write a Blog
+ 3. Publish your Product Catalog using the Item master
+
+We will soon be adding a shopping cart facility so that your customers can
+place orders and pay you online!
+
+Though not necessary, to make a good website, you might have to know a bit of
+HTML / CSS or hire the services of a professional. The good part is that once
+this is setup, you can add and edit content, blogs and products directly from
+your ERP.
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/product-listing-on-website.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/product-listing-on-website.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0acc8fae93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/product-listing-on-website.md
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+### Listing Item on Website
+
+To list your Item on the Website, fill the Item details and save the file.
+Once the file is saved, a plus (+) button will appear next to the Image icon.
+Click on the plus button and add your Item image. The html code will be
+generated automatically.
+
+##### Step 1: Save Image
+
+
+
+
+
+##### Step 2: Check the 'Show in Website' box.
+
+Under the Website section, please check the box that says 'show in Website'.
+Once the box is checked, the page will display other fields for entering
+information.
+
+
+
+
+
+##### Step 3: Enter Website Details
+
+
+
+The page name will be generated automatically. Mention the Item-Group under
+which the Item will be displayed.
+
+#### Item Groups
+
+Mention the Item Group under this column. If you wish to list your Item under
+the broad category products, name your Item Group as Products. In case you
+have various varieties of Item and want to classify them under different
+names, make Item Groups with those names and check the box that says 'show in
+Website'. For Example, if you wish to create a category called 'Bags', create
+a Item Group named Bags.
+
+
+
+Once the Item Group is created go to the Website Settings page under Website.
+Enter the Label, Url, and Parent Label.
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Webpage labels
+
+
+
+Add more Items under a particular Item Group.
+
+To add more Items under a certain Label, mention the Item Group on the Item
+Page. The Items will be added automatically on the Webpage, under the Item
+Group Label. For Example, To add Item-Kiddies Bag and Butterfly Print Bag,
+check the 'Show in Website'box. The Items will be placed under the Label Bags
+on the Webpage.
+
+
+
+
+
+Item Group Display
+
+
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e14b2fd037
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+Settings for your website can be mentioned under setup.
+
+###Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c3aaac9145
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+website-settings
+social-login-keys
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/social-login-keys.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b8784a3c4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+Social Login enables users to login to ERPNext via their Google, Facebook or GitHub account.
+
+### Enabling Social Logins.
+
+Checkout the following Video Tutorials to understand how to enable social logins on ERPNext
+
+* for FaceBook - https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zC6Q6gIfiw8
+* for Google - https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=w_EAttrE9sw
+* for GitHub - https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bG71DxxkVjQ
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/website-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/website-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..95d705a2a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/setup/website-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+Most of the website related settings can be defined here.
+
+
+
+####Landing Page
+
+* Home Page: You can specify which [Web Page]({{url_prefix}}/user/guides/website/web-page.html) must be the homepage of the website
+
+* Home Page is Products: if Checked, the Home page will be the default Item Group for the website.
+
+* Title Prefix: Set the browser title.
+
+####Website Theme
+
+Select the theme for the website. You can create new Theme for you website also.
+
+
+
+* Select 'create new website theme' if you wish to customize the default website theme.
+
+####Banner
+
+You can add a banner/ logo to your website here. Attach the image and click on set banner from Image.
+An HTML code will be generated by the system under Banner HTML.
+
+
+
+####Top Bar
+
+You can set the menus items in the Top Bar here.
+
+
+
+ * Similarlly you can also set sidebar and footer links.
+
+####Integrations & Miscellaneous Settings
+
+You can integrate the website using Google Analytics and enable social media sharing for post shared on the website.
+
+
+
+* You can disable public signup to your ERPNext account by checking 'disable signup'
+
+{next}
+
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/shopping-cart.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/shopping-cart.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0c27f4bb7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/shopping-cart.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+On the Webpage, a shopping cart is an icon that allows you to store all the
+things that you have earmarked for purchasing. It is a graphical
+representation of a shopping basket or a shopping cart that allows you to save
+the items you intend to buy.
+
+This software displays the price of the product . It also displays shipping
+and handling charges, along with taxes, if applicable.
+
+To set up a shopping cart, go to the selling module.
+
+> Selling > Shopping Cart Settings
+
+#### Step 1: Enter Company Details and Default Territory.
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Enter Price List, Tax Master and Shipping Rule.
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Shopping Cart Display
+
+On the Website, the shopping cart image will be seen below the Item price.
+Customers can click on the cart and enter the amount of quantity they wish to
+buy. The Item number will be stored on the right hand corner of the page, next
+to the flower sign.
+
+
+
+
+
+Click on the flower sign on the right hand side to see the cart details. Click
+on the cart to get the final amount details.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/styling-the-website.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/styling-the-website.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..60af9bc51a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/styling-the-website.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+You can set some basic styles to your page using the styles feature.
+
+#### Background
+
+You can either set a solid background by selecting a color. You can attach a
+file and select it in the “Background Image” box.
+
+#### Fonts
+
+Fonts: Font family of your body text (includes some Open Source fonts). Font-
+size: Font-size of your website body text (large is good). Heading Font: Font
+family of your headings.
+
+Apart from this you can also add custom style rules using CSS
+
+#### Custom CSS
+
+There are tons of CSS rules and tricks that fall out of scope of this manual.
+But you could add your own style to certain elements like h1, h2 etc and also
+create your own style classes that you can use in elements in your body
+content.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/web-form.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/web-form.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9fa8a1b5a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/web-form.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+# Web Forms
+
+Add forms to the website that will add / update data in your tables. Allow users to edit / manage multiple web forms
+ +You can add forms in your website for example, Contact Us, Inquiry, Complaint etc. Data from these can fill up records like Lead, Opportunity, Issue etc. The user can also be allowed manage multiple records (like Complaints etc.) + +--- + +### Creating + +To create a new **Web Form** go to: + +> Website > Web Form > New + +1. Set the Web Form title and url. +1. Select the **DocType** in which you want the user to store the records. +1. Select if you require the user to login, edit records, manage multiple records etc. +1. Add the fields you want in the record. + +
+
+---
+
+### Viewing
+
+Once you create the web form, you can view it on the url and test it out!
+
+
+
+---
+
+### Results
+
+Your data will be stored in the table you have selected
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/web-page.md b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/web-page.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2a4c616235
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/guides/website/web-page.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+Static Content like your Home Page, About Us, Contact Us, Terms pages can be created using the Web Page.
+ +To create a new Web Page, go to: + +> Website > Web Page > New + +
+
+#### Title
+
+The first thing to set is the title of your page. The title has the maximum
+weight for search engines so choose a title that reflects the keywords that
+you are targeting for your audience.
+
+#### Content
+
+After selecting your layout, you can add content (text, images, etc) to each
+of your content boxes. You can add content in Markdown or HTML format. Read
+the section on how to format using Markdown, for more details.
+
+#### Page Link
+
+The web link to your page will be the value of the “Page Name” field +
+“.html”. For example if your page name is contact-us, the web link of your
+page will be yoursite.com/contact-us.html.
+
+#### Images
+
+You can attach images to your web page and show them using the HTML tag or
+using markdown format. the link to your file will be assets/manual_erpnext_com/old_images/erpnext/filename
+
+{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0394638550
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+# User Manual and Videos
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/index.txt b/erpnext/docs/user/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8d9bd8a897
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+guides
+videos
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/videos/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/videos/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9976dd4bad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/videos/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+# ERPNext Videos
+
+
+
+ 
+
+ Step-by-step guides to setting up and using ERPNext
+